Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

Grade 7 Term 2 Latest Exams {All Subjects}

Get free Grade 7 Term 2 Latest Exams {All Subjects} below:

GRADE 7 HRE

GRADE 7 MATHEMATICS

GRADE 7 SOCIAL STUDIES

GRADE 7 INTEGRATED SCIENCE PAPER 1

GRADE 7 PRETECHNICAL PAPER 2

GRADE 7 INTEGRATED SCIENCE PAPER 2

GRADE 7 KISWAHILI PAPER 1

GRADE 8 CREATIVE ARTS AND SPORTS PAPER 2

GRADE 8 CREATIVE ARTS AND SPORTS PAPER 1

GRADE 7 CRE

GRADE 7 CREATIVE ARTS AND SPORTS PAPER 1

GRADE 7 KISWAHILI PAPER 2

GRADE 7 PRECHNICAL PAPER 1

GRADE 7 AGRICULTURE PAPER 1

GRADE 7 CREATIVE ARTS AND SPORTS PAPER 2

GRADE 7 IRE

GRADE 7 ENGLISH PAPER 2

 

Grade 7 Exams Term 1,
Grade 7 revision papers,
Grade 7 revision papers CBC,
Grade 7 exams 2024 questions and answers,
Teachers Arena Grade 7 exams,
Grade 7 EXAMS download,
Teacher co ke GRADE 7 EXAMS,
Integrated Science Grade 7 Exams,

Download Free Form 4 Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects

Latest Form 4 Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects

English form 4 exams plus marking schemes

English form 4 exams plus marking schemes 101 F4 ENGLISH P3 QS.docx 101 F4 ENGLISH P3 MS.docx 101 F4 ENGLISH P2 QS.docx 101 F4 ENGLISH…

English Form 4 Exam With Marking Scheme

Download free English Form 4 Exam With Marking Scheme, below; FORM 4 ENGLISH EXAM FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 1 QUESTION PAPER FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 2 QUESTION…

ENGLISH FORM 4 EXAMS PP1 WITH ANSWERS

NAME……………………………………….. INDEX NO………………………………… Candidate’s signature……………….. Date: ……………………………… 101/1 ENGLISH PAPER I (Functional Skills) Time: 2 Hours GATUNDU SOUTH FORM 4 EVALUATION EXAMINATION Instructions to candidates: Write your name and index number in the…

FORM 4 EXAMINATIONS AND MARKING SCHEMES: ALL SUBJECTS FOR KCSE CANDIDATES- OVER 1,000 PAPERS

You can now download all the form four examinations in all subjects done at the Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE) examinations and their…

Form 4 Exams for all Subjects (Full Papers, Marking Schemes and Confidentials)

In need of Form 4 Exams for all Subjects? You can now download full papers plus their marking schemes and confidentials. These exam papers…

Form 4 exams with marking scheme (Comprehensive papers)

Looking for Four (4) comprehensive exams? look no further. Download all the updated Form 4 exams with marking schemes here. Check the TEACHERS’ RESOURCES…

Form 4 exams 2021-2022 With Answers (Term 1-3)

Download free Comprehensive Secondary School Form Four (4) Exams with marking schemes, here. Remember to visit TEACHERS’ RESOURCES PORTAL for more free resources. FORM 4 SET…

Form 4 Exams With Marking Schemes

Download free complete Form 4 Exams With Marking Schemes here at no cost. FREE FORM FOUR EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES. English- 101/1 QUESTIONS English- 101/1 ANSWERS English- 101/2…

Form 4 latest exam papers plus their marking schemes

Looking for the latest Form four exam papers plus their marking schemes? Well. Download all these examinations here at no cost. The exams are…

Form 4 Free Exam downloads in all subjects (KCSE revision materials free)

Are you looking for form four free examinations and their marking schemes? Look no further. Here you can get free form 4 complete examinations…

Latest Form 4 KCSE Revision Materials, Questions, Exams and Answers

Latest Form 4 KCSE Revision Materials, Questions, Exams and Answers 1. TOPICAL PHYSICS BOOKLET(1)-1.pdf 2nd_term_biology_pp1_mocks_-_2019.pdf 2020 F4 MOCK EXAMS SERIES 1.pdf A DOLL’S ESSAY QUESTIONS…

ENGLISH PP1 FORM 4 JOINT EXAM WITH ANSWERS

NAME…………………………………………………………ADM NO……………………… SCHOOL……………………………………………………. SIGNATURE ………………… DATE……………………………………………… 101/1 ENGLISH FORM FOUR PAPER 1 END OF TERM  EXAMINATION TIME:2 HOURS MWAKICAN JOINT EXAMINATIONS INSTRUCTIONS Write your name and admission number in the spaces provided Sign…

Latest Maranda High KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Latest Maranda High KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free ENG P1 MSCHEME F4.pdf BIO P1 MSCHEME F4.pdf PHY P3 MSCHEME F4.pdf PHY…

Maranda High KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Maranda High KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free Maths Paper 1 Maranda Form 4 End Term 1_2.pdf Kiswahili Paper 2…

Latest Home Science Form 1, 2, 3 and 4 Exams and Marking Schemes Free…

Latest Home Science Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads Latest Exams Set Series Latest Home Science Form 1 Exams and Marking Schemes

Form 1,2,3 and 4 free exams downloads, all subjects- 2021

Are you in need of top quality free examinations for all subjects in form 1, 2, 3 and 4? Here are free exams for…

Latest KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Latest KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free Question Papers 101 – ENGLISH PP1 QS.docx 232 – PHYSICS PP3 QS.docx 232 – PHYSICS…

FORM 4 GEOGRAPHY PP1 JOINT EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES PDF

Name: _______________________________________ school……………………………….. Class:__________   Adm:________/index no……………………………… 321/1 GEOGRAPHY                Paper1                                                                  Time: 2Hrs. 45mins                        GEOGRAPHY       PAPER 1   …

FORM 4 JOINT KCSE REVISION EXAMS WITH ANSWERS FREE

DOWNLOAD ALL THE FORM FOUR KCSE REVISION EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES HERE AT NO COST. FORM 4 JOINT EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES AGR F4 PP1 MS AGR…

2023 Term 1 Exams For Form 1-4, Grade 1-7, Class 8

2023 Term 1 Exams For Form 1-4, Grade 1-7, Class 8 F1 2023 TERM 1 (ENTRY) EXAM .pdf GRADE 1 TERM 1 OPENER…

Free Form 4 KCSE Post Mock Examinations

Free Form 4 KCSE Post Mock Examinations 2020 F4 MOCK SERIES 1 EXAMS – TOP EXAMINERS.pdf CROSS COUNTRY MOCKS SET 1.pdf F1-F4 FULL SET…

ENGLISH FORM 4 END OF TERM 2 EXAM WITH ANSWERS

Name: …………………………       Adm No: ……… Class: …….…………………       Candidate’s Sign: …………………… Date: ……………………………………………………… 101/1 ENGLISH (Functional Skills) TIME: 2 HOURS  END OF TERM 2 EXAM  Kenya Certificate of…

Form 4 Joint Exams Plus Marking Schemes (All Subjects)

Here is the latest Form 4 Joint Exams Plus Marking Schemes (All Subjects). Get all these resources and many at no cost. FORM 4 JOINT…

Latest Form 4 KCSE Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes – All Subjects Free

Latest Form 4 KCSE Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes – All Subjects Free Download AGRICULTURE F4 P1.doc ENGLISH F4 P2.doc AGRICULTURE F4 P2 -…

FORM 4 BIOLOGY PP3 END TERM 2 EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES

NAME ………………………………………………ADM. NO ………………CLASS:………. DATE…………….. 231/3 BIOLOGY PAPER 3 PRACTICAL MARCH/APRIL TIME: 13/4HRS KENYA CERTIFICATE OF SECONDARY EDUCATION Instruction to Candidates Write yourName, Adm. No., Class and Date in the spaces provided …

KENYA HIGH SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY EXAMS FORM 4 PP1

312/ 1 GEOGRAPHY PAPER 1 2 ¾ Hours KENYA  HIGH  SCHOOL  POST MOCK  EXAMINATIONS FORM  4  Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATES This paper consists of two sections A&B. Answer ALL questions…

Form 1-4 free Secondary school exams for term 1 to 3

Download unlimited free examinations for term one to three covering all forms here. These form one, two, three and four exams are available at…

KASSU Jet Form 4 Joint Examination 2021-2022 With Marking Schemes

Download the latest free KASSU Jet Form 4 Joint Examination 2021-2022 With Marking Schemes below. Remember to check TEACHERS’ RESOURCES PORTAL for unlimited and…

Form 4 End term 1-3 Exams, KCSE Revision Exams With Marking Schemes

Here is the largest collection of free Form 4 End term 1-3 Exams and the latest KCSE Revision Exams With Marking Schemes. Feel free…

ENGLISH PP2 FORM 4 JOINT EXAM WITH ANSWERS

Name…………………………….…….……………………………….. Adm  No: ………………………… School …………………………………………………………Candidate’s Signature …………..…………                                                                                                                                                                       …

End term Exams For all subjects (Form 1 to 4) Free

End term Exams For all subjects (Form 1 to 4) Free CRE-FORM-1-NOTES.pdf CRE-FORM-2-NOTES.pdf CRE-FORM-3-NOTES.pdf ENG ENG F1 QN.docx F1 END-TERM 3 EXAMS.pdf F1 ENDTERM 3 ASSIGNMENT.pdf F1 ENDTERM…

Form 4 Free Exams plus marking schemes (All subjects)

Form 4 Free Exams plus marking schemes (All subjects) F3 AGRI MS.docx F3 AGRI QN.docx F3 BIO MS.docx F3 BIO QN.docx F3 BST MS.docx F3 BST QN.docx F3…

Kassu jet KCSE Form 4 final exams plus answers

Kassu jet KCSE Form 4 final exams plus answers BIOLOGY PAPER 1 QUESTIONS.pdf BIOLOGY PAPER 1 QUESTIONS.docx BIOLOGY PAPER 1 SCHEME.docx BIOLOGY PAPER 2 SCHEME.docx BIOLOGY…

Form 1 to 4 free exams and marking schemes

Here is a collection of the latest termly examinations for form one, two, three and four. Get the free termly examinations for all subjects…

ENGLISH FORM 4 END OF TERM 2 EXAM PLUS MARKING SCHEME

Name: ……………………………………………………    Adm No: ………………….. School: ……………………………………………………   Candidate’s Sign: ………… Date: ……………………………………………………… 101/2 ENGLISH (COMPREHENSION, LITERARY, APPRECIATION AND GRAMMAR) PAPER 2 TIME: 2 ½ HOURS END OF TERM 2 EXAM  Kenya Certificate…

FORM 4 BIOLOGY PAPER 2 EXAMS WITH ANSWERS

Name ………………………………….candidate’s signature………………… Date ……………………… 231/2 Biology Time: 2hrs. Biology Paper 231/2 Time: 2hrs Instructions to candidates .Write your name, index number in the spaces provided above. .Sign and write the date of examination…

KENYA HIGH SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY EXAMS FORM 4 PP2

312/ 2 GEOGRAPHY PAPER 2 2 ¾ HOURS KENYA  HIGH  SCHOOL  POST MOCK  EXAMINATIONS FORM  4  Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES This paper consists of two sections A&B Answer ALL questions…

Form 4 latest Exam Papers and Answers Term 1 to 3 Free

Form 4 latest Exam Papers and Answers Term 1 to 3 Free Question Papers Set 1 441 HOME SCIENCE P1 QS.docx 565 F4 BUSINESS…

HISTORY MOKASA FORM 4 JOINT EXAMINATION QUESTIONS & MARKING SCHEME

311/2 HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT PAPER 2 TIME: 2½ hours MOKASA 1 JOINT EXAMINATION EXAM PLUS MARKING SCHEME Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT Paper 2 Section A (25 marks) …

Agriculture Form 1-4 Notes, Exams, revision materials free downloads

Agriculture Form 1-4 Notes, Exams, revision materials free downloads 4. AGRICULTURE KCSE REVISION BOOKLET.doc AGRICULTURE PAST DISTRICT MOCKS 3. REVISION AGRICULTURE FORM ONE TO…

Biology Form 1-4 Notes, Exams, revision materials free downloads

Biology Form 1-4 Notes, Exams, revision materials free downloads 3. KCSE BIOLOGY REVISION BOOKLET.doc Biology form 2 Biology PP1.pdf Biology PP2.pdf Biology PP3.pdf BIOLOGY QP.docx BIOLOGY REVISION AND…

History and Government Free Notes, Exams For all Forms 1 to 4

History and Government Free Notes, Exams For all Forms 1 to 4 1. HISTORY PAPER 1 REVISION BOOKLET(1).doc 2. HISTORY PAPER 2 REVISION…

Latest Kapsabet High KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Latest Kapsabet High KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free Biology BIO PP2 MS.docx BIO PP2.docx BIO PP1 QN.docx BIO PP1 MS.docx Bio p3 Q.docx Bio…

CRE Form 1-4 Notes and Exams (Free downloads)

Here are free CRE notes and exams for form one, two, three and four. You can now download all these PDF and Word format…

Final Kapsabet High KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Final Kapsabet High KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free MATH PP2 MS.docx PHYSICS PP3 QS.docx PHYSICS PP3 MS.docx PHYSICS P3 – CONF.docx PHY…

ENGLISH PP3 FORM 4 KASSU JOINT EXAMINATION TEST PLUS ANSWERS

Name……………………………………………………Index Number………………………………Class…………… Adm. No……………………….Date……………………………. 101/3 ENGLISH PAPER 3 (Creative Writing and Essay based on Set Texts) TIME: 2 ½ HOURS SUNSHINE SECONDARY SCHOOL (Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education) Instructions to candidates: …

FORM 4 MOKASA, KASSU, ELITE KCSE MOCK EXAMS FREE

DOWNLOAD ALL THE KCSE REVISION MOCK EXAMS HERE AT NO COST. PHYSICS CONFIDENTIAL PHYSICS 3 MARKING SCHEME PHYSICS PAPER 1 ANSWERS PHYSICS PAPER 3 QUESTIONS PHYSICS PAPER 2 MARKING…

FORM 4 KCSE REVISION JOINT EXAMS, MOCKS, WITH ANSWERS

DOWNLOAD FREE FORM 4 KCSE REVISION JOINT EXAMS, MOCKS, WITH ANSWERS HERE. ALSO AVAILABLE HERE ARE TOP AND BEST PRE-MOCKS, MOCKS, POST MOCKS, KASSU…

FORM 4 AGRICULTURE PAPER EXAMS PLUS ANSWERS

Name………………………………………………………………………………..Index Number………………….. School………………………………………………………. Candidate’s Signature………….. Date…………………………………… FORM 4 443/1 AGRICULTURE Paper 1 2 hours Instructions to Candidates This paper has three sections A, B and C Answer all questions in section…

ENGLISH FORM 4 KASSU JOINT EXAMINATION TEST PLUS ANSWERS

Name …………………………………….………….. Index Number ………………….. /……..   Signature …………………………………   Date ………………………………………. 101/2 ENGLISH Paper 2 (Comprehension, Literary Appreciation and Grammar) 21/2 hours  KASSU JOINT EXAMINATION TEST Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education Write your…

AGRICULTURE PP2 FORM 4 KCSE EXAM WITH MARKING SCHEME

Name: ………………………………………….Index No: ……………………. 443/2 AGRICULTURE Paper 2 2 hours KASSU EXAMINATION 2021 Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education AGRICULTURE PAPER 2 2 HOURS Instructions to candidates. Write your name and index number in the…

Latest Form 1, 2, 3 and 4 Exams and Marking Schemes – All Subjects…

Best Form 1, 2, 3 and 4 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads (All Subjects) Latest English Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads Teachers’…

Latest Exams Download Form 1 to 4 End Term 1,2 and 3 free

Latest Exams Download Form 1 to 4 End Term 1,2 and 3 free Unlimited downloads (100,000 downloads). FORM 1-4 FREE EXAM DOWNLOADS FORM…

ENGLISH PP3 FORM 4 JOINT EXAM WITH ANSWERS

101/3 FORM 4 ENGLISH  Paper 3 (Creative compositions and essays based on set texts) Time: 2 ½ Hours MWAKICAN JOINT EXAMINATIONS ENGLISH Paper 3 2 ½ Hours Instructions…

ENGLISH PP3 FORM 4 END OF TERM 2 EXAM PLUS MARKING SCHEME

Name: ……………………………………………………………    Adm No: ……………………………… School: ………………………………………………………….      Candidate’s Sign: ……………………. Date: …………………………………………………………. 101/3 ENGLISH (CREATIVE COMPOSITION AND ESSAYS BASED ON SET TEXTS) PAPER 3 TIME: 2 HOURS 30 MINUTES END OF…

Free End Term 1-3 Exams for all forms 1- to 4

Free End Term 1-3 Exams for all forms 1- to 4 F1 ENDTERM 3 AGRIC.pdf F1 ENDTERM 3 BIOLOGY.pdf F1 ENDTERM 3 BUSINESS.pdf F1 ENDTERM…

Alliance High School Form 4 KCSE Prediction Exams plus Marking Schemes For All Subjects…

Alliance High School Form 4 KCSE Prediction Exams plus Marking Schemes For All Subjects Latest PHYSICS PAPER 3 – MS.pdf PHYSICS PAPER 2…

SMARTPASS EXAMINATION FORM 4 ENGLISH PP2

NAME……………………………………………………………….. Index No…………………………. Candidate’s Signature…………………………………………Date……………………………… 101/2 ENGLISH Paper 2 (Comprehension, Literary Appreciation and grammar) Time 2hrs 30mins   SMARTPASS EXAMINATION Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE) MODEL ONE  101/2 ENGLISH Instructions to candidates (a) Write your name, index…

Free Form 4 KCSE Post Mock Examinations, KCSE Predictions, Assignments, Revision Materials

Free Form 4 KCSE Post Mock Examinations, KCSE Predictions, Assignments, Revision Materials 1. TOPICAL PHYSICS BOOKLET(1)-1.pdf 2nd_term_biology_pp1_mocks_-_2019.pdf 2020 F4 MOCK EXAMS SERIES 1.pdf A DOLL’S ESSAY QUESTIONS 0706…

Latest Moi Tea KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Latest Moi Tea KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free Agriculture AGRI F4 PP2.docx AGRI F4 PP1.docx AGRI F4 MSC PP2.docx AGRI F4 MSC…

Free Secondary School Exams and Marking schemes (Form 1 to 4)

You can now download the latest Secondary School Exams and Marking schemes for all subjects, here. Get all the Form one top four examinations…

Form 1 to 4 Free End Term 3, End Year Exams

Form 1 to 4 Free End Term 3, End Year Exams BUS F2.pdf F1 AGRIC END TERM 3 EXAMS.pdf F1 BIO END TERM 3…

SMARTPASS EXAMINATION FORM 4 ENGLISH PP1

Name………………………………………………………………Index No……………………. Candidate’s signature………………………………………………Date…………………………. 101/1 ENGLISH Paper 1 (Functional writing, cloze test and oral skills.)  2 Hours SMARTPASS EXAMINATION Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE) MODEL ONE  ENGLISH Paper 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO STUDENTS Write your name…

Form 4 KCSE Prediction Exams plus Marking Schemes For All Subjects Latest

Form 4 KCSE Prediction Exams plus Marking Schemes For All Subjects Latest SET 2 ENG P3 – M.S.docx ENG P3.docx ENG P1…

FORM 4 KCSE MOCK JOINT EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES

DOWNLOAD FREE FORM 4 POST MOCK JOINT EXAMS WITH MARKING SCHOOLS. KISWAHILI JOINT EXAMS PAPER 2 MARKING SCHEMES KISWAHILI JOINT EXAMS PAPER 2 KISWAHILI JOINT EXAMS PAPER…

Form 4 Paper 2 Mock Exams With Answers

Name: ……………………………………………………    Adm No: ………………….. School: ……………………………………………………   Candidate’s Sign: ………… Date: ……………………………………………………… 101/2 ENGLISH (COMPREHENSION, LITERARY, APPRECIATION AND GRAMMAR) PAPER 2   TIME: 2 ½ HOURS END OF TERM  EXAM  Kenya Certificate of…

Form 4 Exams 2021-2022 With Marking Schemes

Download the following Form 4 Examinations with their marking schemes. The exams are available at no cost and for all subjects and papers. Get…

History & Government notes and exams for forms 1, 2, 3 and 4 free…

Download free History & Government notes and exam papers for all the secondary school forms. Resources available at no cost for all forms; Form…

Machakos School Form 4 KCSE Prediction Exams plus Marking Schemes For All Subjects Latest

Machakos School Form 4 KCSE Prediction Exams plus Marking Schemes For All Subjects Latest ENGLISH F4 P2.doc AGRICULTURE F4 P1.doc AGRICULTURE F4 P2 -…

Form 4 Term 1-3 Free Exams and marking schemes; All subjects downloads

You may be in need of free form four (4) examinations in all subjects. yes. You can now download form 4 Complete exams in…

HOME SCIENCE JOINT EXAMS FORM 4

HOME SCIENCE DISTRICTS  SAMPLED AND COMPILED. NAIROBI SCHOOLS STAREHE BOYS CENTER MANGU HIGH SCHOOL ALLIANCE GIRLS HIGH SCHOOL HOMABAY RACHUONYO MIGORI…

FORM 4 GEOGRAPHY PP2 JOINT EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES PDF

Name: ………………………………………………… school……………………………….. Class:__________   Adm:________/index no……………………………… 321/2 GEOGRAPHY                Paper 2                                   …

FORM 4 BIOLOGY PP3 EXAMS (QUESTIONS, CONFIDENTIAL & ANSWERS)

231/3 BIOLOGY PAPER 3 KASSU TIME: 2 HOURS Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.) REQUIREMENTS FOR EACH CANDIDATE Solution P- starch Solution Q- egg white Solution Z- water Solution…

ENGLISH PP1 FORM 4 JOINT EXAM WITH ANSWERS

NAME…………………………………………………………ADM NO……………………… SCHOOL……………………………………………………. SIGNATURE ………………… DATE……………………………………………… 101/1 ENGLISH FORM FOUR PAPER 1 TIME:2 HOURS MWAKICAN JOINT EXAMINATIONS INSTRUCTIONS Write your name and admission number in the spaces provided Sign and write the…

Latest Computer Studies Form 1, 2, 3 and 4 Exams and Marking Schemes Free…

Latest Computer Studies Form 1, 2, 3 and 4 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads Latest Exams Set Series Latest Computer Studies Form 1 Exams and…

ENGLISH FORM 4 POST-MOCK EXAM WITH MARKING SCHEMES

101/3 FORM 4 ENGLISH  Paper 3 (Creative compositions and essays based on set texts) Time: 2 ½ Hours MWAKICAN JOINT EXAMINATIONS ENGLISH Paper 3 2 ½ Hours Instructions…

SMARTPASS EXAMINATION FORM 4 ENGLISH PP3

Name………………………………………………………….          Index No…………………… Signature……………………………                                                    Date……………………… 101/3                                                                                         ENGLISH                                                                                                             PAPER 3 TIME: 2 ½ HOURS SMARTPASS EXAMINATION Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE) MODEL ONE  101/3 ENGLISH PAPER 3                                       INSTRUCTIONS…

Form 4 Girl Sits For KCSE Exams from Labour Ward

A Form Four girl from Sir Alex Ruchu Girls High School in Kandara, Murang’a County is sitting for her KCSE national exams in the…

FORM 4 BIOLOGY PP1 REVISION EXAMS PLUS ANSWERS

Name…………………………………………………          adm no. ……………class……. School …………………………………………………                     231/1 BIOLOGY PAPER 1 Time:  2 HOURS KASSU JET EXAMINATION  231/1 BIOLOGY PAPER 1 Time:  2  HOURS INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Answer ALL the questions. Answers must…

HISTORY PAPER 2 JOINT EXAMINATIONS FORM 4

Name:……………………………………………AdmNo:……………..School:…………………… Candidate’s Signature…Date:………………………………………. History and Government PAPER 2 Time: 2 ½ hours JOINT EXAMINATION Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education FORM 4 HISTORY EXAMS INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE: Write your name, AdmNo,…

MOKASA JOINT EXAMINATIONS FORM 4 ENGLISH PP1

Name:.………………………………………………………………Adm: ……….Class:……….. Index No: …………………. Date:……………………….. 101/1 ENGLISH Paper 1 (Functional Skills, Cloze Test and Oral Skills). Time: 2 Hours MOKASA 2 JOINT EXAMINATIONS Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education 101/1 ENGLISH Paper 1 (Functional…

Agriculture KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Agriculture KCSE Form 4 Prediction Exams and Marking Schemes Free AGRI P2 MS SET 9.docx AGRI P2 SET 8.docx AGRI P2 SET 7.docx AGRI P2…

Form 4 KCSE 2021/2022 mocks, predictions, termly exams, home works and revision papers; All…

Get unlimited Form 4 KCSE revision papers, predictions, termly examinations, mock papers, home works revision papers, post mock exams and answers for all subjects….

Latest Form Three Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects

Latest Form 3 Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects FREE FORM THREE EXAMS AND MARKING SCHEMES FOR ALL SUBJECTS Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  DOWNLOAD FREE FORM THREE…

Latest Form Two Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects

Latest Form 2 Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects Form 2 exams with marking scheme (Comprehensive papers) Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke  Looking for Two (2) comprehensive…

Latest Form One Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects

Latest Form One Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects Form 1 exams with marking scheme (Comprehensive papers) Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  Looking for One (1) comprehensive…

CRE Simplified Notes Form 1 to 4 Free

FREE CRE NOTES FOR FORM ONE TO FOUR. Download more notes and other teachers’ resources here; Teachers’ Free Resources Portal. CRE LATEST NOTES FOR FORM 1 CRE…

FREE FORM FOUR EXAMS AND MARKING SCHEMES FOR ALL SUBJECTS

DOWNLOAD FREE FORM FOUR EXAMS AND MARKING SCHEMES FOR ALL SUBJECTS FORM FOUR FREE EXAMS CROSS COUNTRY MOCKS SET 1 F4 TERM 2 MIDTERM EXAMS …

Latest Agriculture Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest Agriculture Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free ……………………………….Index No: ……………………. 443/2 AGRICULTURE Paper 2 2 hours…

Form one to four Mid term and End term Exams Free Downloads

Form one to four Mid term and End term Exams Free Downloads F1 MIDTERM 1 EXAMS S1-1.pdf F3 MIDTERM 1 EXAMS S3-1.pdf F4 MIDTERM…

Latest Biology Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest Biology Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free Biology Schemes of Work Form 1-4 Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  0 BIOLOGY…

Latest English Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest English Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free FORM TWO ENGLISH LATEST NOTES Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  0 FORM TWO…

Latest Kiswahili Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest Kiswahili Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free Free Kiswahili notes, revision questions, KCSE past Papers, Exams,…

Form Four latest Exams with Marking Schemes (All subjects)

Form Four latest Exams with Marking Schemes (All subjects)- Unlimited downloads Questions Series 1 ~$1 F4 MATHEMATICS P2 QS.docx ~$3 F4 AGRICULTURE P2 QS.docx ~WRL0005.tmp 101…

ENGLISH FORM FOUR PAPER 3 END OF TERM EXAMINATION

101/3 FORM 4 ENGLISH  Paper 3 (Creative compositions and essays based on set texts) Time: 2 ½ Hours  MWAKICAN JOINT EXAMINATIONS ENGLISH Paper 3 2 ½ Hours Instructions…

Form One To Four Free Exams Downloads Plus Marking Schemes

Form One To Four Free Exams Downloads Plus Marking Schemes End of Term 1  BIOLOGY Paper 1 Question Paper.pdf End of Term 1 …

Latest History Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest History Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free History notes form 1-4 Latest Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  0 Get the…

Biology Form one to four exams, notes and revision materials

Get free Form 1 to 4 Biology examination papers and their marking schemes for free. Also download revision materials and notes at no cost….

Free latest exams with marking schemes (Form one to four )

Download Free latest exams with marking schemes for Form one to four. The termly  examinations cover all subjects and are available for free downloads,…

Termly Secondary Exams For All Subjects (Form one to Four Free)

Termly Secondary Exams For All Subjects (Form one to Four Free) 232-1 QP FINAL-1.pdf 311-2 QP FINAL-1.pdf 311-2 QP FINAL.pdf 312-1 QP FINAL.pdf 443-1 QP FINAL.pdf 451-1…

FORM FOUR MOKASA HISTORY EXAMINATIONS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES

311/1 HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT PAPER 1 TIME: 2½ hours FORM FOUR MOKASA 2 EXAMINATION WITH MARKING SCHEME Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT Paper 1 Section A (25 marks) …

Form four latest updated notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free

Form four latest updated notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free Click on the titles/ headings below to download respective resources at…

Biology Free notes and Exams for Form one to Four

You can now download free Biology Notes, exam papers and KCSE revision materials for high school in forms one, two, three and four. What…

Latest CRE Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest CRE Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free CRE SCHEMES OF WORK FOR FORM 3 UPDATED Teachers’ Resources Media…

FORM FOUR FULL EXAM PAPERS & ANSWERS FOR ALL SUBJECTS: OVER 1,000 KCSE REVISION…

You can now download full sets of the latest Form four ( Form 4) KCSE revision papers, Form 4 termly exams, pre-mock papers, post-mocks,…

Form one to four free Exams in all subjects

Here is your ultimate free access to all secondary school examinations. Download exams in all subjects at no cost. FORM 1 EXAMS FOR TERM 1-3;…

CRE Notes and Exams for Form one to Four; Free Downloads

Download free CRE notes and exam papers for Forms one, two, three and four. These and other materials on this site are absolutely free…

ENGLISH FORM FOUR PAPER 2 END OF TERM EXAMINATION

Name…………………………….…….……………………………….. Adm  No: ………………………… School …………………………………………………………Candidate’s Signature …………..…………                                                                                                                                                …

Latest Home Science Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans,…

Latest Home Science Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free HOME SCIENCE TEACHING UPDATED NOTES Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  0 Home…

Latest Chemistry Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest Chemistry Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free CHEMISTRY FORM 3 END TERM EXAMS PLUS ANSWERS Teachers’ Resources Media…

ENGLISH FORM FOUR PAPER 1 END OF TERM EXAMINATION

NAME…………………………………………………………ADM NO……………………… SCHOOL……………………………………………………. SIGNATURE ………………… DATE………………………………………………   101/1 ENGLISH FORM FOUR PAPER 1 END OF TERM EXAMINATION TIME:2 HOURS MWAKICAN JOINT EXAMINATIONS INSTRUCTIONS Write your name and admission number in the spaces provided Sign…

Form one to Four Free Mid Term and End Term Exams

Form one to Four Free Mid Term and End Term Exams ENG MODEL TEST PAPERS 2023-NEW.pdf FORM 1 MID TERM 2023 new.pdf KIS KARATASI…

Opener, Termly Exams For All Subjects – Form one to Four

Opener, Termly Exams For All Subjects – Form one to Four’ F2 AGRIC T1 SET 2.pdf F2 BIOLOGY T1 SET 2.pdf F2 BUSINESS T1…

Business studies free secondary school notes and exams (Form one to four)

You can now get free Business Studies notes and exams for secondary schools. Download free materials for form one, two, three and four. You…

Latest Mathematics Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest Mathematics Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free Mathematics Free Syllabus Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  0 121 Knec Mathematics Syllabus…

Latest Geography Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest Geography Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free Free Geography notes, revision questions, KCSE past Papers, Exams,…

Latest Physics Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision…

Latest Physics Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free KISII BOYS HIGH SCHOOL FORM 2 PHYSICS EXAMS Teachers’ Resources Media…

Latest Computer Studies Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans,…

Latest Computer Studies Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free COMPUTER STUDIES NOTES FORM 1-4 Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  4 COMPUTER…

FREE FORM ONE TO FOUR EXAMS AND MARKING SCHEMES FOR ALL SUBJECTS

DOWNLOAD FREE FORM ONE TO FOUR EXAMS AND MARKING SCHEMES FOR ALL SUBJECTS FORM 1 EXAMS FOR TERM 1-3; FREE EXAM PAPERS & MARKING SCHEMES …

Latest Form Three Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects

Latest Form 3 Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects FREE FORM THREE EXAMS AND MARKING SCHEMES FOR ALL SUBJECTS Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  DOWNLOAD FREE FORM THREE…

Latest Form Two Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects

Latest Form 2 Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects Form 2 exams with marking scheme (Comprehensive papers) Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke  Looking for Two (2) comprehensive…

Latest Form One Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects

Latest Form One Exams With Marking Schemes for All Subjects Form 1 exams with marking scheme (Comprehensive papers) Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  Looking for One (1) comprehensive…

CRE Simplified Notes Form 1 to 4 Free

FREE CRE NOTES FOR FORM ONE TO FOUR. Download more notes and other teachers’ resources here; Teachers’ Free Resources Portal. CRE LATEST NOTES FOR FORM 1 CRE…

ENGLISH MOCK EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES- UPDATED

NAME……………………………………………………INDEX NO.  ………………CLASS……… ADM NO…………………….DATE: ……………………………..SIGN: …………………….……… ENGLISH Paper 3 2 ½  hrs MANGU HIGH SCHOOL TRIAL 2 MOCK  Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE) INTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Answer three questions…

St Anthony’s Boys’ High School, Kitale; KCSE Performance, Location, History, Fees, Contacts, Portal Login,…

St.Anthony’s Boys’ High School, Kitale is a Boys Boarding school, located in Trans Nzoia County and is well for its dominance in both academics…

Biology free lesson plans for all topics (Form one to four)

Here are all the Biology secondary school lesson plans for all topics. You can also download the editable and pdf lesson plans below. FREE BIOLOGY…

Form 4 latest exam papers plus their marking schemes

Looking for the latest Form four exam papers plus their marking schemes? Well. Download all these examinations here at no cost. The exams are…

Form 4 Free Exam downloads in all subjects (KCSE revision materials free)

Are you looking for form four free examinations and their marking schemes? Look no further. Here you can get free form 4 complete examinations…

HISTORY NOTES FORM 1 FREE

HISTORY NOTES FORM 1 FORM ONE HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT INTRODUCTION TO HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT THE MEANING OF HISTORY History is an account of events that took place in…

ENGLISH PP1 FORM 4 JOINT EXAM WITH ANSWERS

NAME…………………………………………………………ADM NO……………………… SCHOOL……………………………………………………. SIGNATURE ………………… DATE……………………………………………… 101/1 ENGLISH FORM FOUR PAPER 1 END OF TERM  EXAMINATION TIME:2 HOURS MWAKICAN JOINT EXAMINATIONS INSTRUCTIONS Write your name and admission number in the spaces provided Sign…

Ministry of Education Announces 2023 Elimu Form 1 Scholarships; See full details

ANNOUNCEMENT FOR THE ELIMU SCHOLARSHIP PROGRAMME – 2023 The Ministry of Education through Equity Group Foundation and The Jomo Kenyatta Foundation is awarding Secondary School…

CHEMICAL FAMILIES FORM 2 CHEMISTRY NOTES

CHEMICAL FAMILIES; PATTERNS IN PROPERTIES Objectives By the end of this topic, the learner should be able to: (a)   Identify and write electron arrangement of alkali metals, alkaline…

Grade 1,2,3 and 4 free schemes of work, pdf notes and exams (Thousands of…

This is a free resource bank like no other. Download an unlimited number of the Competency Based Curriculum (CBC) notes, exams, time tables, schemes…

MOKASA KCSE JOINT HISTORY EXAMS & MARKING SCHEMES

311/2 HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT PAPER 2 TIME: 2½ hours FORM FOUR  EXAMINATION Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT Paper 2 MOKASA II QUESTIONS & ANSWERS Instructions to Candidates Answer ALL questions Section…

FORM 3 PHYSICS LESSON NOTES UPDATED

TOPIC 1.: LINEAR MOTION 1.1: Introduction The study of motion is divided into two areas namely kinematics and dynamics. Kinematics deals with the motion aspect only…

FORM 2 AGRICULTURE SCHEMES OF WORK

SCHEME  OF  WORK             FORM  TWO  AGRICULTURE              TERM  ONE  YEAR  20…….. WK NO L/ NO. TOPIC/ SUBTOPIC LESSON / SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES TEACHING / LEARNING ACTIVITIES MATERIALS / RESOURCES REF. REMARKS  1 1 INORGANIC FERTILIZERS   Macro-nutrients.           Nitrogen.         To identify plants macronutrients. To classify macro-nutrients as fertilizers and liming…

BIOLOGY NOTES FORM 1,2,3 & 4 FREE

BIOLOGY FORM 3 REVISION NOTES a) i) What is meant by the term binomial nomenclature? scientific system of naming organisms using the generic(genus) and…

2023 Knec exams registration guidelines for KCSE, KCPE, KPSEA, Business, Technical Exams

2023 Knec exams registration guidelines for KCSE, KCPE, KPSEA, Business, Technical Exams     THE KENYA NATIONAL EXAMINATIONS COUNCIL “Tramfor111i11g Li11es Through Quality Assessment anti Credible Cert(ficatio11”   All official…

CS Magoha launches the 2020 KCSE, KCPE examinations and issues instructions to Knec contracted…

SPEECH BY PROF. GEORGE A. O. MAGOHA, EGH, CABINET SECRETARY, MINISTRY OF EDUCATION DURING THE LAUNCH OF 2020 NATIONAL EXAMINATION PERIOD AND ISSUING OF…

Biology Schemes of work term 1-3 Form 4

Get free Form Four Biology schemes of work for term 1, 2 and 3. Download a pdf and editable copy of the schemes of work…

Form one to Four Poetry Revision Questions & Answers Free

GOLDEN ELITE EDUCATIONAL CONSULTANCY   POETRY REVISION QUESTIONS   Read the poem below and answer the questions that follow.                        (20 marks) Old and New  She went…

SCHEME OF WORK FORM FOUR HISTORY TERM 1-3 UPDATED

    SCHEME  OF  WORK                 FORM  FOUR  HISTORY                  TERM  ONE  20……………….   WK L NO TOPIC/ SUBTOPIC LESSON / SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES TEACHING / LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES / MATERIALS REF. REMARKS 1     1 WORLD WARS   Causes of World War I.       Identify the causes of world war…

Form two latest updated notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free

Click on the titles/ headings below to download respective resources at no cost. KISII BOYS HIGH SCHOOL FORM 2 PHYSICS EXAMS Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  0 Name……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. KISII…

HISTORY SCHEMES OF WORK FORM 1-4 (EDITABLE)

WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB-TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES TEACHING/LEARNING ACTIVITIES TEACHING/LEARNING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS SCHEMES OF WORK HISTORY FORM ONE TERM I   4                 1   Introduction to History and Government       –         Meaning of history –         Meaning of Government   By the end of the lesson, the learner…

Knec Invitation For Training Of 2023 National Exam Setters & Moderators

The Kenya National Examinations Council- Knec  ADVERTISEMENT FOR TEST DEVELOPMENT PROFESSIONALS (SETTERS AND MODERATORS)  The Kenya National Examinations Council is in the process of expanding its…

Choosing Career Opportunities after KCSE Exama (Ultimate Guide)

GUIDE ON CAREER CHOICES   With KCSE results out, many students, parents, teachers and others are seeking information on careers. Career placement is an important aspect…

Biology notes form 1-4; Free KCSE downloads

Download unlimited Biology notes, text books and other revision materials here for free. Available notes and resources are for all forms i.e form one…

BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FORM ONE

BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FORM ONE CHAPTER ONE INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS STUDIES Definition of terms used in business studies Business – refers to any activity that is carried out…

Schools’ reopening: Keep learners at home until November 2021, push KCSE, KCPE exams to…

A group of unions is proposing that learners to continue staying at home for longer, citing the ‘unsafe’ school environment due to the current…

KCSE HOME SCIENCE JOINT EXAMS (QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS)

DISTRICTS  SAMPLED AND COMPILED NDHIWA SOTIK KAKAMEGA CENTRAL NYAMIRA HOMABAY RACHUONYO MIGORI UGENYA/UGUNJA KISUMU WEST MATUNGU BUTERE KAKAMEGA EAST NYATIKE KHWISERO TRANS…

BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES, FORM 3 ALL TOPICS

Form three business notes for all the topics tested in the Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education, KCSE; DEMAND AND SUPPLY Meaning of demand Demand is the…

ENGLISH FORM 4 PP1 QUESTIONS WITH MARKING SCHEMES

Name: …………………………………………………….               Adm No: ……………………………..   Class: …….………………………………………………                Candidate’s Sign: ……………………   Date: ………………………………………………………       101/1 ENGLISH (Functional Skills)   TIME: 2 HOURS     END OF TERM  EXAM  Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.) FORM FOUR English (Functional…

HIGH SCHOOL ENGLISH NOTES FORM THREE

SECONDARY ENGLISH NOTES FORM THREE  LISTENING & SPEAKING FOR FORM 3  PRONUNCIATION STRESS AND INTONATION IN SENTENCES STRESS Not all syllables in a word are given equal emphasis. By…

COMPUTER STUDIES FORM 1 COMPREHENSIVE NOTES

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS This chapter introduces the student to what a computer is, classifies computers into different categories, compares the different classes of computers…

Free primary and secondary notes, schemes and exams

Looking for free primary and secondary notes, exams, schemes of work and revision materials? Get all these and many more resources below; Your free education…

 FORM 2 TERM 1 OPENER EXAM

AGRI FORM 1  FORM 2 TERM 1 OPENER EXAM NAME ……………………………………………….. ADM …………….. CLASS…………. Instructions: Answer all the questions in the spaces provided What are farm records? (1mk)     …

BIOLOGY FORM 3 REVISION NOTES

BIOLOGY FORM 3 REVISION NOTES TOPIC BY TOPIC a) i) What is meant by the term binomial nomenclature? scientific system of naming organisms using…

Business Studies Notes Form 1,2,3 and 4 Free

FREE BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FORM 1-4 BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FOR FORM 1 BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FOR FORM 4 BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FOR FORM 3 BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FOR…

AGRICULTURE REVISION BOOKLET FORM 1-4

TOPICS COVERED SECTION I QUESTIONS  INTRODUCTION TO AGRICULTURE………………………………………………………..3 CROP PRODUCTION I (LAND PREPARATION) ……………………………………………5  FACTORS WHICH INFLUENCE AGRICULTURE……………………………………………5 WATER SUPPLY, IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE…………………………………..…………. SOIL FERTILITY…

Mathematics free lesson plans for all topics (Form one to four)

Here are all the Mathematics secondary school lesson plans for all topics. You can also download the editable and pdf lesson plans below. FREE MATHEMATICS…

Makini School; KCSE Performance, Location, Form One Admissions, History, Fees, Contacts, Portal Login, Postal…

Makini school is one of the best performing private secondary school in Kenya. This article provides complete information about this school. Get to know…

Moi Girls Nangili Secondary School’s KCSE Results, KNEC Code, Admissions, Location, Contacts, Fees, Students’…

Moi Girls Nangili Secondary School is a Girls’ only boarding Secondary School, located in Likuyani near Soy Town, Likuyani Constituency in Kakamega County; within…

English Form 4 Exam With Marking Scheme

Download free English Form 4 Exam With Marking Scheme, below; FORM 4 ENGLISH EXAM FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 1 QUESTION PAPER FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 2 QUESTION…

Agriculture free lesson plans for all topics (Form one to four)

Here are all the Agriculture secondary school lesson plans for all topics. You can also download the editable and pdf lesson plans below. FREE AGRICULTURE…

Mathematics Form 4 Simplified notes (All Topics)

FREE FORM FOUR MATHEMATICS NOTES Read all the form 4 notes here. You can also download a copy of the pdf notes on this link;…

Form 1,2,3 and 4 free exams downloads, all subjects- 2021

Are you in need of top quality free examinations for all subjects in form 1, 2, 3 and 4? Here are free exams for…

CRE FORM ONE NOTES, REVISION QUESTIONS & ANSWERS

FORM ONE NOTES INTRODUCTION TO CHRISTIAN RELIGIOUS EDUCATION THE IMPORTANCE OF LEARNING CRE Definition of Christian Religious Education (CRE) Christian Religious Education is the study…

St Joseph’s Girls High School Kitale KCSE Results, KNEC Code, Admissions, Location, Contacts, Fees,…

St. Joseph’s Girls High School is a girls’ only KCSE top performing boarding school located about 7km from Kitale town, along the Kitale-Kakamega main…

Biology Updated Notes For All Forms Free Downloads

Biology Updated Notes For All Forms Free Downloads 2018-Biology-Booklet.pdf ALL BIOLOGY PHOTO DIAGRAMS.pdf BIO-F3-P3.docx BIOLOGY ESSAY QUESTIONS & EXPECTED ANSWERS-1.pdf BIOLOGY ESSAY REVISION.pdf BIOLOGY ESSAYS.doc BIOLOGY ESSAYS.pptx BIOLOGY F1-4…

HISTORY NOTES FORM ONE: NEW SYLLABUS SIMPLIFIED NOTES

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT FORM  ONE CONTENTS. Chapter 1: Introduction to history and government   The meaning of history and government Sources of history and government Importance of studying history and…

Free Form 3 Notes, schemes of Work and Exams

Get Free form three Notes, schemes of Work and Exams here at no cost: FORM 3 ALL SUBJECTS EXAMS, ASSIGNMENTS: FREE … FORM 3 NOTES FOR…

Form one latest updated notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free

Form one latest updated notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free Click on the titles/ headings below to download respective resources at…

Physics Form 2 Notes, Revision Questions And Answers

TOPIC: MAGNETISM Magnets attract certain materials known as magnetic materials e.g. iron, cobalt and their alloys. Magnets are made  of these magnetic materials. PROPERTIES OF MAGNETS The…

FORM 1 ALL SUBJECTS EXAMS: TERM 1-3 FREE EXAMS & ANSWERS

Looking for form one examinations in all subjects? You can now download form one termly exams, assignments, home works, revision papers and marking schemes…

BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FORM 1-4: UPDATED

Business studies notes for form one to four. Read through the notes that cover all the topics tested at the Kenya Certificate of Secondary…

FORM 3 NOTES FOR ALL SUBJECTS; FREE PDF & WORD DOWNLOADS

If you are looking for the latest secondary school form three notes for all subjects, then this is the right place. Here, you can…

Free Lower Primary (Grade 1-6), PP1 and PP2 free notes, Schemes and exams downloads

Get unlimited Free Lower Primary (Grade 1-6), PP1 and PP2 free notes and exams downloads in this site. The materials are absolutely free of…

CHEMISTRY FORM FOUR NOTES: NEW

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II: ALCOHOLS AND ALKANOIC ACIDS: 1. Alkanols Nomenclature of alkanols Primary secondary and tertiary alcohols Preparation and properties of alcohols Hydrolysis of halogenoalkanes …

HOME SCIENCE FORM 1 NOTES FREE

HOME SCIENCE FORM 1 NOTES For all notes, examinations and other education materials visit https://educationnewshub.co.ke/category/teachers-resources/ Home Science may seem like a totally new area to you, since…

Chemistry High School notes for form 1-4 (Free updated pdf downloads)

Free and updated chemistry notes are now available here. Download our resources today at no cost. Also look out for the following free resources…

Free Grade 4 Notes, schemes of Work and Exams

Get Free Grade 4 Notes, schemes of Work and Exams here at no cost: Grade 4 schemes of work (Term 1, 2 and 3) Teachers’ Resources Media…

COMPUTER STUDIES COMPREHENSIVE REVISION QUESTIONS & ANSWERS PER TOPIC

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS

  1. (a) Clearly define a computer
    • A computer is an electronic device that operates (works) under the control of programs stored in its own memory unit
    • An electronic device that accepts data, as input and transforms it under the influence of a set of special instructions called programs, to produce the desired output (referred to as information)

(b) Give one reason why a computer is referred to as an electronic device

  • It uses electrical signals to process data
  • It is made up of electronic components and uses electric energy to operate

 

  1. Explain the following terms as used in computer science
  • Data
    • collection of raw facts, figures or instructions that do not have much meaning to the user

 

  • Program
    • computer program is a set of related instructions which specify how data is to be processed

A set of instructions used to guide a computer through a process

  • Data processing

It is the process of collecting all terms of data together & converting them into information

  • Information

Data which has been refined summarized & manipulated in the way you want it, or into a more meaningful form for decision- making

 

  1. State any three functions of a computer
    • Accepting data
    • Processing the data
    • Producing information

 

  1. Explain the following input/ output terms as used in computer systems. Give an example for each

(a)        Read – To transfer data from an input device to the computer, e.g. the computer

reads data from a disk, a keyboard, etc

–         To move  or copy data from backing storage to the main

Storage

(b)       Write –            To transfer information from the computer to an output

Device e.g. the computer writes output on a printer or onto a disk.

–         To move or copy data from the main storage to a backing storage

 

  1. State four different parts that make up a computer                         (2 mks)
    • System unit
    • Monitor
    • Keyboard
    • Mouse
    • Printer
    • Modem
    • Scanner
    • Speakers
    • Graph plotters

 

  1. (a) Explain the term system Unit

This is the casing that houses the internal components of the computer such as the CPU and storage devices

 

(b)       List four devices located under the cover of the system unit

  • Central processing Unit (CPU)
  • Motherboard
  • Power supply unit
  • Main memory
  • Hard disk

Disk drives

Battery

Buses

  • Input/ output ports
  • Video card
  • Expansion slots

 

(c) Give two differences between tower – style and desktop system units

  • Tower style system unit is designed to stand alone or to be placed on the floor, desktop units lie on the desk with the monitor placed on top
  • Tower style units have more space for expansion than the typical desktop units

(2 mks)

 

  1. Computers have evolved through a number of generations. List any 4 characteristics of the first generation of computers.
    • Large in physical size
    • Relied on thermionic valves (vacuum tubes) to process and store data
    • Consumed a lot of power
    • Produced a lot of heat
    • The computers constantly broke down due to the excessive heat generated; hence were short- lived, and were not very reliable
    • Their internal memory capacity/ size was low
    • Processing speed was very slow

Very costly

Used magnetic drum memory

 

  1. Briefly explain the classification of computer according to historical development

(generations)

First generation computers

  • Used vacuum tubes in their memory
  • Large in physical size
  • consumed a lot of power
  • Produced a lot of heat
  • The computers constantly broke down due to the excessive heat generated; hence were short- lived and were not very reliable
  • Their internal memory capacity/ size was low
  • Slow in processing data
  • Very costly
  • Used magnetic drum memories
  • Cards were sued to enter data into the computers

 

Second generation computers

  • Used transistors in their memory
  • They consumed less power & produced less heat than the first generation computers
  • They were relatively faster than the 1st generation computers

Used magnetic core memories

Were less costly than first generation computers

RAM memory capacity was 32 KB

 

Third Generation computers

  • Used integrated circuits in their memory
  • They were faster than second generation computers
  • RAM memory capacity was 2 GB
  • Slightly smaller in size than 1st& 2nd generation computers
  • They used a wide range of peripheral devices
  • Could support remote communication facilities/ more than one user at the same time
  • Magnetic disks were introduced for storage purposes

 

Fourth generation computers

  • Used large scale integrated (LSI) circuits & very large scale integrated (VLSl) circuits in their memory
  • They were small & very fast
  • Had storage (memory) capacity
  • Magnetic disks, bubble memories & optical disks were used for storage – The first operating system was introduced

 

Fifth generation computers

Are the modern computers

 

Are designed/ constructed using parallel architectures, 3 –D circuit design & superconducting materials

  • Are very powerful, with very high processing speeds
  • The computers can perform multiprocessing
  • Have virtually unlimited ( very high) memory sizes
  • Can support complex programs
  • Use advanced hard disks and optical disks for storage, e.g. DVDs
  • Use of zip disks
  • Use of multi user operating systems & advanced application programs

 

  1. State four factors used to classify computers
    • Physical size & processing power
    • Power
    • Functionality (mode/ method of operation)
    • Type of processor (CPU)

 

  1. State the differences between desktop computers and laptop computers
    • Desktop is designed to be used when placed on a desk in an office environment.

A laptop can be used comfortably when placed on the User‟s lap

  • A laptop is small & portable; desktop computers are not portable

 

  1. (a)      Explain the emerging trends in microcomputer technology  in relation to 

size

PCs are becoming small and portable, e.g. personal Digital Assistant (PDA).

 

(b) Give two reasons why smaller computers like Laptops tend to be more expensive than Desktop computers

  • The technology of producing smaller devices is expensive
  • They are convenient because they are portable
  • They have advanced power management capabilities (they consume less power since a laptop  can operate  on rechargeable  batteries

 

  1. Which category of computers would you place an N- series Nokia phone
    • Microcomputer/ palmtop

 

  1. Give three reasons why a mobile phone is regarded to be a computer
    • It is electronic * uses electric energy to operate
    • It has a display unit (screen)
    • It has a keypad
    • It has a memory for storage
    • It is programmable

 

  1. (a) Mention three Analogue devices
    • Computer used to control a flight Simulator for training pilots
    • Bathroom scale
    • Thermometer

Speedometer

  • Post- office scale
  • A radio with a knob that slides in a slot to increase volume

 

            (b) Give three example of special – purpose computers

  • Robots
  • Mobile phones used for communication only
  • Calculators that carry out calculations only
  • Computers used in digital watches & in petrol pumps
  • Computers used in petrol pumps
  • Computers used in washing machines
  • An automatic pilot
  • A word processor

 

  1. State a specific example where each of the following types of computers can be used

                        (a) Supercomputer

  • Weather forecasting
  • Petroleum research
  • Defense and weapon analysis
  • Aerodynamic design and simulation

 

            (b) Mainframe computer                                                                               ( 1mk)

Banks for preparing bills, payrolls, etc

 

 

  • Hospitals
  • Airports (i.e., in Airline reservation systems for booking & storing flight information) –           Communication networks as servers

 

            (c) Minicomputer                                                                                           (1 mk)

  • Scientific laboratories & research institutions
  • Engineering plants for controlling chemical or mechanical processes
  • Space industry
  • Insurance companies & banks for accounting purposes
  • Communication centers as servers

 

            (d) Microcomputer / personal computer                                                      ( 1mk)

  • Training & Learning institutions, e.g. schools
  • Communication centers as terminals
  • Small business enterprises e.g. shops, small offices and homes

 

  1. (a) Define a microcomputer                                                                         ( 1 mk)
    • A computer who‟s CPU (processor) has been implemented with a microprocessor

 

            (b) Differentiate between a microcomputer and a personal computer ( 2mks)

  • A microcomputer is larger in physical size than a PC        –           A microcomputer is more powerful than a PC

A PC was designed to be used by one person only

            (c) List three factors to be considered when purchasing a microcomputer           (3 mks)

  • Type of processor
  • Processing speed
  • Amount of main memory (RAM)
  • Storage capacity of the hard disk
  • Cost of the computer
  • Speed of output devices
  • Number of users who can access the computers at the same time

 

  1. Explain four reasons which make microcomputers suitable for personal computing work
    • Reduced cost, i.e. are cheaper than the minicomputers & mainframe computers
    • Have high processing speed
    • Are small in size (occupy less office space)
    • Are more energy efficient (i.e. consume less power)
    • Are more reliable in doing various functions than the early mainframe computers     –           Are versatile (i.e. can be used for many different tasks)

 

  1. (a) Identify and explain five areas where computers are used to process data ( 10 mks)

Supermarkets

  • For stock control i.e. records of what is in store, what has been sold, and what is out of stock

For calculating customer‟s change

  • For production of receipts
  • It can be used as a barcode reader

Banks

  • Manage financial transactions through the use of special cash dispensing machines called ATMs used for cash deposit & withdrawal services
  • Processing of cheques
  • For preparation of payrolls
  • Better record keeping & processing of documents
  • Provide electronic money transfer facilities

                        Homes

  • Entertainment e.g. watching movies, playing music, playing computer games
  • For storing personal information/ documents
  • For calculating & keeping home budgets

                        Industries

  • To monitor and control industries processes through the use of robots
  • For management control, i.e. to keep track of elders, bills and transactions
  • For advertisement purposes, which enable an industry to attack more customers

                        Police stations

  • Matching, analyzing & keeping databases of fingerprints
  • For taking photographs & other identification details
  • For record keeping
  • For face recognition, scene monitoring & analysis which help the police carry out criminal investigations speedily

 

 

            Transport industry

  • Airports; to control the movement of aircrafts, their take off & landing using radar equipment
  • For making reservations (booking purposes)
  • Storing flight information
  • Automobile traffic control; to monitor vehicle traffic in busy towns
  • In Railways corporations; to coordinate the movement of goods & wagons
  • In shipping control, for efficient management of fleets, cargo handling & communication

Offices

  • For receiving & sending of information through e- mails, fax, etc
  • Production of documents
  • Keeping of records

 

  1. Identify three advantages of using computers in banking (3 mks)
    • Speed and accuracy
    • Easy to access information
    • Easy to update records
    • Requires less space for storage
    • Improves data security and privacy

 

 

 

 

  1. (a) Define the term „ computer laboratory‟ ( 2 mks)
    • A computer laboratory is a room that has been specially prepared to facilitate installation of computers, and provide a safe conducive environment for teaching & learning of Computer studies.

(b) Give two factors to be considered when preparing a computer laboratory (2 mks)

  • Security of computers
  • Reliability of the source of power
  • Number of computers to be installed and the amount of space available – The maximum number of users that the laboratory can accommodate

 

  1. List down three safety precautions one should observe when entering a computer

laboratory                                                                                                                  (3 mks)

  • Avoid smoking or exposing computers to dust
  • Avoid carrying foods & drinks/ beverages to the computer room
  • Avoid unnecessary movements as you may accidentally knock the peripheral devices
  • Only authorized people should enter the computer room
  • Computers users should be trained on how to use computers frequently
  • Computer illiterates should not be allowed to operate the computers
  • collect any waste papers which might be lying in the computer room & put them into the dustbin
  • Shut the door of the computer room properly

 

  1. Describe the ideal environment for a computer to work properly                        (3 mks)
    • Should be free from dust, water and magnets
    • Should be kept in well ventilated rooms with optimum (medium) humidity

 

  1. Explain why smoke and Dust particles are harmful to a computer
    • Dust and smoke particles settle on storage devices and may scratch them during read/ write operation
    • It affects the cooling of the computer

 

  1. Identify three facilities that will ensure proper ventilation in a room
    • Large & enough windows and doors
    • Installing fans
    • Installing air conditioning system
    • Avoid overcrowding of either machines or people in the room

 

  1. Why must foods and beverages be kept out of the computer room?
    • Food particles may fall into the moving parts of the computer and damage them. Liquids may spill into the computer parts causing rusting or electrical faults
  2. Why would it not be good to install Powder or Water – based fire extinguishers in thecomputer room?
    • Powder particles settle on storage devices and may scratch them during read/ write operation
    • Water causes rustling of metallic parts and short – circuits if used

 

  1. (a) State one reason why a computer needs to be  connected to a stable  power supply

(1 mk)

  • To prevent damage to the computer‟s secondary storage media
  • To avoid damage and loss of important data or information such as application software stored on the media
  • Prevent loss of data/ information that had not been saved before the failure

 

            (b)       List down four functions of the uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) (4 mks) 

  • It prevents sudden power surges that might destroy the computer
  • It supplies power to the Computer during blackouts and brownouts
  • It provides stable (clean) power supply
  • Alerts the user of power loss (by beeping)
  • Allows the user to save his/ her work, and switch off the system using the correct procedure
  1. Mention two things that are likely to cause strain- in the computer room
    • Poor lighting of the room
    • Bright monitors
    • Flickering monitors
    • Very bright wall paints reflect too much light
  2. Identify three proper sitting postures while using the computer
    • Adopt relaxed and straight back position to avoid bending forward or learning far backwards
    • The feet should be firmly placed flat on the floor
    • The seat must be high enough allowing the eyes to be the same level with the top of the

Screen

  • The seat must have a straight backrest that allows someone to sit upright. This prevents muscle pains & backaches caused by poor sitting  posture
  • The height of the chair or working surface must be high enough such that your forearms

are parallel with the floor and your wrists are straight.

  • The seat must be high enough relative to the table to enable the user use the hands on the peripheral devices comfortably.
  1. State two methods of minimizing dust in a computer laboratory
    • Fit the computer room with special curtains to reduce entry of dust particles
    • Cover the floor with carpets in order to absorb dust
    • Regular cleaning of the laboratory
    • Cover the computer devices with dust covers when cleaning the room

 

  1. Name two main causes of fire in the computer laboratory and give the precautions that should be taken to guard against them
    • Inflammable chemical such as those used to clean the computer equipment

Keep the chemicals away in store after use

  • Open wires/ cables
  • Ensure that all electrical wires are properly insulated
  • Ensure that the computer room has a gaseous fire extinguisher containing carbon dioxide in case of any accidents
  • Smocking

 

  1. What is the purpose of labeling a diskette?
    • To prevent confusing the data in the different diskettes
    • To prevent mixing diskettes that are used everyday with those used for long- term storage of important data.

 

  1. List three things that can spoil a printer if they are not of the correct specification, and explainwhat damage may be caused
    • Printer Paper: Different printers have different sensitivity to printing papers. Using the wrong quality paper in a particular printer can make the paper get stuck
    • Cartridges & Ribbons: Printers are very specific to manufacture‟s cartridges & ribbons

Use of clones or imitations ( i.e., the wrong make & model) can damage the printer mechanism (iii) Refilling of cartridges or re- inking of ribbons: It can spoil the printer due to leakage or use of poor quality materials

 

  1. Explain three ways that computer technology could make office more efficient (3 mks)
    • There is easier & faster retrieval of data, i.e. they reduce the time and effort needed to access and retrieve information
    • Increased accuracy of data
    • Better presentation of data
    • Ensure faster processing of data
    • Ensures economic use of storage space

 

  1. (a) Explain the steps you would follow to set up a new computer
    • Gently and carefully connect the interface cable of each device to the correct port and

to the device.

  • Connect the computer to the source of power and switch it on.
  • Observe boot up information on the screen to see whether Power-On Self Test (POST) displays any error message. A successful boot means that the computer was properly setup.

 (b) Outline three reasons why it is important to first shut down the computer before

turning itoff

  • To avoid damaging storage devices that may still be in use
  • To avoid damaging system and application files
  • To avoid loss of data and information ( 3 mks)

 

  1. A computer must go through the process of booting/ initialization before use
    • Briefly explain the term “computer booting”.

Booting refers to the starting up of a computer. It is the entire process that makes the computer ready for use.

  • Explain what happens in the computer during the booting process

When the power is switched on, internally, it first checks whether all the components are in good working condition, i.e. the RAM, CMOS (BIOS), hard disk & floppy disk drive controllers, and the keyboard. If no problem is found, it then loads the operating systems

 

  • Give and explain two types of booting
  • Cold booting:

It happens when a computer which was originally off is switched on by pressing the power button on the systems unit

The Computer starts by checking all its components to determine whether they are functioning properly

 

  • Warm Booting

This happens when a computer that was originally on is forced to restart by pressing the restart button on the system unit by pressing a combination of keys on the keyboard (

CTRL + ALT + DEL)

(d) What type of memory is used to store the boot up program (the first program to be executed onswitching on a computer?

Read – only Memory (ROM)                                                                         ( 1mk)

 

  1. (a) What is a computer keyboard

An input device that lets the user enter commands into the computer for execution by

typing

 

            (b) List four types of keys found on a computer keyboard, giving an example of each

                                                                                                                                    ( 4mks)

  • Function/ command keys (F1- F12)
  Alphanumeric Keys   (A-Z, 0-9)
  Numeric keypad   (0-9)
  Cursor control keys   (PgUp, PgDn, Home, end, Arrow keys)
  Special PC keys   (Ctrl, Shift, Alt, Ins, Enter, Spacebar, Caps lock, Num
        lock, etc)
  Editing keys   (Del, Backspace, and spacebar)

 

            (c) Name the keyboard keys that will help you:                                          (2 mks)

  • Type the upper character in a key –           SHIFT Key
  • Execute a selected command            –           ENTER Key

 

COMPUTER SYSTEMS

  1. Define the following terms as used in computing

(i)        System

A collection of independent entities that collectively work together to achieve  a desired goal

(ii)       Computer system

  • A collection of entities that work together to process and manage information using computers
  • A collection of hardware software and live- ware all working together in data inputting, processing and production of required output  from  a computer
  1. Differentiate between a computer and a computer system

A computer is made up of both hardware and software, while a computer system integrates hardware, software and user

 

  1. (a) List and explain three functional elements of a computer system ( 6 mks)
    • Hardware

They are the physical & tangible devices that make up a computer systems, e.g system unit, input devices, output devices and storage devices

 

  • Software

These are programs & data used in a computer system that enable it perform a number of specific functions, e.g. operating systems, application programs, utility programs, programming languages & device drives

 

  • Live – ware ( people – ware)

These are the people who coordinate the various activities which are necessary to make a computer system perform useful tasks e.g. data entry clerks, computer operators, programmers, system analysis, etc

  • Draw a well – labeled diagram showing the functional units of computer hardware

 

 

  1. (a) Give two main functions of a computer input device. (2 marks)
    • Accepts data & instructions from the user and sends them into the CPU. V
    • Converts data into a form that the computer can understand (i.e., machine-

Sensible/readable form)

  • Give an example of a: (3 marks)

(i). Device that reads data (scanning device).

  • Scanner, – Digital cameras,
  • Barcode readers. ~ Credit/smart card readers, – Kimball tag readers.
  • OMR, OCR, MICR, etc

(ii). Keying device. –   Keyboard, –   Keypad.

OH).Pointing device.

  • Light pen

(h). Voice input device.

(v). Printing device.

  1. State two advantages of using a mouse instead of a keyboard. (2 marks)
    • The mouse is easy & convenient to use.
    • Modern software includes an option to use it.
    • It selects a position on screen much more quickly than a keyboard.
  2. Outline any two advantages of a light pen as an input device, (2 marks)
    • It is a faster input device because it involves just pointing on the screen and selecting options.
    • Can be used to draw images on the screen.

~ It is light and easily portable (saves energy).

  • A light pen will result in few errors.
  1. (a) What are computer scanning devices? (2 marks)

These are devices that enter (capture) data into the computer directly.

  • Name the type of scanner used: (2 marks)

(i). To capture prices of goods at points of sale terminals in supermarkets and superstores.

Barcode reader

(ii).To grade multiple choice examination

Optical mark reader (OMR)

-12- Computer studies

 

  1. Otieno a French teacher used speech method to store students oral answers to an exam intoa computer
    • What is a speech input?

It is a type of input where a microphone connected to a computer system is used to enter data in form of spoken words into the computer

  • State two advantages and two disadvantages of using this method of data input

                                                                                                                                     (4 mks)

            Advantages

  • Voice input is fast
  • Its suitable for people with special needs especially those with impaired hands – Can be used in emergency situations

 

Disadvantages

  • Voice inputis complex to develop
  • Voice input does not take care speech related problems such as accents, tone etc
  • The response rates of speech input devices are relatively slow
  • Most speech input devices can recognize a limited, standard vocabulary of spoken words, and the voice of only one speaker
  • Cannot differentiate words that have same sounds (homophones)

 

(c)        State four areas where speech input would be used

  • For people with special needs or disabilities (e.g. the handicapped especially those with impaired hands.
  • Emergency situations
  • Where faster data input is required
  • In language translator or programs
  • Voice tags for voice dialing
  • In automated materials handling e.g. in airports, a good handlers give spoken commands that direct the luggage to the appropriate conveyor belt.
  • For house/ office or car security where voice activated locks are used for access control
  • In voice- activated toys and games
  • In electronic funds transfer

 

  1. Name two examples of scanning (data capture) devices used at point of scale terminals in supermarkets
    • Barcode reader
    • Light pen
    • Cash registers

 

  1. (a) What are turnaround documents

These are documents produced as output and which can be re-used as input by the computer

            (b) Name any two data capture techniques that make use of turnaround documents

                                                                                                                                    ( 2mks)

  • Optical character recognition (OCR)
  • Optical Mark Recognition (OMR)
  • Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR)
  • Optical Bar Recognition (OBR)
  • Magnetic Stripe Recognition

 

  1. List five factors one would consider when selecting a data input device (4 mks)
    • The needs of the user
    • Type of data to be input
    • Volume of data to be entered
    • Input speed
    • Cost, i.e. the initial cost of the input device & cost of using the device on a day – to – day basis.
    • Availability & reliability of the data entry device
    • Accuracy required
    • Availability of space
    • Appropriateness of the device in reference to where it is to be used

 

  1. Describe three functions performed by the CPU                           ( 3 mks)          (i)             It carries out processing of data
    • System control- it controls the sequence of operations within the computer
    • It gives commands to all parts of the computer
    • It controls the use of the Main Memory in storing of data & instructions
    • Storage of data- It provides temporary storage (RAM) & permanent storage (ROM)

 

  1. Explain the functions performed by each of the following central processing unit elements        (i)        Control Unit                                                                           ( 2 mks)
    • Interpreting instructions
    • Issuing control instructions to the operating system

 

(ii)       Arithmetic and logic Unit

  • Performs arithmetic calculations such as addition, or multiplication of figures
  • Performs logical operations & comparison on data
  • Performs output of logical functions (variables)

 

(iii)      Registers 

  • Holds data and instructions temporarily just before and after processing

 

(iv)      The main memory

  • Stores data just before and after processing
  • Stores instructions waiting to be obeyed/ executed
  • Holds program instructions & the data currently being processed
  • Stores intermediate results of processing awaiting transfer to the output devices

 

(v)       The system clock

It determines the processing speed of the CPU

 

  1. In reference to ALU, explain the meaning of logic operations and give an example of this processing operation

Logic operation is the ability to compare two quantities or numbers to determine which is greater than, less than, equal to,  or not equal to the other.

It also involves the testing for existing of a condition encountered during the processing of an application & altering the sequence of instructions accordingly.

 

  1. Give four types of registers found in the CPU
    • Accumulator
    • Instruction
    • Address register
    • Storage register

 

  1. (a) Name the basic unit used to measure the processing speed  of a computer ( 1 mk)

Hertz (Hz)

            (b) A computer processor speed is measured in Hertz. What fraction of  a second is the 

following?

 

(i)        1. Nanosecond

   1                                              1__________

1 x 109 =          1,000,000,000 seconds

 

(ii)       1. Microsecond

     1                 =                      1________

1 x 106             1,000,000 seconds

  1. (a) What is a computer bus? ( 1 mk)
    • A communication path/ medium within the computer that connects the basic computer components. It allows different elements or sections of the computer to communicate with each other.
    • A parallel collection of conditions that carry data & control signals from one element to another

 

(b)      State the functions of each of the following  computer bus                        ( 3 mks)

  • Data bus- carries data from the processor to memory during the write operations and from memory to the processor during the read operations
  • Address bus- it conveys addresses, i.e it carries the address of the memory location or device to be acted on by the processor
  • Control bus- it carries the timing & control signals necessary to coordinate the activities of the entire system

 

  1. (a) What is the computer Motherboard?

This is the electronic board where all electronic components such as processor, memory chips,

BIOS, bus connections etc are assembled

(b) State any four components found on the computer motherboard

  • Processor (CPU)
  • SIMM/DDR sockets
  • Memory chips
  • BIOS
  • Interface chips
  • Buses

 

  1. (a) What is a Drive?

A drive is a computer device for reading data from or writing data into a storage media, e.g. a tape or disk

 

(b) State any two types of computer drives, giving an example of a storage device used by

each                                                                                                                ( 3 mks)

  • Hard disk drive (HDD) – Floppy Disk drive (FDD)
  • CD- ROM drive – DVD – ROM drive
  • Tape drive – Zip drive
  • USB port – for flash disk

 

  1. (a) Give two reasons why there are many forms of computer storage  devices ( 2 mks)
    • Permanency of storage
    • Cost of implication
    • Capacity of storage systems

 

            (b) State three different examples of auxiliary storage devices

  • Magnetic tape
  • Floppy disk
  • Cassette tapes
  • Hard disk
  • Zip disks
  • Jazz disks
  • Flash disks
  • Video Compact Disk (VCD)
  • Digital video Disks (DVD‟s)
  • Punched cards
  • Optical discs (e.g., Compact Disks LS- 120 super disks, optical card, optical tape)

 

  1. Using examples, distinguished between:
    • Primary and secondary                                                                    (2 mks)

Primary storage devices are accessed directly by the CPU, while secondary storage is

not

  • Fixed and removable disks

Fixed disks are mounted inside the computer system unit, e.g. Hard disk.

Removable disks are not hosed inside the system unit & are portable, e.g. floppy disk,

Jazz disk, Zip disk, flash disk, CD-R, CD – RW, DVD

  1. Explain the following storage devices

            (i)        Hard disk

A fixed storage device housed inside the Computer System Unit

            (ii)       Flash disk

A high capacity plug-in portable storage device. Usually attached at the USB port of the computer

            (iii)      Zip disk

High capacity disk that resembles a floppy disk, but is slightly larger and thicker in size 23.       (a) Compare a floppy disk and zip disk in relation to size                          ( 2mks)

A floppy disk is physically small in size and capacity, while a zip disk is slightly large in size and has large storage capacity.

 

(b)       Give three disadvantages of floppy disks as storage devices

 

  • Floppy disks are slower than hard disks
  • Highly affected by viruses
  • Low storage capacity
  • Not reliable
  • Affected by environmental factors, exposure to sunlight, magnetism and dirt

 

  1. (a) State three advantages of using hard disks as medium of storage
    • They provide permanent storage of data
    • They have a large storage capacity
    • Are cheap per unit of storage
    • Are rewritable (provide read & write facilities)
    • Are very fast compared to other secondary storage devices in terms of data transfer

 (b) Describe three precautions you would take to avoid damaging the hard disk    ( 3mks)

  • Do not drop the disk drive
  • Do not expose it to strong heat
  • Do not expose it to dust/ smoke particles
  • Do not unprocedurally switch off the computer

 

 (c) Describe the structure of a hard disk in reference to cylinders, tracks and sectors The surface of hard disk is divided into circles called Tracks. Parallel tracks on several platters are called cylinders

The tracks are further subdivided into sectors. Several sectors can be grouped to form clusters.

  1. State two reasons why Magnetic tapes are not commonly used as computer data storagemedium today
    • Are slow when retrieving data. This is because of the linear storage of data o the tape.
    • Do not fully use their recording surface due to inter- record Gaps

 

  1. Differentiate between:

            (i)        Microcomputer and microprocessor

A microcomputer is a computer whose Central Processing Unit (CPU) has been implemented with a microprocessor

A microprocessor is a small computer processor, mainly a combination of the ALU &

CU manufactured on a single chip.

  • Volatile memory and non- volatile memory

Volatile memory is temporary, while non- volatile memory is permanent

 

  • RAM and ROM

RAM is a temporary and rewritable memory, while ROM is a permanent and read only memory.

  • Hard disk and floppy disk

Hard disk is a hard metallic platter used to store data and is encased in a  metallic housing (casing)

Hard disk is metallic. Shinny and non- flexible

 

  • Magnetic and optical storage media

In magnetic storage media, data is recorded using magnesium, while in optical storage media data is recorded using a beam of light (laser)

 

  • Hardcopy and softcopy output

Hardcopy is printed copy, e.g. printout on paper such as letters while softcopy is intangible information e.g. screen display or music.

 

  • MICR and OCR scanners

MICR uses magnetic technology to read magnetic characters, while OCR uses laser/ light technology to read characters

  1. Explain four rules for handling magnetic disks
    • Keep magnetic away from excessive heat. This is because heat energy weakens the

ability of the magnetic media to store data.

  • Store the media in their cases when not in use in order to protect/ safeguard their recording surfaces against environmental influences such as dust, touch, direct sunlight, radiations, etc
  • Do not drop the disk on the ground
  • Never bring them near moving or strong magnetic bodies. Such bodies might demagnetize the recording surfaces making recording in terms of magnetism impossible
  • When mounting the media into its reading/ writing unit, avoid brushing the recording surfaces against the mechanical components of the drive
  • Put on the power before mounting the media and off after removing the media from the

drive.

This is because; the fluctuation in power might cause demagnetization

 

  1. (a) Calculate the capacity in MB of a two sided floppy disk with 6 sectors per surface, and 512 bytes per sectors

No. of sectors =          (2 sides x 6 sectors)

=          12 sectors

If 1 sector        =          512 bytes

(12 x 512)       =          6,144 bytes

1,000,000 bytes          1 MB

6,144

1,000,000        =          0.006144 MB

 

(b) A double – sided disk contains 40 tracks on each side. The tracks are divided into 9 sectors of 512 bytes each. What is the total capacity of the disk in megabytes?        ( 2mks)

Total tracks      =          (40 x 2) = 80
Total sectors = (80 x 9) = 720
Total bytes (720 x 512) = 368, 640 bytes

 

  If 1 MB = 1,048, 576 bytes
       ? = 368, 640 bytes
      368, 640
      1,048, 576
    = 0.352 MB

 

  1. By giving examples, differentiate between primary and Secondary Computer storage

                                                                                                                                    ( 3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

Primary Memory Secondary Memory
1.     Used for holding data & instructions required immediately by the CPU

2.     It is accessed directly  by the CPU

3.     Provides fast access to information is accurate  & reliable

4.     It is expensive per bit of memory dues to the technology involved

5.     It has low/ limited storage capacity

6.     It is  volatile & therefore it is used to store temporary programs & data

7.     The speed of the processor depends  on the  size & type of primary

storage

E.g. Read Only Memory (ROM) &

Random Access Memory (RAM)

 

 

1.     Used for storing backup information that is not needed immediately by the CPU.

2.     It is not accessed directly by the CPU

3.     Provides slow access of information

4.     Secondary storage devices are cheap

5.     it has high storage capacity

6.     It is non- volatile i.e. stores data permanently.

E.g. punched cards, magnetic  tapes, floppy disks, hard  disks, etc

 

 

 

 

  1. (a) State four functions of Read – Only  Memory (ROM)
    • It stores Firmware (bootstrap instructions) – the essential files the computer uses while booting/ starting up.

 

  • It stores the system data & instructions that are necessary for the normal functioning of the computer hardware e.g. the Kernel / supervisor of the OS
  • It stores translation programs (code converters) used for converting  a user‟s program  into machine language
  • It stores special functions (facilities) peculiar to a given machine
  • It stores character generators for printers & Video displays
  • It stores instructions used  in special – purpose computers & computerized fuel pumps
  • Give three characteristics of ROM
    • It can only be read, but cannot be written to (i.e., the user can only read the information in the ROM, but cannot write on it unless it is a special type of ROM).
    • Provides permanent or semi permanent storage of instructions & data from the manufacturer.
    • It is non volatile memory
    • Forms a small proportion of the main storage ( i.e. it contributes 30% of the internal

Memory).

  • Stores essential files for starting the computer (Bootstrap programs)

 

  • Name two different types of ROM
  • Masked ROM
  • Programmable Read- Only Memory (PROM)

Erasable Programmable Read- Only Memory (EPROM)

Electrically Alterable Read- Only Memory (EAROM)

 

  1. (a) Outline three characteristics of Random Access Memory (RAM)
    • Stores data & programs temporarily during the times when they are needed in the Main

Memory (or during execution).

  • Provides “read & write facilities” i.e. it allows instructions to be written, read out & to be changed at will.
  • The contents in RAM are user – defined, i.e. the user dictates what is to be contained in the RAM
  • Its contents are temporary
  • It is a volatile memory
  • Forms the major proportion of main storage

 

(b) Name the two types of RAM clearly starting their differences                       (3 mks)

 

(i)        Static RAM

A static RAM can retain its data/ content as long as power is provided to the memory

chips, i.e. it does not need to be re- written periodically

(ii)       Dynamic RAM

  • Dynamic RAM can only hold its content for a short while even when power is on.

Therefore, in order to maintain its content/ data, a DRAM must undergo the refreshing

process (i.e. it must be re- written continually)

Static RAM is much faster than Dynamic RAM

SRAM chips are physically large & much more expensive than DRAM chips

  • Dynamic RAM has a much higher packing density than SRAM, i.e., a DRAM chip is able to store more information than a SRAM chip of the same size.

 

  1. The diagram below shows as example of a secondary

 

 

 

 

 

  • Identify the name of the devices

Flash Disk

 

  • List down two advantages of this device over a floppy disk in storage ( 2 mks)
    • Smaller in size than a floppy disk, hence, easily portable
    • Has a high data storage capacity compared to a floppy disk
    • Flash disks are more reliable than floppy disks

 

  1. (a) List any four examples of optical storage devices
    • Compact Disk Read – Only Memory (CD – ROM)

Compact Disk Recordable (CD-R)

Compact Disk Rewritable (CD-RW)

  • LS- 120 super disk
  • Digital Versatile Disk (DVD)
  • Optical card
  • Optical tape

 

 (b) Give two advantages of a digital Versatile Disk over a normal Compact disk

  • DVD has a larger storage capacity than a CD ( 2 mks)
  • A DVD offers better data storage quality

 

  1. (a) State the two types/ forms of computer output
    • Softcopy
    • Hardcopy

 

            (b) List any four examples of output devices in a computer

  • Monitors
  • Printers
  • Sound output, e.g. speakers
  • Audio response units
  • Plotters
  • Sound cards
  • Digital projectors

Computer output on microforms (COM)

Storage devices

 

 

(c)      Identify three Functions of computer devices

  • Transmit the intermediate & final results to the users
  • Convey messages e.g. error messages to the operators
  • Provide immediate response to queries
  • Convert the coded results produced by the computer to human- readable form
  1. (a) State one function of the screen (monitor)
    • Used to display the results of all the data that has been processed from the computer – It converts machine- coded outputs results from the processor into a form that can be understood by people

 

            (b) Show two differences between a CRT monitor and a flat- panel display

  • CRT monitor uses a cathode ray tube to display information, while a flat panel does

not.

  • CRT has a protruding back, while a flat panel does not.
  • Flat panel displays are light & easily portable, while CRT‟s are heavy
  • CRT can display a wide range of colours, while a flat panel displays a limited number

ofcolours

  • CRT consumes more electrical power than flat panel displays
  • The screen of a flat panel is much thinner & smaller than that of a CRT
  • The screen resolution of a CRT is adjustable, while that of a flat panel is often set

 

           

(c)        Give there examples of flat- panel monitors available in the market today

  • Liquid crystal displays (LCD)
  • Electro luminescent (EL)
  • Gas plasma
  • Thin Film Transistor (TFT)

 

  1. (a) What are pixels?

Pixels (picture elements) are dots on the screen that form characters and images

 

  • What role do pixels play in screen display?

They determine the clarity of images on the screen

 

  • Give two advantages of the higher number of pixels per square centimeter (2 mks)
  • Higher screen resolution
  • Displays of sharp & clear images
  • The screen is able to display a higher number of different images

 

  1. (a) What are character printers?                                                                (1 mk)

Are usually low- speed printers that print one character at a time?

 

            (b) Give two examples of character printers

Dot matrix

Thermal

  • Daisy wheel
  • Inkjet
  • Golf ball

 

  1. Distinguish between impact and non impact printers and give two examples of each Impact printers print by striking mechanism & are noisy, e.g Dot matrix, Daisy wheel, and Golf Ball, drum and chain printer.

Non- impact printers print either by laser, ink or thermal transfer mechanism & are silent, e.g. Laser, Inkjet, thermal printer, electrostatic and xerographic

 

  1. (a) Distinguish between a line  printer and a page printer

A page printer prints documents page by page, while a line printer prints documents line by line

 

            (b) State three advantages and one disadvantages of:

            (i) Laser Printers

Advantages    –           Cheap running cost

  • Produces high quality of printouts
  • Has a very high speed of printing ( it is fast)
  • Economical in maintenance
  • It is very silent

 

Disadvantages            –           Expensive to purchase & maintain

  • Involves expensive multiply colour printing

 

(ii) Inkjet Printers

  Advantages      – Cheap to purchase
  Cheaper multiple colour printing
  Produces high quality prints
  Disadvantage – Expensive to run (i.e. to buy cartridges)
  Produces a water based print which fades easily

 

  1. Highlight four factors one should consider when purchasing a printer (4 mks)
    • Cost involved i.e. the printer‟s buying price, cost of maintenance & cost of consumable

items like printing papers, ribbons/ cartridges

  • Volume of printing expected ( speed of the printer)
  • Quality of printing e.g. ability to print graphics &colour
  • Capability of the selected printer, i.e. multiple copy production, paper size, etc
  • Compatibility with other computers
  • Environment in which the printer will operate
  • Ease of maintenance
  • Reliability of the printer
  • Application it is required for (i.e. purpose/ use of the printer)

Type of paper used by the printer

Documentation

  • Availability

 

  1. List three advantages of a plotter over normal printer machines
    • Plotters produce information in an easily understandable form
    • Their presentation is quick & reliable
    • Produces large graphical designs of high quality, which are east to read & use
    • Can print on large sized papers, e.g. papers e.g. Al, Which a normal printer cannot

 

  1. Give two advantages of using  sound output devices
    • Very fast making it useful in emergency situations
    • One can receive the output even when a few meters away from the computer
    • No reading ability is required of the user
    • Suitable for the blind and people with poor sight
    • Can be used for distant communication if done over telephone lines
    • Errors are easily corrected, e.g. if used  in a camera, one know when the film  or exposure  is set wrongly.
    • Makes computing interesting and entertaining

 

  1. George connected new multimedia speakers to his computer and tried to play his favoritemusic CD, but no sound came out. Suggest two problems that might have occurred ( 2 mks)
    • Volume control was too low
    • Loose or improper connection to the sound card

 

  • Speakers not powered
  • Multimedia not supported
  • Lack of analogue cable connecting the optical drive to the motherboard or sound card       –           Sound card drivers not installed

 

  1. List down 4 factors to consider when buying an output device
    • The volume of the data
    • The speed at which the output is required
    • Cost of the method chosen as compared with the benefits to be derived
    • Suitability of the application
    • Whether a printed version is required

 

  1. Define the following terms

(a)       Port    

A special kind of socket found at the back of a computer used to connect an external peripheral device such as a printer, monitor, mouse, scanner, modem, flash disk, etc to the interface cards inside the computer

 

  • Data interface cable

These are special cables that connect all the peripheral devices to the motherboard and the CPU. They transmit data signals and information to and from the devices

 

           

  • Power cable

Cable for power supply to devices

 

  1. State the function of the power supply unit found in the system unit (1 mk)

 

  • It supplies stable power to the motherboard and other internal devices of a computer
  • Converts the potentially dangerous alternating current (AC) into a steady low- voltage direct current (DC) usable by the computer.

 

  1. (a) Name any two peripheral devices which get their power supply through ports
    • Keyboard
    • Mouse

 

            (b) State the type of port that would commonly be used to connect the following  devices

  • Mouse                  – PS/2, Serial, or USB
  • Modem – Serial
  • External CD drive – Parallel

 

  1. (a) Explain two differences between serial and parallel communication ports of a computer
    • Serial ports have 9 pins, while parallel ports have holes for 9 or 25 pins
    • Parallel cables transmit several bits of data simultaneously, while serial cables transmit

One bit at a time

  • Serial cables are slower than parallel cable
  • Serial cables allow for 2 ways communication (i.e. communication to and from the computer and the device connected to it) while parallel cables usually offer 1- way communication.

(b) Give two major advantages of a USB interface cable over other cables in the computer

  • It is light & convenient to carry
  • It provides faster transmission of high – quality data
  • Its serial nature enables it to connect devices a longer distance away
  • The USB port can be used to connect a wide range of peripheral devices due to its common universal interface

 

  1. Outline three precautions one should take when assembling a computer
    • Disconnect all diverts from the power source before starting to work on them
    • Never work alone because you may need help in ease of energy
    • Discharge ant static electricity that might have built up on the hands by touching an earthed metallic object and wearing an anti- static wrist member.

 

  1. State six factors which you would consider when selecting computer hardware for anorganization
    • Cost of the system
    • Processor type and speed
    • Storage capacity of hard disk & RAM memory size
    • Warranty (service contract)
    • Upgradeability of the computer
    • Compatibility of the system
    • Portability (light to carry)
    • User needs
    • Popularity of the hardware manufacturer
    • Availability of spare parts
    • Multimedia capability

 

  1. List down any four hardware components you can add or upgrade in a computer system

                                                                                                                                    (4 mks)

  • Processor (CPU)
  • Ports e.g. USB ports/ SCSI ports
  • Hard disk
  • DVD drives/ tape drives
  • RAM memory
  • Expansion slots

 

  1. (a) What is warranty with reference to the purchase of computers

A warranty is an agreement between the buyer and the seller that spells out terms and conditions of after selling a product in case of failure or malfunction.

A warranty is usually the duration in which your computer is supposed to work without any problem.

 

  • Why is it important to carefully study a warranty before committing yourself by signing it?

In order to negotiate on sensitive items like duration, after sales services etc.

 

  • List down three issues to understand about warrants
  • Duration (scope of cover)
  • How comprehensive is the warranty- good warranty should cover all the parts of the

Computer.

  • Liability agreement e.g. how long should the supplier take to repair a fault or replace the product, and if he/ she delays, who bears the cost.
  • Does the warranty offer online support?
  • Regularity of service or maintenance

 

  1. What are clones with reference to computers and what is their disadvantage? –             Clones are locally assembled computers

 

            Disadvantages

  • Their components are not optimized to work with each other
  • They are not as reliable as their brand names like IBM, Compaq, Hewlett Packard (HP),

Dell, Gateway etc.

 

 

 

  1. (a) What is standard software?

These are programs developed, packaged and then made available for purchase either directly from the developer, though a vendor or a distributor

They may be used for a wide variety of purposes

 

(b) Small and large scale organizers are turning to the use of in- house developed software for the processing activities rather than use of standard software

 

  • What is in- house developed software?

These are programs that are uniquely designed & written by the user or a software house under contract, to meet the specific needs of a particular user or organization.

 

They are usually customized (tailored) to perform a specific job or solve only specific processing tasks in one organization

 

  • Give two reasons that may be influencing these organizations for such a decision

( 2mks)

  • The user gets well tested program, which he/ she is able to use with confidence
  • The program provides all the facilities required to solve a particular problem
  • The purchaser has direct control over the package, as he/ she is involved in its

Production

  • The user is able to quickly implement the results obtained from the use of the package
  • They can easily be modified to meet specific user‟s needs without involving expert programmers.
  1. Differentiate between single- purpose programs and integrated software

– Single – purpose software is developed for only one purpose, while integrated software is a suite of more than one program and can be used to carry out a variety of tasks

 

  1. Explain the following considerations when purchasing software ( 2 mks)
    • Authenticity

It is the genuineness, validity or legitimacy of software. The copy of the software you buy should be accompanied by the license and certificate of authenticity of the developer.

  • Portability

It refers to whether a program can be copied or installed in more than one computer

 

  1. Differentiate between portability with reference to hardware and software

In hardware, the computer device should be sufficiently small & light to carry

In software, portability refers to whether a program can be copied from one computer to another or installed in more than one computer.

 

  1. (a) Explain why documentation is necessary for any software package

It contains details on how to install use and maintain the software. It also shows the purchaser how the program can be used to solve particular  problem as well as provide the user with assistance on using the program.

 

(b) A firm intends to purchase new software. List three items of documentation that shouldaccompany the software

  • A license
  • Installation guide
  • User manual (guide)
  • Reference manual
  • Warranty
  • Upgrades
  • Service pack

 

 

OPERATING SYSTEMS

  1. The central processor and peripheral devices of a computer system are coordinated by the operating system
    • Define the term „operating system‟
      • A set of computer programs that normally reside in the main memory and used to control the basic computer hardware resources & the operation of the entire system
      • The main program that controls the execution of user applications, and enables the user to access the hardware & software resources of the computer

 

  • List two resources/ components that an operating system manages
  • Processor
  • Memory (RAM)
  • Secondary storage devices
  • Input/ output devices
  • Communication devices
  • I/O & communication ports
  • Files
  • There are several types of operating systems in use today. State two examples of

Operating systems which you are familiar                                                  ( 2mks)

  • Disk Operating System (DOS)
  • Windows
  • MacOS
  • Unix
  • Linux

 

  1. Name the two latest operating systems from Microsoft corporation ( 2 mks)
    • Windows XP
    • Windows Vista

 

  1. Explain any four functions of an operating system software ( 8 mks)

(i)        Memory allocation & loading of programs

  • Loads application programs from an external storage into the available locations in the

Main memory (RAM)

  • It keeps track (monitors) of the parts of the memory that are in use, and those which are

free

  • Processor management:

The processor can only execute one program at any one time. Therefore, in a multi- tasking system access to the CPU must be carefully control & monitored. The OS must decide, which program will be allowed into the system, and for how long

  • Job scheduling-it schedules & loads programs in order to provide a continuous sequence of processing. This is necessary when more than one application program is occupying the main storage
  • Error reporting and interrupt handling- The OS reports any errors that occur during program execution.
  • Management of CPU time:

In a multi- taking  system where several user programs share the computer  resources, the processing is done according to the  job  priorities allocated and in a continuous process until all the jobs in the queue within the  memory are executed. This ensures that the CPU does not remain idle at any given time.

  • Manages the input and output devices

The OS controls the allocation of I/O devices and tries to resolve any conflicts that arise. It also monitors the state of each I/O device and signals any faults detected

  • File management

OS is concerned with the logical organization of the files in the computer & provides ways for sorting, retrieving & sharing of the files

It also provides a means of protecting the data files & programs against unauthorized access and corruption.

  • It controls the selection & operation of the hardware devices used for input, output & storage
  • It interfaces the user to the system‟s hardware, i.e. it provides a quick means of

communication between the computer user and his programs

  • Logging & accounting

The OS keeps records (internal logs) on how the computer resources (e.g. CPU time, memory, peripherals) are being used

It also keeps a complete record of all what happens during processing (usually in the form of a printed log)

 

  1. What is an interrupt?

An interrupt is break from the normal sequential flow of instructions processing in a program

 

5.        Give three ways in which operating system are classified                                     ( 3mks)

  • The number of users they handle
  • The number of tasks they execute concurrently
  • Human computer interface

 

  1. Giving an example in each case, explain the following types of operating systems

(a)       Single – user / single tasking

A system that allows only one user to run one user program at a time in an interactive, conversational mode. E.g. Ms- DOS, PC- DOS.

 

            (b)       Multi- User/ Multi- tasking

A multi- user computer system can allow interactive facilities to several at a time. A Multi- tasking Computer system can allow more than one program which are in the memory to be processed at the same time. E.g. Microsoft Windows, Linux.

 

  1. A computer user may interact with a computer either through Graphical  User

Interface(GUI) or though typed commands

(a) Give one advantage of using GUI based operating system over a command line interface

( 1mk)

  • User friendliness
  • Easy to learn & use even by those  who do  not have much knowledge about them
  • One does not need to master any commands
  • It is faster to work with than a command line interface as it only relies on clicking the icons by use of a pointing device

(b) Some computer systems still use command line interfaces. State two advantages of command line interface

  • They are more flexible than menu- driven interfaces
  • There is security of data as only those who know how to use the commands will access

it.

  • They use cheap hardware & software facilities
  • One has a better control over the system resources

 

  1. What is a deadlock in reference to operating systems?

– It is a situation in an OS when a particular task holds a needed resource and refuses to release it for use by other tasks

 

  1. Explain briefly the following concepts as used in the windows environment:
    • Desktop

Desktop is mostly an empty screen that appears when windows starts and has some standard icons that show that the computer is ready for use.

 

           

 

  • Window

A rectangular area on a computer screen in which text, graphical images or the contents of a folder or disk may be displaced

  • Icon

A little picture on the computer screen representing a program, disk file folder or any other item

  • Sidekick menu

A submenu that appears either on the right or left of a main menu

 

  • Taskbar

A long bar/ strip that runs across the desktop and displays the start button and any other active tasks.

 

  • Task

Any activity taking place in windows and is displayed on the taskbar, e.g. running

program                                                                                                          (3 mks)

 

  1. Identify three functions of taskbar
    • Indicates what programs are running
    • Holds minimized programs
    • Provides a shortcut menu  for arranging  programs

 

  1. State two differences between Disk Operating System (DOS)  and Windows operating

system                                                                                                ( 2 mks)

DOS Windows
(i)     Single  – tasking

(ii)   Single- user

(iii) Command driven interface

(iv)  Not easy to use

(i)     Multi- tasking

(ii)   Multi- user

(iii) Graphical User Interface

(iv)  User friendly

 

 

  1. Identify three factors you would consider when choosing an operating system for use

in a computer                                                                                                 ( 3 mks)

 

  • Hardware configuration of the computer, e.g. RAM memory size, Hard disk capacity, type of processor, etc
  • Basic design of the computer – It is an IBM compatible, or apple computer?
  • Hardware compatibility
  • User (type of work to be done), i.e. the applications intended for the computer
  • User friendliness or human computer interface, i.e. it is command line based, Menu driven or graphical user interface?
  • Availability in the Markey, e.g. Microsoft Windows based operating systems are very common
  • Portability
  • Cost- how expensive the OS is
  • Reliability, i.e. can it run without crashing (stop responding to commands)?
  • The method of communicating with the computer, e.g. the number of peripherals (xi)          The method of operating the computer

 

 

  1. Explain how windows organizes information in reference to files and folders

It stores related data & information records into files, and related files into folders & subfolders

 

  1. (a) Distinguish between systems files and application files       ( 2 mks) System files hold critical system information while application files hold programs data

(b) State the extensions used signifying the following file types                             (2 mks)

  • Driver or system file – DLL, SYS, INI
  • Batch file – BAT

 

  1. (a) List and explain down the three parts of the windows Taskbar    ( 3 mks)
    • Start button – Provides access to the start menu
    • Task Manager – Displays buttons of currently running tasks
    • System tray – displays icons of applications that automatically start and run in the background

 

 

 

(b) Outline the procedure of renaming a file or folder using windows operating system

                                                                                                                              (3 mks)

Method 1:

  • In an explorer window, click the file/ folder you want to rename
  • Click on file, choose rename
  • Type the new name, then press enter

Method 2:

  • In an explorer window, right- click the file/ folder you want to rename
  • Choose Rename from the shortcut menu that appears
  • Type the new name, then press Enter

 

  1. (a) What is a dialog box?

Window that appears temporarily to request or supply information. It contains options (settings) one must select to complete a task

 

(b) List five settings that may be found in a dialog box

  • Textbox- a box you can type data in
  • List box – a box that contains a list of options, one of which is selected
  • Checkbox- a small, square box that can be selected or cleared. It appears with an option that you can turn on or off. When the checkbox is selected, a selected, a checkbox (þ or x)appears in the box
  • Radio button – a round button that can either be blank or can contain a dot. If the button contains a dot¤, it is selected.
  • Pull down menu – A box with a downward – pointing triangular button at its right end

(6). When the triangular button is clicked, it displays a menu.

  • Command button- A button that can click to carry out or cancel the selected action. E.g.

the OK or cancel button.

  1. (a) Define „ folder/ directive tree‟

Directory tree is the hierarchical arrangement of folders and storage locations from the root downwards.

(b) Give two examples of root directories you know                            (1 mk)

  • A:\
  • C:\
  • D:\
  • E:\

(c) Give three uses of sub- directories or subfolders                            (3 mks)

  • Used to store files that are not required currently until they are needed again
  • Used to store the files of one program separately from the files of another program – It allows each user to keep his/ her files separately, even if all the users are using the same systems.

 

  1. The Hierarchical system represented below shows how a school organizes its files.

Study itand answer the questions below.

 

 

 

The F2 directory has the files: classlist.doc, Districts.xls, and the tribe.mdb. Write down the path of accessing the Districts. xls file.

A:\SCHOOL\EXAMS\F2\Districts.xls                                                                 (2 mks)

 

  1. (a) (i) Explain the meaning of backup                                       ( 2 mks)

It means making of duplicate copies of data or programs from the hard disk into storage media so that in case the system fails, or originals are corrupted or lost, the data can be reconstructed from the backups.

This is used to protect data from accidental erasure or hardware problems

 

     

 

(ii) Explain two methods you can use in windows to back up data into a storage device

                                                                                                                              (2 mks)

  • Using copy and paste commands on the Edit Menu
  • Using the send to command on the file menu
  • Using the backup facility to compress the data into another disk

 

(b) Identify two reasons why a user needs to know the space available for data storage in the harddisk

  • To know the amount of data that can be stored in the hard disk
  • To know how much space is left in the hard disk in case a new programs needs to be

installed

  • To detect the likelihood of a virus infection

 

  1. Name the command one would use to repair cross- linked files in graphical user

interfacesoftware                                                                                                (  1mk)

Scandisk

  1. (a) Explain the team Disk Defragmenter, and give two advantages of this feature ( 3 mks)

Disk defragmenter is a tool that is used to re- arrange scattered files & folders on a storage media

Advantages

  • Rearranges scattered folders & files on storage media
  • Reduces the time by the read / write head to locate files or folders on the storage media

This speed up access to files & folders, hence, makes files to open more quickly

  • Consolidates related data close to each other, hence, frees space on the storage media

 

            (b) Distinguish between disk compressing and disk defragmenting

Compressing is creating more space on a disk by squeezing disk contents (files) into a smaller storage location on the disk.

Defragmenting is rearranging scattered related files/ folders closer to each other on the surface of a storage unit.

  1. Give two reasons why a new disk must be formatted before using it (2 mks)
    • To prepare a new disk so that files can be stored on it
    • To create sectors & tracks for the storage of data
    • To create/ prepare a new root directory and file allocation tables on the disk
    • To remove/ delete any existing files or information stored on the disk, if it is no longer needed
    • To determine the effective storage capacity of the disk, i.e. formatting enables the user to know how much data the disk can hold.
    • It can also check for bad sectors on the new disk.

 

  1. (a) What is meant by the term „disk partitioning‟?

It is the process of dividing a large physical disk into 2 or more partitions/ volume

 

            (b) Give two reasons why the hard disk may be partitioned

  • To install more than one operating systems on the same disk
  • For the purposes of backup on the same disk, so that if one partition fails the other will

still be working.

 

  1. A Form four computer student is attempting to print a programming documentation. The printer is not responding to the print command. Explain three possible causes for the anomaly. (3 marks)
    • The printer may not be installed.
    • The printer may not have been set as the default printer.
    • The data interface cable to the printer could be loose. Make sure it is firm at the ports. – The printer could still be off. Switch it on, and it will start printing.
    • The wrong printer could have been selected. Select the right printer in the print dialog box and send the print job again.

 

  1. State two purposes of the recycle bin. (2 marks)
    • Contains the files and folders that have been deleted.
    • Can be used to restore files & folders accidentally deleted from the computer.

 

WORD PROCESSING

 

  1. a) What is a word Processor?                                                   (1 mk)

A computer program that enables a person to create, retrieve, edit, format, and print text based documents

  1. List two common examples of word processing software widely used in the market

today.                                                                                                  (2 mks)

-Microsoft word

-WordPerfect

-Lotus WordPerfect

-WordStar

-WordPad

  1. Give three comparisons of the traditional method of typing a document on a

Typewriter against using a word processor                                                 (6mks)

  • Correcting typing mistakes using a word processor is easy; it is hard to correct mistakes on a typewriter.
  • Producing multiple copies of the same page is possible using a word processor, but it is not possible to produce multiple copies on a typewriter.
  • Text formatting features are available on a word processor, e.g. front size, font type, font colour, boldfacing, italicization, etc.
  • The documents created can be stored in the computer for future reference
  • Typing using a word processor is easier & more efficient because most of the actions are automatic. For example; the word wrap feature automatically takes the text cursor to the beginning of the next line once it reaches the end of the current line.
  • A new page is automatically inserted after reaching the end of the current page
  • Graphics can be added within documents using a word processor
  • Grammar& spelling mistakes can be checked & a text-editing tool that provides alternative words with similar meanings.
  • A word processor allows mail merging, which makes it possible to produce similar letters and sent them to several people.

 

  1. a)        What is a template?                                                  (1mk)

It is a document that acts as a blue print or outline for other documents of the same type. It contains the standard text, graphics and formatting for use in all documents of this type.

  1. State two advantages of using a template to create a document.

(2mks)

  • It helps save time and makes creating of new documents easy
  • It ensures that there is consistency between the documents being created.

 

  1. Explain the difference between overtypes and insert mode in word processing

                                                                                                                        (2mks)

Type over deletes the current text at cursor position and inserts new text.

Inserting pushes the old text away as new text is inserted at cursor position.

 

  1. Veronica tried to retrieve a document file following all the steps correctly. The filename did not appear in file list box.  State three causes for this.        

(3mks)

  • The file may not have been saved
  • The file may have been deleted
  • The file may be located in a different folder from the one she was trying to             retrieve from (or may have been moved).
  • The file may have been destroyed by a computer virus.
  1. Mwikaliselected a paragraph in word processing. Explain what happened after pressing

the following keys on the keyboard:                                    (3mks)

  1. i) CTRL + B -Changes the paragraph to bold/removes bold from paragraph ii)         CTRL +A -the whole document is selected  iii)             CTRL+ U        -the selected text is underlined/removes underline from the

selected text.

 

  1. Precisely explain the role of the following editing features of a word processor;

                                                                                                                                                (3mks)

  1. i) Find and replace -To find words that you want replaced by others ii) Undo and redo- Undo reverses the previous/latest action, while redo does the undone action iii) Thesaurus  -It gives suggestion of words or phrases with similar meaning

(synonyms), and sometimes antonyms to the selected word.

  1. iv) Autocorrect -It checks for wrongly spelled words, and automatically replaces

them with the correct ones as set by the user.

  1. Give the steps you would use to find and replace the occurrence of a particular word in

Microsoft Word.                                                                                                        (4mks)

  • Click on edit, select find (or replace)
  • Type the word you want to replace with in the replace with box
  • Click replaces or Replace all if you want to replace all the occurrences of that word in your document at once.

 

  1. Name and explain the use of any three buttons found in a spell-check dialog box

                                                                                                                                                (6mks)

Change:           Accepts the current selection in the suggestions box

Ignore Once: Leaves the highlighted error unchanged (if the highlighted

word is a valid word) & finds the next spelling or grammar error

Ignore all:       retains all the occurrences of the same word or phrase in the document

from another language, e.g. a Kiswahili.

Add:    Adds the highlighted word in the Suggestions box to the Custom

dictionary.

 

  1. Clearly explain the meaning of the following terms as used in word processing:

(7mks)

 

  1. Editing a document – Making changes to an already typed/existing document.
  2. Blocking text– Selecting a group of text in order to work with it as a

whole, e.g. a word sentence or paragraph.

  • Printing – having your work copied on a piece of paper as output iv)       Saving– Storing a file/document permanently in the computer‟s secondary

memory (e.g., hard disk) so as to be used in the future.

 

  1. v) Italicizing text– making the text saint forward vi)    Header– It is a standard text or information such as page numbers, chapter  titles, etc that appears above the top margin of every page in a document or in a section

vii)      Footer-It is a standard text or information that appears below the bottom

margin of every page in a document.

 

 

  1. a) What is document formatting?                                                         (1mk)

Applying various styles to enhance the appearance of a document

  1. Give any five document formatting features of a word processor.

(5mks)

  • Bolding
  • Font colouring
  • Text alignment
  • Font type
  • Setting tabs
  • Underlining
  • Italicizing
  • Font size.

 

  1. Differentiate between „superscript‟ and „Superscript is text formatted

to be at the bottom of a line.

Superscript is text formatted to be at the top of a line, Subscript is text formatted to be at the bottom of a line.

 

  1. What are page margins?

Non-printing but visible text-limiting borders that mark the distance that text starts on a page away from the edge of the page

 

  1. Differentiate between:
  2. a) A Hard page break and a Soft page break.                                     (2mks)

A hard page break is inserted on a page even before the end of the page, e.g. by pressing CTRL+ ENTER or setting a manual page break.

For a Soft page break, the text cursor moves or creates a new page  automatically when at the end of the current page during typing.

 

  1. Auto complete and AutoCorrect (2mks)

AutoComplete helps a person to type quickly by completing automatically a word that he/she has already started to type

AutoCorrect automatically replaces mistyped words with the correct ones as set by the user.

  1. Drawing and inserting a table in a document (2mks)

                        Drawing – use the pen tool to draw the table

 

Inserting table- use the Table-Insert-table Command

  1. Explain how a paragraph can be moved from one page to another using a word

processor.                                                                               (4mks)

 

  • Select the paragraph
  • Click Cut on the Edit menu/ standard toolbar, (or Press CTL + „X‟)
  • Click to place the insertion point here you want to put the text
  • Click on Edit, then choose Paste (or Press CTRL + „V‟)
  1. a) What is line spacing?                                                                         (1mk)

The vertical distance between two text lines in a document

  1. Explain any three line spacing specification used in Microsoft Word.

        (3mks)

  1. i) Single space – accommodates the largest font in a line                       ii)        5 line space- 1 ½ time that of single line spacing                iii)       Double – twice that of single line spacing                       iv)       Exactly – a fixed line spacing that word does not adjust
    1. At least – the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest

font or graphic on the line.

  1. Multiple- a line spacing that is increased or decreased by a

percentage that you specify .                                     (4mks)

  1. Give any four text alignment features (4 mks)
    • Left alignment
    • centre alignment
    • Right alignment
    • Justified
  2. List any thee sources of graphics that can be used in Microsoft word. (3mks)
    • From Microsoft clip gallery
    • From Scanner
    • By drawing using the Drawing tools available in Ms-World
    • Import from another file
  3. a) Explain the concept of graphics that can be used in Microsoft word.

                                                                                                                        (3mks)

Getting ready-made objects and text from other applications into the word

processor.

  1. What is the difference between object linking and embedding? (2mks)

In linking, the object imported can only be edited in the original

application from which it was created.

In embedding, the object imported becomes part of the current application  and can be edited there.

 

  1. Give a reason why it may be necessary to merge cells in a table. (1mk)

To create larger cells in a table without increasing the height or width of the existing

cells.

 

  1. a) Define mail merging.                                                 (2mks)

The process of generating personalized letters or documents by combining                                        a standard document, but addressed to different recipients.

  1. Give two advantages of mail merge over copy and pasting several times to

mass mail a document.                                                                       (2mks)

  • combining of letters saves time when printing
  • It allows producing of many documents at once
  • The mailing list can be re-used on another document
  1. a) Give two advantages of previewing a document before printing.

(2mks)

  • To check whether the page layout is OK
  • To confirm that no details are outside the printable area
  • to go through the document before printing
  • To save on printing papers & printer toner because; errors on the printouts that may require reprinting will be minimal.

 

  1. a) Distinguish between Portrait and Landscape orientations.           

                                                                                                                                    (2mks)

In Portrait, text & graphics are printed with the longest side of the page

vertically upright, while in Landscape, text & graphics are printed with the longest side of the page placed horizontally.

  1. b) State two reasons why it is necessary to specify the correct paper size 

before printing a document?                                                             (2mks)

  • Select a paper size depending on the document page size needed
  • To comply with printer capabilities

 

  1. Outline any three main features that make word processors popular  

(3mks)

  • Saving of documents for future reference
  • Printing of multiple documents after editing
  • formatting of documents into required form
  • Mailing features such as mail merging of standard document with another saved file.

 

SPREADSHEETS

  1. What is electronic spreadsheet software? (2mks)

A computer program that looks like the manual ledger sheet with rows & columns for entering data that can be manipulated mathematically using formulae.

  1. Give any two application programs classified as spreadsheets. (2mks)
    • Microsoft Excel
    • Lotus 123
    • -Corel Quattro Pro
    • -super calculators
    • -Multiplan
    • -VP-Planner
    • -VisiCalc
  2. Differentiate between the traditional analysis ledger sheet and an electronic

spreadsheet.                                                                           (5mks)

 

An electronic spreadsheet;

  • Has a large worksheet for data entry & manipulation as compared to manual worksheet
  • Has inbuilt formulae (called functions) that are non-existent in manual worksheets
  • Uses the power of the computer to quickly carry out operations
  • Has better document formatting & editing qualities than a manual worksheet
  • Utilizes the large storage space available on computer storage devices to save & retrieve documents.
  • Can easily be modified, while manual spreadsheets involve a lot of manual calculations

& are very difficult to amend

  • The user can very quickly & efficiently perform complicated computations using the information stored in an electronic spreadsheet.
  • Enables the user to produce neat work
  • Offers graphical representation of data leading to comprehensive decisions.
  • It is accurate in its calculations & allows automatic recalculation on formulae. For a manual worksheet, changing one value means rubbing the result & writing the correct one again.
  1. Explain five application areas where spreadsheet software can be used.

(5mks)

  1. Accounting: – spreadsheet software can be used by accountants to record

their daily transactions & also keep financial records, e.g. they can record  sales & purchases, produce invoices, compile financial statements, calculate profits, prepare budgets, etc.

  1. Data management: – a spreadsheet enables data & information to be

arranged neatly in tables, produced easily and also kept up-to-date, e.g. one can edit, save , sort, filter, use forms to enter and view records, and worksheet data.

  • Scientific applications: – spreadsheets can be used by scientists &

researchers to compile and analyze their results.

  1. Statistical analysis: – spreadsheets provide a set of statistical Functions/tools that can be used to develop complex statistical or  engineering analyses, e.g., teachers can compile their students‟ marks and

produce results.

  1. Forecasting: – using the „what if‟ analysis technique, spreadsheets can be

used to find out the effect of changing certain values in a worksheet on the other cells.

This helps in financial forecasting, budgeting, etc.

  1. State five features of spreadsheets that are useful in financial modeling. (5mks)
    • Have inbuilt functions & formulae which can be used to perform most mathematical statistical, trigonometric or financial calculations
    • Allows automatic recalculation on formulae
    • #have ability to perform „what if‟ analysis, which can be used to find out the effect of

changing certain values in a worksheet on the other cells

  • Have the ability to sort & filter data
  • Have a data validation facility, which ensures that the correct data is entered into the spreadsheet.
  • Have a chart facility that can be used to draw Line graphs, Bar charts, Pie charts,

Histograms, etc.

  • Some spreadsheets have a SOLVER facility that is used to uncover the best uses of scarce resources so that desired goals such as profit can be maximized, or undesired goals such as cost can be minimized.
  • They enabled printing of entire worksheets, portions of a worksheet or several worksheets within the shortest time possible
  • Have the ability to summarize data using Consolidation and Pivot tables.

 

 

  1. Define the following terms as used in a worksheet: (3mks)
    1. Columns

These are the fields that make up the worksheet of a spreadsheet, and are

identified by letters.

They run vertically from top downwards

  1. Rows

These are the records that form a worksheet, and are identifies by numbers.

They run horizontally from left to right.

 

  • Cell

A box formed when a row & a column intersect in a worksheet where the data is entered

  1. Explain the following concepts as used in spreadsheets:   (4mks)
    1. Automatic recalculation

This is whereby an electronic spreadsheet will adjust the result of a formula automatically when the values are changed, so that they correspond with the different input.

 

  1. „What if‟ analysis

„What if‟ analysis is a feature in spreadsheets that is used to find out the

effect of changing certain values in a worksheet on the other cells.

It involves changing the values of one of the arguments in a formula in

order to see the difference the change would make on the result of the calculation.

  • Sheet tabs

These are names of the worksheets that appear at the bottom of the worksheet window.

They enable the user to move from one worksheet to another.

  1. Worksheet

A page (single sheet) stored in a workbook

  1. Name four data types used in spreadsheets (2mks)
    • Labels
    • Values
    • Functions
    • Formulae
  2. An Agrovet Company wants to analyze its employee‟s personal details using Microsoft

Excel.  The company has five employees:  Mary Anne, Francis Kihara, Lena Achieng, HellenWanjiku, and mwangi Peter.  Their ages are 20, 45, 90, 45 and 34 years respectively.  Mary department; Mwangi Peter in finance department and Hellen

Wanjiku in Computer department

Mary Anne and HellenWanjiku are single whereas Francis Kihara, Lena Achieng and

Mwangi Peter are married.

Construct a worksheet showing the above information.  Use appropriate column headlings

 

 

 

                                                                                                            (6mks)

  A B C D
1 AGROVET C OMPANY    
2 NAMES AGE DEPARTMENT STATUS
3 Mary Anne 23 Research Single
4 Francis

Kihara

45 Personnel Married
5 Lena Achieng 90 Research Married
6 Hellen

Wanjiku

45 Computer Single
7 Mwangi Peter 34 Computer Married
8        

 

 

  1. a) What is a cell reference?                                                                      (1mk)

A cell reference is the identity of a cell in a worksheet.  A cell is identified by use of the column letter and the row number headings.

           

  1. b) For each of the following, state the type of cell reference. (4 mks)
    1. A5 Relative reference
    2. $F$5 Absolute row reference (only the row reference is absolute)             iii)             H$21  Absolute column reference (only the column reference is

absolute)

  1. iv) $D7     Absolute column reference (only the column reference is

absolute)

  1. a) A formula to add the contents of B5 and C4 was entered in Cell F5.  

what will it become when it is copied to Cell H8?               (1 mk)

= D8 +E7

 

  1. Explain the reason for your answer. (2mks)

When we move to cell H8 from F5, the column changes by 2 while the

row changes by 3. The formula = B5 +C4 is also updated likewise. This is because of relative referencing.

 

  1. What is the equivalent R1C1 reference for G20?             (1mk)

=R20C7

  1. Differentiate between relative and absolute cell reference as used in Ms-excel.

(2mks)

Relative cell referencing means the referencing means that the references of cell used in a formula are relative to the location of the cell where the formula is placed, e.g. E3= C3* D3. this tells Excel to multiply the contents of C3 by D3 which have been defined in relation to E3.

Absolute cell addressing means reference is made to one or more cells in a way which doesn‟tvary(change) according to circumstances.

  1. The fist column in the table below contains formulas as entered into cell D46. In the second column, enter the formulas as they would appear when copied to cell B56.

(4mks)

 

Formula in D46 Formula when copied to B56
=D1 =B11
=F5*C10 =D15 * A20
=H$46 + J40 =F$46 + H50
=$E12 – D$14*$F$2 =$E22-B$14*$F$2

 

  1. A worksheet contains the data shown below:

 

Cell Al A2 A3 C1 C2 C3  
Entry 5 7 10 10 15 15 =SUMIF

( C1:C3 “ <>

10”,Al:A3)

 

 

 

State the value displayed in G1                                                                    (2mks)

Solution:

= SUMIF (Cells to be tested/evaluated, expression that defines which cells will be added,
  actual cells to be added).
= 7+10 = 17

 

 

  1. Study the worksheet below and answer the questions that follow:

 

  A B C D E F
1            
2                                   SKYW AYS AGENCIES
3 PRODUCT REGION 1 REGION 2 REGION 3 REGION 4

 

TOTAL

Sale

4 Rexona 3400 3,700 4000 4100  
5 Lifebuoy 2500 2600 2100 2500  
6 Omo 6000 6100 6300 1600  
7 Ushindi 1200 1500 1400 6400  
8 Carmel 7000 6900 7200 8000  
9 Total          
10 Maximum          
11 Average          

 

 

  1. Write functions that can be entered to get total, maximum, and average of

each region.                                                                            (3 mks)

Total  =                      Sum (B4:B8)

Maximum:      =                      Max (B4:B8)

Average:         =                      Average (B4: B8)

 

  1. Write down the function that returns the number of sales in the four regions

whose value is greater than or equal to 2000.                                             (1 mk)

= SUMIF (B4:E4, “>=2000”)                                                                         (1mk)

iii) The function = sum (B4:E4) is entered at F5 and then copied to F8.  Write down the function as it appears in the destination cell.   (2mks)

= sum (B7:E7)

  1. a) What is a chart wizard in spreadsheets?                             (1mk)

A chart wizard is a step by step procedure of designing spreadsheet charts.

 

  1. b) State the use of:                                                                                (2mks)
  2. A pie chart- A pie chart is used to show distribution. It shows the

Proportional size of items that make up a data series to the sum of   the items.

  1. A line graph– A line graph is used to show trend

DATABASES

  1. a)       Define a database.                                                                 (2mks)
    • A collection of related files organized to provide consistent and controlled access to the data items.
    • A collection of related data elements stored together under one logical structure so as to provide a consistent & controlled access to the items.
    • A collection of information related to a particular subject or purpose
    • A common data pool, maintained to support the various activities taking place within the organization.
  1. b) List four examples of database programs in the market today. (2mks)
  • Microsoft Access
  • Oracle
  • FoxPro
  • Dbase
  1. State the components of a Database hierarchy in ascending order. (2mks) Character (alphabets, numbers and special characters)

 

  • Fields                        (Facts, attributes, set of related characters)

 

  • Records                      (Collection of fields)

 

  • File                             (Collection of records)

 

  • Database (Logical collection of files)

 

3          a)         Explain three types of database models.                             (6 marks)

 

  1. Flat file database: It holds only one set of data ii.         Relational database: Related data items are stored or organized together in structures called relations or tables. Each table consists of rows and columns.

iii.     Hierarchical database: The data items are organized in hierarchical (tree-like) structure. The records are stored in multiple levels, where units further down the system are subordinate to the ones above iv.    Network database: It allows a data element (or record) to be related to more than one other data element/record.  Links are used to express the relationship between different data items forming a network of items.

 

  1. b) Define the term sorting                                                         (2mks)

Sorting involves arranging of records in a logical order in the database.  It can either be in Ascending or descending order.

 

  1. a) What are database management system software?                       (2mks)

A collection of programs used to store & retrieve data, and manage files or records containing related information from a database.

           

 

  1. b) Give the two classes of database software.                                   (2mks)

PC-based database software:-Are usually designed for individual users or small businesses, e.g. Ms-Access, Dbase, Paradox, FoxPro

Corporate database software:-Are designed for big corporations that handle large amounts of data, e.g. Oracle, SQL Server, Sybase, etc

  1. State the use of the following objects in databases. (3mks)
    1. Tables To store related records         ii)         Forms  They act as screens for entering, changing & viewing data

in tables

iii)        Query             Searching for specific records/Data manipulation/Selecting

  1. a) Define the term normalization as used in database design.            (2mks)

Normalization is the process of trying to eliminate storage of duplicate

values in a database.

  1. b) State three objectives of normalization.                             (3mks)
    • To relate different tables in a database
    • To ease the retrieval of data from a relational database
    • Breaking up multi theme tables into smaller workable tables
  2. Give three advantages of separating data from the applications that use the data in

database design.                                                                                (3mks)

  • You can retrieve recorded data easily
  • You can do calculations in an easy way
  • Creating of queries, forms, reports will be easy by using data separation.

 

  1. Differentiate between:
    1. Primary key and relationship (2mks)

Primary key is a field or a set of fields that can be used to uniquely identify each individual record in a table.  It is used to relate a table to the foreign keys in other tables.

 

  1. Tabular and columnar form layout. (2mks)

Tabular – the records are displayed from left to right across the page, and

the labels appear at the top of each column, with each row representing a new record. Columnar – the fields for each record are displayed down a column, i.e. each value is displayed on a separate line with field labels to the left.

  1. State three types of relationships that can be used to link tables in databases.

                                                                                                                        (3 mks)

  • One-to-One
  • One-to-many
  • Many –to-Many
  1. Explain how „parents‟ and „child‟ tables are related in relational database. (4mks) A parent table is the one that has the primary key of the relationship, while a child table is the one that has the foreign key of the relationship.

Parent and child tables are related through a common field that links the two tables.

Records in a child table relate to one record in a parent table.

 

 

  1. a) Describe four major shortcomings of the conventional (paper )file

structures that are being addressed by the database approach.    (4mks)

  • Unnecessary duplication of data
  • Boredom & time wastage especially when searching for a particular item
  • In order to carry out any file processing task(s), all the related files have to be processed
  • Misleading reports due to poor data entry and organization
  • Difficulty in sorting, retrieving & updating records
  • Security: no protection of files against unauthorized access and corruption Sharing of files is difficult
  • Some information resulting from several files may not be available.

 

  1. b) List any two methods used to secure data in a database    (2mks)
  • Password protection
  • User and group permissions
  • User-level security
  • Data encryption

 

  1. The following car details are to be entered in a database: Make, Date-of-manufacture, colour, and cost.
  2. Prepare a suitable database structure showing field names and their field data types

                                                                                    (5 mks)

Field name                                          Data type

ID (Primary key)                                Auto Number

Make                                                   text

Date of manufacture               Date/time

Colour                                     Text

Cost                                                     Currency

  1. Explain how you index the data such that cars of the same make and colour are together.

                                                                                                (2mks)

Create a query to show same make and colour

  1. Write a statement that can be used to select cars of colour green. (2mks)

Create a query.  In the colour field, and in the Criteria row, write “green”

  1. Give an instruction that would:
    1. Select cars whose cost is between 500,000/= and 1,000,000/= (3mks)                 Create a query.  In the cost field, and in the criteria row, write “.>500000

and<1000000”

  1. Determine the average cost of all cars. (3mks)

Create a query.  Choose average of costs “Avg” option in the total section.

 

 

DESKTOP PUBLISHING (DTP)

 

1          a)         Define the term desktop publishing.                                                 (2mks)

The process of producing publications such as newspapers, books, newsletters, cards, etc by marking areas for text and graphical objects using specialized programs installed on a desktop computer.

  1. b) Give any three examples of desktop publishing software available in the market

today.                                                                                      (3mks)

  • Adobe PageMaker
  • Adobe Photoshop
  • Adobe illustrator
  • Ventura
  • Microsoft Publisher
  • CorelDraw
  • Harvard graphics
  1. Identify four different types of publications that can be produced using desktop

publishing software.                                                   (4mks)

  • Cards, e.g. for special occasions such as weddings, graduations, congratulations, etc

 

  • Newsletters
  • Newspapers
  • Calendars
  • Advertisements/Posters
  • Magazines
  • Certificates
  • Notices
  • Catalogues
  • Pamphlets
  • Books
  • Brochures
  1. Differentiate between the following:
    1. Pasteboard and printable page. (2mks)

Pasteboard is where text & objects are placed for editing before transferring them to the printable area; Printable page refers to the area enclosed in margin guides.

(2mks)

 

  1. Margins and column guides. (2mks)

Margins mark text areas on the page along the edges, while column guides

divide the page into several fields.  They are used to define the printable area.

  1. Change case and drop cap. (2mks)

Change case is changing text from upper to lower case, sentence, title, or toggle case, while drop cap refer to making the first character in a line bigger and drops down to

occupy the space in the lines that follow.

 

 

 

  1. Kerning and tracking. (2mks)

Tracking refers to changing the visual denseness or openness of characters in aline, while Kerning is fixing particular pairs of letters that are too close or too far apart from each other.

  1. Fill and stroke

A stroke refers to a line style, while a fill refers to applying background pattern such as shading to a graphical object.

4          a)         What is layering as used in DTP                                                       (1 mk)

Layering is the placing of text or objects on top of each other.

  1. b) Why is layering very useful in a desktop publisher?                       (1mk)              It may be used to create watermarks.
  1. What commands are used in place of portrait and landscape page orientation in

PageMaker?                                                                       (1mk) i.         Portrait-tall; ii.         Landscape-wide

 

  1. Give three methods that are used to transform an object. (3mks)           Rotating ii.     Skewing iii.    Reflecting
  2. a) what is text wrap?                                                                             (1mk)

Text wrap is controlling the flow of text over or around a graphical object.

  1. b) Give three ways you can wrap text on an object.               (3mks)
    • Make the text jump the object to the next page or column
    • Allow to text to jump over the object and continue on the same page
    • Create a rectangular text wrap around all the sides of the object.
  2. Define the term object grouping (2mks)

This refers to joining objects in order to manipulate them as one object.

 

 

INTERNET & E-MAIL

 

  1. The first computer Network was set up by ARPA in the United States of America. What is the full meaning of the acronym ARPA     (1mk)

Advanced Research Projects Agency

 

  1. Your manager wishes to be connected to the Internet. He already has a powerful personal Computer (PC), a printer, and access to a Telephone line.  However, he understands that he will need a Modem.

State why a modem is required to connect him to the internet. (2mks)

  • modem enables one to connect to the Internet and access information by transmitting data from one computer to another across telephone lines.

 

  1. The Internet connects millions of computers and telecommunication devices that have different hardware and software configurations. For these incompatible devices to be able to communicate, a protocols?    (1mk)
    • protocol is a set of rules that govern how tow computers can send and receive data on a network

Special communication rule that government sending and receiving of messages by computers on a network

 

 

  1. b) Name the two most common protocols for the Internet, and state their functions.

                                                                                                (3mks)

Transmission control Protocol (TCP); – It governs how data is transferred from one place to another

Internet Protocol (IP); – It is used to provide routing from one network to another (i.e. it enable data to be sent& received by the different computers on a network)

  1. a) Explain the following terms as used in internet:
    1. Website ( ½ mk)

A collection /group of related Web pages belonging to an organization or

individual

  1. Browse/Surf the web. ( ½ mk)

Moving around and between the Web pages

  1. a) What is meant by the term e-learning?                   (1mk)

This is learning through interaction with special programs on the

computer.

b)         A school intends to set-up an e-learning system.  List three problems that are

likely to be encountered.                                                       (3mks)

  • Lack of capital
  • Lack of skilled manpower (required technology to run & support the e-learning system)
  • Spread of computer viruses
  • Availability of pornographic material & literature to the students from the internet.

 

 

  1. a) Identify the parts of the following e-mail address labelled A, B, C and 

                                                                                                                        (4mks)

lat @africaonline . co.ke

 

 

A        B                C   D

 

  • Name of the individual or organization
  • Name of the host computer in the network on which the e-mail account is hosted
  • Identifies the type of the organization or institution offering a particular service,

i.e. commercial organization

D         Name of the country where the site is located, i.e. Kenya.

 

  1. b) Mention two examples of e-mail software.                          (2mks)
  • Microsoft Outlook
  • Outlook express
  • Microsoft exchange
  • Eudora

 

 

  1. Discuss four advantages and two disadvantages that electronic mails have over regular

mails.                                                                          (6mks)

            Advantages

  1. Cheap & economical: -It costs almost nothing to transmit and e-mail

message over the network.  There is no need for stamps, envelopes, etc

  1. Secure;-Access to a user‟s mailbox can be restricted by use of a password           iii)       Faster:  – The delivery of an e-mail message normally takes seconds or

minutes depending on the distance to the receiver.

  1. Efficient:- A message prepared only once can be sent to several people
  2. Convenient: – with e-mail, one can send his/her messages when it is

convenient for him/her & the recipients can respond at their convenient times.

  1. Cheaper in preparing the message: – Most e-mail users accept less well-formatted messages and slight typing errors are overlooked, unlike in business letters which are expected to be error-free and formatted according to certain standards.

 

            Disadvantages

  • the initial installation cost is higher
  • Messages may be lost before they can be read due to virus infection
  • Messages may not be kept for future reference due to the high cost of storage

(2mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. a) What is a search engine?                                                      (2mks)
    • Google .com
    • Com
    • com
    • com
  2. Briefly describe four factors contributing to Internet access and growth in Kenya.

                                                                                                (6mks)

  1. Cost: – for effective use of internet, a powerful & costly computer is

needed.  The cost of installing internet services, telephone bills is also high hence discouraging internet growth.

  1. Illiteracy: – Many people are computer illiterate and therefore have no idea

of computer internet services.

  • Inadequate infrastructure: – Lack of infrastructures such as telephone

services in rural areas also hinders growth of internet access.  Lack of electricity discourages people from installing internets in their offices.

  1. lack of awareness of the existence of such services by the public.

 

 

DATA SECURITY & CONTROL

  1. Differentiate between data security and data integrity.   (2mks)

Data security – the protection of data & information from accidental or intentional  disclosure to unauthorized person or from unauthorized modification.

Data integrity-the accuracy & completeness of data entered in a computer.

Define integrity – the accuracy & completeness of data entered in a  computer.

 

  1. a) Define the term Computer crime                             (2mks)
    • The use of computer hardware or software for illegal activities, e.g., stealing, forgery defrauding, etc.
    • A deliberate theft or criminal destruction of computerized data
    • Committing of illegal acts using a computer or against a computer system.
  1. b) Explain the meaning of each of the following with reference to computer crimes.

                                                                                                (7mks)

  1. Cracking – use of guesswork over and over again trying to look for

weak access points in software in order to get access to data & information

  1. Hacking – Breaking of security codes and passwords to gain

unauthorized access to a computer system.

  • Tapping –  Listening to a transmission line to gain a copy of the

message being transmitted.

  1. Piracy –Making illegal copies of copyrighted software, data, or

information (i.e. copying of software illegally).

  1. Data alteration – Illegal changing of stored data & information

without permission with the aim of gaining or misinforming the authorized users.  Alteration changes the information inferences from the data.

  1. Fraud- use of computers to conceal information or cheat other

people with the intention of gaining money or information

  • Trespass-illegal physical entry to restricted places where computer

hardware, software & backed up data is kept.

  1. Outline four ways of preventing piracy with regard to data and information.

(4mks)

  • Enact & enforce copyright laws and other regulatory frameworks that protect the owners of data & information against piracy
  • make software cheap enough to increase affordability
  • -use licenses and certificates of authenticity to identify originals
  • Set installation passwords that prevent illegal installation of software.
  1. a) What is a Computer virus?                                       (2mks)

This is a program intentionally written to destroy data, information or the working of other programs inn a computer system

  1. b) i) State two ways through which computer viruses may be controlled.

(2 mks)

Running antivirus software programs regularly

Controlling the movement of storage media (e.g. floppy disks, flash disk, etc) in and out of the computer room

Disabling the floppy disk drives

ii)         Explain how each of the two ways listen in b (i) above assist in controlling

computer viruses.                                                      (2mks)

Antivirus software helps to detect and remove the viruses from the computer controlling the movement of floppy disks ensures that infected disks are not inserted into computers.

 

  1. Computer systems need maximum security to prevent an unauthorized access. State six precautions that you would expect an organization to take to prevent illegal access to its

computer-based systems.                              (6mks)

  • Lock the doors, (i.e. keep the computers in a strong room, which should remain firmly locked when nobody is using it).
  • Avoid welcoming strangers into the computer room
  • Use of personal identification cards
  • Use of fingerprint identification
  • Install security alarms at strategic access points so as to alert the security personnel in case of a break in.
  • Use of special voice recorders that would be able to analyse the voice of a trespasser & check against the database containing the voice patterns of valid users
  • Enforce data & information access control policies on all employees to control access to data
  • Use file passwords to prevent any person from getting access to the electronic files
  • Enforce network security measures, e.g. use of firewalls
  • Encrypt the data & information during transmission
  • Perform frequent audit trails to identify threats to data & information.

 

  1. Give four rules that must be observed in order to keep within the law when

working with data and information.                                                 (4mks)

  • It should be kept secure against loss or exposure
  • Should not be kept longer than necessary
  • Should be accurate and up-to-date
  • Should be collected, used & kept for specified lawful purposes (e.g., data should not be used for unlawful gain)
  • The owner of the data has a right to know what data is held by the person or organization having it.
  • Data should not be transferred to other countries without the owner‟s permission – Do not collects irrelevant and overly too much information for a purpose.
  1. An individual has a right to demand guarantee to privacy of personal information stored

on a computer.  Give three such types of information.                                          

                                                            (3 mks)

  • Name
  • Date of birth
  • Number
  • Residence
  • Address
  • Phone number

 

DATA REPRESENTATION IN A COMPUTER

 

  1. With the aid of a diagram, explain the difference between a digital signal and an analogue

signal.                                                                         (2mks)

An analogue signal is continuous in nature, while a digital signal is in discrete  form.

 

Analogue signal- sine wave

 

 

 

Digital signal – rectangular shaped

 

 

  1. Explain the role of a modem is communication.                             (2mks)

A modem converts (modules) data from digital to analogue form to be transmitted  over the telephone ling.  At the receiving end, the modem attached to the  receiving computer converts (demodulates)the analogue signal back to the original digital form.

 

 

 

  1. Explain each of the following computer terminogies as used in data representation.

                                                                                    (4mks)

  1. i) bit – The smallest binary unit, „0‟ or „1‟ ii) Byte  – A group/collection of 8 bits used to represent a character.
    • Nibble – a group of four binary digits usually representing a numeric

value.

  1. word –  The total number of bits that a single register of a particular

machine can hold

 

  1. State two reasons for using binary in digital technology.              (2mks)
    • It is easier to develop devices that understand binary language
    • Devices designed using binary logic are simple, more reliable & consume less

energy.

 

  1. Distinguish between Binary and Octal number systems, and give an example of each.

                                                                                                            (2mks)

Binary (base 2) system has just two states usually called “ON” and “OFF” or “0”  and “1”, Octal (base 8) system has eight different characters, I.e, 01234567.

 

  1. Perform the following computer arithmetic. In each case, show how you arrive at your answer.

           

  1. Convert the following Decimal numbers to their Binary equivalent.
  2. i) 4510
2 45 Rem
2 22 1
2 11 0
2 5 1
2 2 1
2 1 0
  1 1

(2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4510 = 1011012

 

 

  1. ii) 75                                                                                         (1mk)

 

2 4 Rem
2 2 0
2 1 0
  1 1

=0.112

0.75 x 2 = 1.50   1

0.50 x 2 = 1.00  1

= 1002                                                 = 100.112

 

 

 

  1. Convert 778 to Binary. (2mks)

Step 1:  Convert the octal number given to decimal

(7×81) + (7×80)

56 + 7 = 6310

 

Step 2: Convert the resulting decimal number to binary

2 63 Rem
2 31 1
2 31 1
2 15 1
2 7 1
2 3 1
  1 1

 

`               =1111112

  1. Use binary addition to solve the following: 410 +310 (2mks) Step 1:  Convert the decimal numbers to binary.

 

2 4 Rem
2 2 0
2 1 0
  1 1

410 = 1002

Step 2: Add binary notations

1002

112 +

1112                  1112

 

 

  3 Rem
2 1 1
  1 1

310 = 112

 

  1. Convert 101000000011111112 to its Hexadecimal equivalent. (2mks)

 

2 0 23222120 23222120 232+212 0+ 2322212 0
1 0100 0000 0111 1111

 

= [1] + [4] + [0] + [4+2+1] +[8+4+2+1]

=[1]   +[4]  +[0] +[7] +[15]

= 1407F16

 

  1. a) State one use of hexadecimal notation in a computer.        (1mk)
    • Helps to manage long binary digit properly
    • Helps to improve the processing speed and optimize memory usage.
  1. b) Convert 7678 to hexadecimal equivalent.               (2 mks)

Step 1: Convert 7678   to decimal

82 81 80  
7 6 7  
     

7×82 + 6 x 81 + 7 x 80

448   + 48   + 7 = 50310

  503 Rem
16 31 7
16 1 15
  1 1

Step 2: Convert 50310 to hexadecimal

 

7678 = 1 F716

  1. Use One‟s compliment to solve the following the following sum: – 510 (2mks)

 

 

2 5 Rem
2 2 1
2 1 0
  1 1

 

  1. Perform the following conversions: (3mks)

(a).      3410 to Binary.

 

2 34 Rem
2 17 0
2 8 1
2 4 0
2 2 0
2 1 0
  1 1

34 10 =1000102        (2mks)

 

           

 

  1. 12510 to binary                                                       (2mks)

 

2 7 Rem
2 3 1
    2 1 1
  1 1

=1112

 

 

0.12 x2 0.250               0

0.20 x2= 0.500             0

0.500×2=1.000             1

= 0.0012

= 111.0012                                                                              (1mk)

 

  1. 1011012 to a base 10 number.

 

25 24 23 22 21 2 0
1 0 1 1 0 1

 

= (1×25) + (1×23) + (1×22) + (1×20)

=32 + 8 + 4+ 1

=4510

 

  1. 112 to decimal                                                                   (2mks)

 

= (1×21) + (0x20) (1×2-1) + (1×2-2)                  1

= 2 + 0 ½ + ¼

= 2. {0.5 + 0.25}                     = 2.7510                  1                               (3mks)

 

  1. 216 to decimal (2mks)

 

161 161   16 0
7 0   2

 

= [2×161] + [ 0x160]  [2x (1/16)]

=32. [0.125]

= 32.12310

 

  1. 7AB16 to decimal                                                                   (2mks)
16 2 161 16 0
7 A B

 

= [7×162] + [10x 161 ] + [11×160]

=1792 + 160 +11 = 196310

 

  1. 111011.0102 to Octal (2mks)

 

  22   21  2 0 21  2 0   2 1
000 1 1 1 0       1 1   . 0    1      0

 

 

= {4 + 2+ 1} {2+1}   {2 +1} {2}

=73.28

 

 

  1. Convert 57.410 to its Octal equivalent (2mks)

 

8 57 Rem
8 7 1
8 7 1
 2 7 7

 

0.4 x 8 = 3.2    3

0.2 x 8 = 1.6    1 = 0.318

 

=718                                                71.318

 

 

  1. a) Perform the following Binary arithmetic:
  2. i) 11100111 + 00101110 (1mk)

 

11100111

  00101110 +

(1) 00010101  =1000101012     (1 mk)

 

  1. ii) 101012 – 110+2             (1mk)

101012

1102

11112

 

  1. b) Use Two‟s compliment to subtract 101 from 1000: (2mks)

Step 1:  change the values to 8 binary digits.

000010002  – 000001012

Step 2:             Add the binary equivalent of the first value to the Two‟s complement of

the second value

00001000

 

11111011  +

 

(1)00000011  =1000000112                        (2mks)

 

  1. Convert 7AE16 to a decimal number. (2mks)

Step 1

16 2+ 161 16 0
7 A E

=[7×162]  +  [12×161]  +  [1×160]

= 3840 + 192 +1       = 403310

 

2 4033 Rem
2 2016 1
2 1008 0
2 504 0
2 252 0
2 126 0
2 63 0
2 31 1
2 15 1
2 7 1
2 3 1
2 1 1
  1 1

Step 2

 

403310  = 1111110000012

  1. Write the following abbreviations in full:                           (4mks)

 

  1. i) BIT -Binary digit ii) BCD  -Binary Coded Decimal

iii)       ASCII              -American Standard Code for information Interchange     iv)       EBCDIC          -Extended Binary Coded decimal Interchange Code

 

 

DATA PROCESSING

 

  1. With an aid of a diagram, explain the stages of the data processing cycle.

                                                                                                                        (6mks)

 

Data processing

 

 

 

Output of „information‟

 

 

 

  • Data collection involves getting the data/facts needed for processing from the point of its origin to the computer
  • Data Input- the collected data is converted into machine-readable form by an input device, and send into the machine.
  • Processing is the transformation of the input data to a more meaningful form

(information) in the CPU

  • Output is the production of the required information, which may be input in future.

 

  1. Clearly differentiate between data collection and data capture. (2mks) Data capture is the process of obtaining data in a computer-sensible form for at the point of origin (the source document itself is prepared in a machine-sensible form for input)
    • Data collection involves getting the original data to the „processing centre‟, transcribing it, converting it from one medium to another, and finally getting it into the computer.

 

  1. Outline the 5 stages of data collection. (3mks)
    • Data creation
    • Data transmission
    • Data preparation
    • Media conversion (i.e, conversion of data from one medium to another
    • Input validation
    • Sorting

 

  1. a) Explain the relevance of the term garbage in garbage out (GIGO) in 

reference to errors in data processing.                                            (1mk)

The accuracy of the data entered in the computer directly determines the accuracy of the information given out.

b)         Give and explain two transcription and two computational errors committed

during data processing.                                                         (8mks)

 

  • Misreading errors: -they occur when the user reads source document incorrectly, thus entering wrong values, e.g. a user may confuse 5 in the number 586 with S, and type S86 instead.
  • Transposition errors: – they result from incorrect arrangement of characters (i.e., putting characters in the wrong order especially when keying data onto a diskette), e.g. the user may enter 396 instead of 369 computational errors
  • Overflow errors:       -An overflow occurs if the result from a calculation is too large to fit in the allocated memory space, e.g., if the allocated memory space is able to store an 8-bit character, then an overflow will occur if the result of the calculation gives a 9-

bit number.

 

  1. a) Define the term data integrity.                                 (2mks)

Data integrity refers to the dependability, timeliness, availability, relevance, accuracy & completeness of data/information

  1. b) State three ways of minimizing threats to data integrity. (3mks)
    • Backing up the data on external storage media
    • Enforcing security measures to control access to data
    • Using error detection & correction software when transmitting data
    • Designing user interfaces that minimize chances of invalid data being entered.

 

  1. a) briefly explain real-time processing.                                    (2mks)
    • Airline reservation systems
    • Theatre (cinema) booking
    • Hotel reservations
    • Banking systems
    • Police enquiry systems
    • Chemical processing plants
    • Hospitals to monitor the progress of a patient
    • Missile control systems

 

 

  1. c) Give three advantages and two disadvantages of a real-time system. (5mks)

Advantages

  • Provides up-to-date information
  • The information is readily available for instant decision-making
  • Provides better services to users/customers.
  • Fast &reliable
  • Reduces circulation of hardcopies.

Disadvantages

  • Require complex Os& are very expensive
  • Not easy to develop
  • Real time systems usually use 2 or more processors to share the workloads, which is expensive.
  • Require large communication equipment.

 

  1. Differentiate between CPU bound jobs and I/O bound jobs.

                                                                                                (2mks)

CPU bound jobs require more of the CPU time to process these jobs.  Most of the work the I/O devices perform is on the Input; and Output; hence, they require very little CPU time.

 

  1. Most companies are now shifting from the use of geographically distributed personal computers. This method of data processing is known as Distributed Data Processing (DDP)

 

Required:

  1. Name any threes computing resources that can be distributed.    (3mks) -CPU (Processors) time

-Files

-Application software

-Data/information/messages

-Computer processing power

-Memory (computer storage)

-Input/Output devices, e.g. printers

-communication devices/communication ports

 

  1. Name four examples of industries and business organizations that extensively use

distributed processing systems.                                                        (4mks)

 

  • Banks
  • Computerized retails stores, e.g. supermarkets
  • Learning institutions with many departmental offices
  • Bureaus or communication cyber cafes
  • Airline reservation systems

 

  • List down two benefits and three risks that might be associated with the distributed data

processing system.                                                     (5mks)

            Benefits

  • The load on the host computer is greatly reduced
  • The use of low cost minicomputers minimizes the cost in data processing
  • Delays in data processing are reduced
  • Provides better services to the customers
  • There is less risk in case of system breakdown
  • The design & implementation of the system is less complex due to decentralization The level of expertise required is less.

Risks

  • Data duplication is very common
  • Programming problems occur with microcomputers & minicomputers
  • Security threats, i.e. the data & information sent one the network from one place to
  • another can be tapped, or listened to by unauthorized parties
  • More training is needed for the users involved
  • It is expensive due to the extra cost of communication equipment.

 

  1. a) Explain the concept of multi-programming                                                 

                                                                                                            (2mks)

A Multi-programming system allows the user to run 2 or more programs, all of which are in the computer‟s main memory, at the same time.

 

  1. Give two benefits that are derived from multi-programming

                                                                                                            (2mks)

  • It increases productivity of a computer
  • Reduces the CPU‟s idle time
  • Reduces the incidence of peripheral bound operation

 

  1. State at least four advantages of storing data in computer files over the manual filing

system                                                                        (4mks)

  • Stored information takes up less space
  • Easier to update and modify
  • Provides faster access and retrieval of data
  • Reduces duplication of data or stored records
  • Cheaper
  • Enhances data integrity (i.e. accuracy and completeness)

 

  1. Distinguish between logical and physical computer files.                         

                                                                                                            (2mks)

  • A logical file is viewed in terms of what data items it contains and what processing operations may be performed on the data
  • A physical file is viewed in terms of how the data items found in a file are arranged on the storage media and how they can be processed.

 

  1. Arrange the following components of the information system data hierarchy in ascending order of complexity:

Field, Database, Byte, Record, Bit, and file                                                            (4mks)

 

Bit                     Byte  Field    Record            File                  Database

 

  1. In a computer based information system, state the purpose of the following files, and give one example where such a file may be required in a school.            

                                                                                    (8mks)

 

  1. Report file- It contains a set of relatively permanent records extracted from the data in a

master file.

They are used to prepare reports, which can ve printed at a later date, e.g. report on student‟s class performance in the term, extract of students who have not cleared their school fees, report on absentees.

  1. Backup file- Used to backup data or to hold duplicate copies of data/information from the computer‟s fixed storage or main file for security purposes e.g. a copy of all the students admitted in a school fees, report on absentees iii)   Reference file – Used for reference purposes.  It contains records that are fairly permanent or semi-permanent, e.g. Deductions in caution money, wage rates, tax deductions, employees address, price lists etc.
  2. iv) Sort file – used to sort/rank data according to a given order, e.g. ranking position in a

class of students.

  1. a) What is file organization?

It is the way records are arranged (laid out) within a particular file or any secondary storage device in a computer

  1. Differentiate between the following file organization methods: (4mks)
  2. Sequential and serial

In sequential file organization, records are stored in a sorted order using a

key field, while in serial; the records are stored in the order they come into the file, and are not sorted in any way.

 

  1. Random and indexed-sequential

In random file organization, records are stored in the file randomly and accessed directly, while in indexed –sequential, the records are stored sequentially but accessed directly using an index.

 

 

PROGRAMMING

Section A

  1. Define the following terms:                                                             (3mks)
    1. Computer Program

A computer program is a set of instructions that directs a computer on how

to process a particular  task.

  1. Programming

Programming is the process of designing a set of instructions which can be used to perform a particular task or solve a specific problem.

  • Programming language

A programming language is a language (set of instructions) used in

writing of computer programs.  The language must be understood by the computer for it to execute.

  1. Explain the meaning of the following as used in computer programming. (2mks)
    1. Syntax -these are rules that govern the arrangement of commands in a

particular language

  1. Semantic – the meaning attached to every command in a particular

language.

  1. a) What are low-level languages? Give their features.                      (4mks)

These are the basic programming languages, which can easily be understood by the computer directly, or which require little effort to be translated into computer understandable form.

           

Features:

  • They are machine hardware-oriented
  • They are not portable, i.e. , a program written for one computer cannot be installed and used on another computer of a different family
  • They use Mnemonic codes
  • They frequently used symbolic addresses.

 

  1. b) Give three advantages of high-level languages as opposed to low-level

languages                                                                                           (3mks)

  • Easier to learn, understand and use
  • Easily portable, i.e. they can be transferred between computers of different families and run with little or no modification
  • The programs are short & take shorter time to be translated
  • More flexible, hence they enhance the creativity of the programmer and increase his/her productivity in the workplace
  • Easier to debug (correct errors)& maintain
  • Easy to modify
  • They are user-friendly & problem –oriented, hence can be used to solve problems arising from the real world.

 

4          a)         Examine two features of fourth generation languages (4GLS) (2mks)

  • Have programming tools such as command buttons, forms, textboxes, etc
  • Use of mouse pointer to drag an object on a form
  • Use application generators to generate program codes Can enquire & access data stored in database systems

 

  1. b) List three examples of fourth generation programming languages.             (3mks)
  • Visual Basic
  • Delphi Pascal
  • Cobol
  • Access Basic

 

  1. Describe 5 factors to be considered while choosing a programming language. (5mks)
  2. i) The availability of the relevant translator     ii)        Whether the programmer is familiar with the language    iii)       Ease of learning and use              iv)       Purpose of the program, i.e. application areas such as education, business,

scientific, etc.

  1. v) Execution time: High –level languages are easy to read, understand & develop; hence, they require less development time. Machine code & Assembly languages are relatively difficult to read, understand and develop; hence, they are time-consuming.

 

  • Popularity: – the language selected should be suitable and /or successful in the market with respect to the problems to be solved.
  • Documentation: – It should have accompanying documentation (descriptions on how to use the language or maintain the programs written in the language
  1. Availability of skilled programmers: – The language selected should have a pool of readily available programmers to ease the programming activity, and reduce development time.

 

  1. Differentiate between the following as used in programming:
    1. A source program is a program that is not yet translated;

Object code is a program that is in machine readable form obtained from a source program by use of a translator

 

  1. Flowchart and pseudo code. (2mks)

A flowchart is a graphical representation of step-by-step processing logic of a program, while pseudo code is a set of structured English like statements that describe the processing steps to be followed to solve a given problem.

 

  • What do the following abbreviations stand for: (2mks)

 

  1. i) FORTRAN – formula Translator ii) COBOL – Common business oriented language iii) OOP  – Object Oriented Programming

 

  • a) Define a Language translator                                                           (1mk)

This is a language processor such as an assembler, interpreter, or compiler that converts the source program into object code.

 

  1. b) Give two advantages of compiling a program rather than interpreting
  2. (2mks)
    • Interpreters translate the source program one statement/line at a time, Compilers translate the entire source code at once before execution.
    • Interpreters translate the program each time it runs, hence slower than compiling. Complied programs can be saved on a storage media. It does not require any further translation any time the program is run, hence executes faster than interpreted programs.
    • Interpreter translation takes less memory, while compiled programs require more memory as the object code files are larger.

 

  1. Name the stages of a program development in their logical sequence. (31/2)
    • Problem recognition
    • Problem definition
    • Program design
    • Program coding
    • Program testing and debugging
    • Program implementation and maintenance
    • Program documentation
  2. (a) Give two reasons why it is necessary to have a program design. (2mks)
    • It identifies the exact order in which the processing tasks will be carried out so as to solve the problem
    • It provides for easy maintenance & modification

 

  1. State two requirements during computer program testing. (2mks)

Compilation to check the whole program if there are any errors

Debugging the program

 

 

  1. a) State any four rules/guidelines that should be followed when drawing 

program flowcharts.                                                                          (4mks)

  • A flowchart should have only one entry (starting point) and one exit point
  • The flowchart should be clear, neat and easy to follow
  • Use the correct symbol at each stage in the flowchart
  • The flowchart should not be open to more than one interpretation
  • Avoid overlapping the lines used‟ to show the flow of logic as this can
  • create confusion in the flowchart
  • Make comparison instructions simple, i.e , capable of Yes/No answers
  • The logical flow should be clearly shown using arrows
  • Ensure that the flowchart is logically correct & complete
  1. Give one advantage of pseudo codes over flowcharts (1mk)
    • Pseudo codes are easier to write and understand
    • They are convenient especially for long algorithms which span over several pages.

 

  1. Explain the following types of computer program errors:
  2. a) Syntax error                                                                           (2mks)

These are programming errors/mistakes that occur due to incorrect/improper use of the grammatical rules of a particular language

E.g., Punctuation mistakes, (i.e. omitting a comma or a semicolon), improper naming of variables, wrong spellings of user defined and reserved words.

  1. Logical Errors

These are errors that occur as a result of bad program design

Logical errors relate to the logic of processing followed in the program to

get the desired results e.g. they may occur as a result of misuse of logical operators.

 

  1. Run-time (execution) error.                                     (2mks)

Run-time (execution) errors.  They occur when the programmer develops statements, which are not projecting towards the desired goal.  Such statements will create deviations from the desired objectives

 

  1. Explain four error detecting methods in program development (4mks)
    1. Dry running (desk checking); – checking a program for errors by

making the corrections on a paper before entering it in the program editor.

  1. Translator system checking: – It involves the running of a translator

program (e.g., compiler or Interpreter) after entering the set of coded instructions in order to detect any syntax errors.

  • Use of debugging utilities: – It involves supplying data values to the program for which the answer is known. If the program does not give the correct answers, it shows that it contains some errors.

 

14.       Describe three types of program documentation in reference to programming

                                                                                    (6mks)

  1. i) User-oriented documentation: – It is a manual that enables the user

to learn how to install and use the program ii)          Operator –oriented documentation: – It is a manual that enables the user to learn how to install and use the program.

iii)       Programmer-oriented documentation: – This is a detailed documentation written for skilled programmers.  It provides the necessary technical information to help the programmer in future modification of the program.

  1. a)         State three types of control structures use in programming.          (3mks)

-Sequence

-Selection/decision

-Iteration/looping

 

                       

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Draw a simple flowchart diagram to illustrate the FOR-DO structure.

                                                                                                                                    (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Define the term structured programming                            (2mks)

This is the technique of program design that allows large programs can be broken down into smaller components/sub-programs called modules or sub-routines), each performing a particular task.

  1. List any two characteristics of Structured programming. (2mks)

Modules or sub-routines

Use of control structures in problems solving

 

  1. Give two benefits of structured programming. (2mks)
    • Breaks (splits) a large program into smaller sub-programs (modules) each able to solve a particular/specific problem
    • Structured programs are easier to read
    • They are easy to code and run
    • Programs are easy to modify because; a programmer can change the details of a section without affecting the rest of the program
    • Modules are easy to test & debug (i.e correct mistakes/errors). This is because; each module can be designed, coded & tested independently
    • It is easier to document specific tasks.
    • Use of modules can be named in such a way that, they are consistent & easy to find in documentation
    • It is flexible.

 

  1. a) Define the term selection to program control structures.              (1mk)

Selectionrefers to a situation where further program execution depends on making a decision from two or more alternatives.

  1. List four selection control structures used in writing a program (4mks)
    • IF…THEN
    • IF…THEN…ELSE
    • Nested IF
    • CASE …OFF
  2. a) Name the control structure depicted by the following diagram (2mks)

 

 

 

Selection control structure, e.g. If –then –else

 

  1. Name the symbols labeled A and b in the diagram above. (2mks)

A-Decision box

B- Process symbol

  1. Define the term ARRAY as used in computer programming. (1mk)

An array is a data structure that stores several data items of the same type.

 

  1. Draw a simple flowchart diagram showing:                                                (2mks)                          a) IF….THEN…. selection                                                              

 

Continuation of program

           

  1. ..THEN…ELSE selection (2mks)

 

 

  1. REPEAT…UNTIL loop (4mks)

 

 

  1. a) With aid of a pseudo code and a flowchart, design an algorithm that 

would:

  • Prompt the user to enter two number X and Y
  • Divide X by Y. However, if the value of Y is 0, the program should display an error message “Error: Division by zero”.

 

START

PRINT (“Enter two numbers, X and Y”) Input X, Y

IF Y=0 THEN

PRINT „Error: division by zero‟

ELSE

Quotient = X/Y

PRINT X, Y, Quotient

ENDIF

STOP

Flowchart

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Write down the assignment statement used in the algorithm above. (2mks) Quotient=x/Y

 

  1. Which program control structure is depicted in the algorithm? (1mk)

If …then…Else

 

  1. Draw a flowchart for a program that is to prompt for N numbers, accumulate the sum and them find the average. The output is the accumulated totals and the average.

 

 

 

 

  1. Write a pseudo code that reads temperature for each day in a week, in degree Celsius, converts the celcius into Fahrenheit and then calculate the average weekly temperatures.

The program should output the calculated average in degrees Fahrenheit.

 

START

INPUT temperature in 0C

SET Initial day to 0

WHILE Initial day <=6 DO

F = 32 + (9c/5)

INPUT temperature in 0C

Initial day = Initial day + 1

Cumulative      = Cumulative + 0F

END WHILE

Average          = Cummulative/7

PRINT average

Stop

 

 

 

 

  1. Michael deposits 1,000 in a bank at an interest rat of 10% per year. At the end of each year, the interest earned is added to the amount on deposit and this becomes the new deposit for the next year.

Develop a pseudo code to determine the year in which the amount accumulated first exceeds 2,000.  Also for each year, print the year (starting from 1), the deposit, the Interest earned, and the total accumulated at the end of the year.

 

START

Input initial deposit, Interest rate, and Target deposit

Set Deposit to 1000

Set Year to 0

REAPEAT

Year= Year + 1

Interest = Deposit x 10%

Total = Deposit +Interest

Deposit = total

UNTIL Deposit > 2000

PRINT Deposit, Year

STOP

 

 

 

 

  1. Study the flowchart diagram below and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

  1. a) What will be the value of the sum when printed? Show how you arrive at your answer.

                                                                                    (5mks)

 

R Term Sum
0 0x20 0 + 0=0
1 1×21 = 2 0+2=2
2 2×22 = 8 2 +8 =10
3 3×23 = 24 10 + 24 = 34

 

 

The value of Sum = 34

 

  1. Mwalimu savings society (MSS) Pays 5% interest on shares exceeding 100,000 shillings and 3% on shares that do not meet this target. However, no interest is paid on deposits in the member‟s MSS bank account
  2. a) Design a pseudo code for a program that would:

 

  1. i) Prompt the user for shares and deposit of particular members ii) Calculate the interest and total savings iii)   Display the interest and total savings on the screen for particular members of the

society.                                                                                               (7mks)

 

START

PRINT “Enter member Name, share and Deposit”

INPUT Name, Shares, Deposit

IF shares > 100,000 THEN

Interest = 0.05 x Shares

ELSE

Interest = 0.03 x Shares

ENDIF

Total savings =Deposit + shares +Interest

PRINT Name, Total savings, Interest

STOP

 

  1. b) Draw a flowchart for the above pseudo code. (8mks)

 

           

 

  1. a) Study the flowchart below and answer the questions that follow:

           

  1. List all the outputs from the flowchart. (3mks)

 

24, 50, 102                  (any correct 3)

 

  1. What will be the output if the statement in the decision box is changed to?
                                                                                (3mks)
    i) M100    
 

 

                Only one value, 11 will be printed  1    
    ii) M < 100    
 

 

                Only one value, 11 will be printed  1    
    iii) M = 100    
      values starting with 11 to  infinity, i.e. , 11, 22, 44,……….  1
  1. Modify the flowchart to print the sum of all the outputs. (9mks)

           

  1. The gross salary of employees of Mutson Chemist is based on the Basic and additional benefits. Employees with more than 10 year‟s experience get an additional pay of 10% of their basic salary.  Bonuses are given as per employees‟ sales of the month as: 
     
>200,000   15%
100,000 – 200,000   10%
Below 100,000     5%

Draw a flowchart for the program that will calculate Gross salary and output each employee‟s

Basic salary, gross salary and all benefits.               (15 mks)

           

SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT

 

  1. What do you mean by a system?                                                 (2mks)

A system is a set of items, equipments, procedures, programs or techniques & people working jointly with an aim of achieving common goals.

 

  1. Differentiate between soft systems and hard systems. (2mks)
    • In Soft systems, goals and objectives are not clearly defined. In hard systems, goals & objectives are clearly defined and the outcomes from the processes of the systems are predictable
    • Soft systems are usually the human activity systems; their boundaries keep on

changing.

(5mks)

  1. Explain five characteristics of a system (5mks)

Holistic thinking: – a system contains a set of interacting elements.  However, in  holistic thinking, a system is considered as a whole unit.

Purpose:-a system must be designed to achieve a specific predefined objective. System boundaries and environment; -the components of each system should  operate within a specific framework, limits or space.  The system receives inputs  from& communicates its outputs to the environment.

Subsystems: – A system does not exist alone, but it is made up of different components or other systems that communicate with each other

Inputs and outputs: – a system communicates with its environment by receiving inputs and giving outputs.  E.g. a manufacturing firm gets inputs in form of raw materials from the environment and transforms them into finished products which are released into the environment

Process:– a system usually transforms or processes data from one state to another. System entropy (decay);a system must have controls which help it not to operate beyond its boundaries.  The controls enable the system to adapt to changes in the environment in order to give the expected output or to perform to the expected level.

 

  1. a)Define the term information system. (2mks)

An information system is the arrangement of people, data, processes and information that work together to support and improve the day-today operations of a business.

  1. Highlight three circumstances that necessitate the development of new

information systems.                                                             (3mks)

  • New opportunities: – a chance to improve the quality of internal processes and

service delivery in the organization may arise

  • Invention of new systems which are more successful than the existing ones Problems: – the user may encounter some difficulties in the operations of the

existing system

  • Directive: – these are requirements imposed by the management, government, or

external influences.

  1. State four roles (functions) of an Information system analyst. (4mks)
    • Examines the feasibility of potential computer applications.
    • Reviews the existing system & makes recommendations on how to improve or implement an alternative system.
    • Works hand in hand with programmers to construct a computerized system
    • Coordinates the training of new system users and owners.
    • He is the overall project manager of the information system being implemented.

Some of his duties include: assuring quality, keeping within schedule & budgeting.

 

  1. Define the following terms:
  2. i) System control

A system control is a method by which a system adapts to changes in the environment in order to give the expected output or perform at the expected level.

  1. ii) System boundary

It is the scope/limits within which the system components operate iii)       Online analytical processing

The process whereby a computer-based information system is used to capture operational data, analyze it, and generate reports that can be used  to support the decision making process in an organization

  1. State one disadvantage of the Traditional approach in system development (1mk) The structure of the old system is not changed in anyway; hence; hence, the weaknesses of the old system are not corrected and are carried forward to the new system.

 

 

  1. What is Prototyping as used in system development?             (2mks)

It is a Rapid system/program development technique 1 where system developers quickly capture user requirements by designing system interfaces in the presence of the user. 

 

  1. Outline the seven steps followed in structured system development.  (3 ½ mks)

-Problem recognition and definition

-Information gathering

-Requirements specification

-System design

-System construction (coding)

-System implementation

-System review and maintenance.                 (NB: Order must be followed)

 

  1. Define the term Feasibility study as used in system development.             (2mks)

This is a special study carried out to establish the costs and benefits of a proposed  new system.

  1. You are required to develop a registration system for a particular school. State  two ways in which you would gather the information required for the system

development.                                                                                                  (2mks)

 

-Study of available documents

-Observation

-Interviews

-Use of questionnaires

-workshops and seminars

-Use of automated methods

  1. Identify two disadvantages of Observation method used in fact-finding. (2mks)

-The person being observed may perform differently or change his/her behaviour  leading to wrong requirements being observed

-The work being observed may not involve the level of difficulty or volume  normally experience during that period of time.

-The need to be on the site where the activities are taking place consumes a lot of time. -Some activities may take place at odd times causing a scheduling inconvenience for the analyst.

  1. a) Name three circumstances in which it is better to use a Questionnaire than an 

      Interview for gathering information.                                         (3mks)

  • If the information to be gathered is located over widely spread geographical area.
  • If a large number of people are to be questioned, and the questions to be asked require short answers, or are limited to Yes/No
  • Where 100% coverage is not essential
  • Where privacy (anonymity) of the respondents is to be maintained.

 

  1. Outline three advantages of questionnaires.             (3mks)
    • Use of questionnaires gives the respondents privacy; hence, there is likelihood that the information given is sincere and real.
    • Questions can be answered quickly since respondents can complete and return the questionnaires at their convenient time.
    • It is a cheap method of collecting data from large number of individualsResponses can easily be tabulated and analyzed quickly.

 

  1. a) Explain the importance of using automated methods in fact finding.             (1mk)

Automated method of data collection can be used in areas which are not easily

accessible.

  1. Give one example of automated information gathering technique. (1mk)                          -Use of a video camera to capture motion pictures

-Use of Tape recorder.

  1. Mention the four factors that may be considered in order to design a good file.(4mks)

oOutput specifications (i.e., output from the system) oInput specifications oTable/file structure specifications oHardware specifications oSoftware specifications

 

  1. State four factors that may be considered in order to design a good file. (4mks)
    • Record key fields
    • Data type for each field
    • Length of each field
    • Backup and recovery strategies.
  2. Define the term “attribute”                                                             (1mk)

An attribute is a unique characteristic of a record for which a data value can be stored in the system database. E.g., a student record has attributes such as Name, admission number, class, etc.

 

  1. State two methods/tools that a system analyst may use to design a system. (2mks)
    • Use of system flowcharts
    • Data flow diagrams
    • Entity relationship models
    • Structured charts

 

  1. Explain three tasks that are carried out during system implementation. (3mks)
    • File conversions
    • Staff training
    • Project management
    • Changeover strategies.

 

  1. Your school has decided to replace its library control system. The current system was implemented ten years ago but has restricted reporting facilities and has a text-based interface. The school intents to replace the old system with a new computerized system, and is now considering both „Parallel running” and “direct changeover”. 

a). (i) Briefly explain the terms parallel running and direct changeover as used in system

implementation.                                                                                                         (2mks)

  • Parallel running is where both the old and the new systems are run in parallel to each other (a the same time) for sometime until users have gained confidence in the new system. Data is processed on both systems in order to compare their performance, and also cross-check the results.
  • Direct changeover is a complete replacement of the old system with the new system in one bold move. The old system is stopped & abandoned and the new system starts operating immediately.

 

  • Give two disadvantages of direct changeover over parallel running. (1mk)
    • It may be very inconveniencing (or, the organization will incur huge losses) in case the new system fails or faces problems.
    • The users may not have gained enough confidence to run the new system.
    • The weaknesses of the old system may not be corrected & may still be transferred to the new system.
    • Loss of jobs for the workers whose departments are affected.
    • If the new system fails, data recovery may be impossible.

 

  • Mention any two advantages of running both the manual system ad the

computerized system simultaneously.                                                          (2mks)

  • If the outputs from the two systems are similar, confidence in the ICT systems.
  • Users have time to familiarize themselves with the ICT systems.
  • It is reliable because it enables thorough testing. oWeaknesses in either of the systems are corrected. –

 

NETWORKING & DATA COMMUNICATION

 

  1. Define the following terms: (2mks)
  • Computer network                                                                                     (2mks)
    • A collection 2 or more computers connected together using transmission media (e.g., telephone cables, or Satellites) for the purpose of communication and sharing of resources.
  • Data transmission                                                                                     (2mks)
    • Passing information from one terminal to another in a computer network through telecommunication channels

(b) Differentiate between a modern and a multiplexer.                              (2mks)

  • A Multiplexer enables sending of multiple data signals over the same medium, either simultaneously or at different times.
  • A Modern converts a digital signal to analogue form, so that it can be transmitted over analogue telephone lines.
  1. State three advantages and three disadvantages of computer networking.    (6mks)

Advantages

  • Sharing of resources between the computers – Sharing of risks.
  • Provides cheaper and efficient communication.
  • Running cost is low because of the minimal hardware required.
  • Reliable and error-free.
  • Enhances faster communication
  • It is not time-consuming.

 

Disadvantages of networking

  • High initial installation cost (i.e., expensive to install).
  • Security threats e.g., hacking, which posses a great danger to loss of information
  • Moral and cultural effects.
  • Spread of terrorism, drug-trafficking and viruses.
  • Over reliance on networks.

 

  1. (a) What is a distributed system? (2mks)

This is a system in which data is manipulated in different processors/computers, which are on the same network but placed in separate locations.

 

(b) State any two advantages of distributed systems.                                             (2mks)

  • There is sharing of data & other resources.
  • Relieves the central computer of the burden of processing data
  • Failure of the central computer does not affect the operations of the other terminals
  • Processing load is shared equally; hence no time wastage
  • There is faster processing of data since each machine can process & store its data
  • It doesn‟t need powerful & expensive servers for data storage
  • It can accommodate users with variety of needs Creation of employment at the remote centers.

 

  1. Distinguish between bounded and unbounded transmission media, giving two examples in each.
    • In bounded media, data signals are transmitted from the source to the destination through a restricted pathway, e.g., two open wire cables, twisted pair cables, Coaxial cables, fiber optic cables.
    • Unbounded media transmits data without physical connections, e.g. microwave, satellite, radio, infrared communication.
  2. State what is meant by each of the following data transmission media, and give two advantages and three disadvantages for each.
    1. Twisted pair cables. (3mks)

A twisted pair cable is made up of 2 insulated copper wires twisted around each other in a spiral pattern.  This prevents electromagnetic fields from developing around the two wires as they transmit data.

Advantages 

-Has high data transfer rates of up to 100 Mbps

-It is cheap because; of mass production for telephone use.

 

Disadvantage

oThey suffer from high attenuation oaffected by electromagnetic fields oIt has low data transmission rates as compared to other cables ii) Coaxial cables

Coaxial cables consist of two conductors which are insulated and shielded to provide high noise immunity & also more resistant to electromagnetic interference.

 

Advantages oThey have a large bandwidth (up to 1 Gbps) compared to twisted pair cables oThey can carry voice, data and video signals simultaneously oThey are more resistant to radio and electromagnetic interference than twisted pair cables

Disadvantages oThey are hard to work with oThey are expensive to buy & install

 

iii)        Fibre optic cables is made of transparent glass and uses light to transmit data signals from one point to another on the network.

Advantages oIt is immune to electromagnetic interference, and eavesdropping.

oIt is fast and supports high bandwidthoIt has low attenuation; hence, a long distance can be covered oIt is small & light.

Disadvantages oDifficult & expensive to install oOnce broken, it is difficult & expensive to repair.

  1. iv) Wireless/microwave/radio transmission.                            (3mks)

Inwireless transmission, no physical connections are used to transmit data from one point to another.  Instead a transmitting antenna & a receiver aerial are used to facilitate the communication

Advantages

  • wireless networks can span large geographical areas easily oCan be used in very remote areas that do not have high cost physical infrastructure like telephone lines o

Disadvantages

  • The initial cost is very high oIt is relatively difficult to establish or configure.
  1. Explain the function of the following network devices:
    1. Network interface card (NIC)

NIC creates a physical link between the computer and the transmission media.

  1. Gateway

Gateways provide access to the Wide area networks & the Internet.

  • Bridge

This is a network device that selectively determines the appropriate network

segment for which a message is meant to be delivered.

 

 

 

  1. Repeater

A repeater receives a weak signal on the network, cleans and amplifies it for transmission over the next portion of the network.  Signals become weak due to attenuation

  1. List two advantages of cell phones over fixed lines. (2mks)
    • Are cheaper than fixed lines
    • Less prone to transmission errors
    • Can be used even where there are no telephone lines Portable, i.e. can be carried around

 

  1. a) Study the diagram below and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

  1. Name the communication media depicted in the above diagram. (1mk) Satellite communication

 

  1. Name the parts labelled A, B, C, and D. (4 mks)
  • -Receiving earth station
  • -Satellite in space
  • -Down link
  • -Up link
  • List three advantages of the above communication media.             (3mks)
  • It is fast
  • It is convenient because; it provides a large constant line of sight to each station Hence, there is no need to keep on moving the parabolic dish so as to track the line of sight
  • Can be in very remote areas that do not have high cost physical infrastructure like

telephone lines.                                                                                      (2mks)

  1. a) Define the term network topology.                                                  (2mks)

                        Network topology refers to the arrangement of the computers, printers and other

equipment connected on the network.

  1. b) Distinguish between logical and physical network topology.          (2mks)
    • Logical (signal) topology deals with the way data passes from one device to the next on the network
    • Physical topology refers to the physical arrangement (layer out) of devices on the network.

APPLICATION AREAS OF ICT

  1. Write in full hence, explain the term ICT.                                      (2mks)
    • ICT- Information and Communication Technology
    • ICT- refers to the integration of computers and telecommunication facilities for the purpose of communication.
  2. State four areas where computers are used today. (4mks)
  3. i) Financial systems, e.g. accounting, stock exchange, payroll, banking, etc,  ii)        Transport systems, e.g. air traffic control, shipping control, automobile traffic

control

  • Entertainment systems, e.g. used in showing movies, playing music, &

computer games.

  1. Scientific research, i.e. weather forecasting, medical research, military & space

exploration.

  1. State two ways in which a computer may be used in efficient running of a hospital.
    • Keeping records of incoming and outgoing patients
    • In electro-cardiogram screening and monitoring, analyzing the sickness & checking     for damages, e.g. X-ray
    • A computer controls life supporting machines
    • For inventory control
    • To access foreign expertise or labour, i.e. to get in touch with consultants or surgeons in another country, thereby reducing traveling of patients & professionals.
  2. a) Name the type of processing that would be required by a payroll system. (1mk)

Batch processing

 

  1. Identify two benefits of using computers in accounting systems. (2mks)
    • They make the processing of financial records easier
    • Error checking procedures can e established to ensure accuracy & security of data
    • Used to store volumes of financial records
    • Ensure fast & easy production of financial reports
    • They are cheaper than manual systems

 

  1. a) Write down all the input and output devices of an ATM machine of Pesa-point in

Kenya.

  • Keyboard
  • The ATM card
  • Screen (Visual display)
  • Printer

 

  1. List down three advantages of ATM cards. (3mks)
  • Offer 24 hour service to customers
  • Ensure more flexibility in cash deposits and withdrawals
  • It is secure because; it requires a personal identification number (Pin), which is only known by the card holder
  • There is no need for human bank clerks.

 

 

 

  1. a) State four components of an electronic Point-of-sale terminal. (4mks)
    • Terminal, e.g. Console, which is connected to the main computer
    • Monitor
    • Printer

 

  1. Give two advantages of using electronic point-of sale terminals as opposed

to manual entry at a supermarket checkout counter.                     (2mks)

  • Fewer errors made by employees, i.e. correct prices are used at the point of entry
  • It ensures faster entry of data, since the attendant does not have to enter details manually.
  • Ensures good stock management procedure.
  1. Define the following terms:
    1. Biometric analysis

This is the study, measurement & analysis of human biological characteristics.  It uses a

computer and a biometric device to recognize & analyze features of human body parts such as fingerprints, lips, voice iris colour, etc

 

  1. Telecommuting

A situation where an employee works in a location that is remote from the

normal place of work either on full-time or part-time basis.

 

 

  1. Outline four devices required in order to conduct a video conference. (4mks)
    • A computer
    • A digital video camera (camcorder) attached to a computer
    • Network software for video conferencing
    • A microphone
    • Speakers
  2. a) Define the term E-commerce                                                           (2mks)

E-commerce is a way of doing business where the transactions are carried out electronically without the seller and buyer interacting physically.

  1. b) List down two advantages of e- commerce as used in modern business 

environment                                                                           (2mks)

  • Reduces traveling, hence saves money and time
  • A company can access customers all over the world, and is not limited by space & wagons
  • Reduces operating costs of small business as they can establish websites where they can auction their good & services. This also increases their sales.

 

  1. Describe how computing has been applied to each of the following areas:
  2. i) Transportation systems.                                                                    (2mks)
    • Used by railway corporations to coordinate the movement of their goods & wagons – Used in airline industry for air traffic control, surveillance of airspace using radar  equipment
    • Used in shipping control
    • Used in automobile traffic control in busy towns, i.e. to simulate the timing of traffic lights.

 

  1. Reservation systems.                                                           (2mks)
    • To keep record of reservation
    • For online reservation (i.e. provide online remote services)
    • Paperless transaction (Paying via credit cards)
    • Easy to check for vacant positions
  • Law enforcement (2mks)
    • For keeping record on fingerprints
    • Biometric analysis in crime detection so as to provide immediate & accurate information
    • Scene monitoring & analysis to help the police in arresting traffic offenders and criminals.

 

  • Library management systems (2mks)
    • Keeping book records and stock management
    • Tracking overdue books

 

  1. Suggest how computers may in future be made more user-friendly for persons that are:
  2. a) Blind                                                                           (1mk)
    • Development of Braille keyboards, or engraved keyboards
    • Computers can be installed with talking software, i.e., can store voice patterns

of the user

 

  1. b) Without hands
  • Use of voice-activated commands.
  • Computers can be installed with powerful multimedia system & speech

recognition devices.

  1. Give at least four reasons why a firm may decide to computerize its operations
    • Handling of errors easily
    • Easy storage and retrieval of information
    • Increased efficiency
    • Higher quality work
    • Reduced cost.

 

 

 

 

IMPACT OF ICT ON SOCIETY

  1. Identify four problems associated with the introduction of computers in a society.

                                                                                                                                    (4mks)

oJob displacement and replacement oComputer crimes, e.g. piracy, fraud, hacking oHealth effects, e.g. repetitive strain injury, eye problems oCultural effects and immorality (DVD‟s, pornographic literature on the Internet

  1. Distinguish between “job replacement” and “job displacement” in reference to

Computerization                                                                                                        (2mks)

In job replacement, the unskilled workers may be replaced with the skilled ones.  In job displacement, some employees may be displaced/ moved to new working areas as the computer may serve to perform tasks that may be performed by several people.

 

  1. A recent breakthrough in the manufacturing industry is the development of a full manufacturing plant, that can produce vehicles using robots only.
  2. a) Give three advantages of fully automated manufacturing.   (3mks)
    • Increases efficiency due to the balancing of workload and production
    • Production increases in the workplace
    • Improves customer service
    • Enables production of adequate & high quality goods in time
    • Enables efficient utilization of resources, e.g. raw materials, personnel and equipment; hence reducing operating expenses.
  1. b) State three other areas where automation is applicable. (3mks)
  • Intelligent control of traffic lights
  • The autopilot in aircrafts
  • Use of robots in industries
  • Manufacturing industries such as vehicle assembly plants, oil refineries, and food processing companies.
  1. Discuss the applications of Artificial Intelligence in each of the following fields:
    1. Expert systems
      • In medical institutions for diagnosis of diseases
      • In mining companies for prospecting of minerals.
      • Financial forecasting, e.g. formulation of taxation & marketing policies, and making of investment decisions.
      • Financial forecasting, e.g. formulation of taxation & marketing policies, and making of investment decisions.

 

  1. Natural language processing                                                 (2mks)
    • It involves development of programming languages, whether spoken or written
    • This will make the task of data processing even faster
  • Artificial neural networks.                                                   (2mks)
    • This is the use of electronic devices & software to emulate the learning process of the human brain and how it recognizes patterns.
  1. Explain the impact of information technology on organization in each of the following areas
    1. Competition (2 mks)
  • Ability to advertise in the internet
  • Improved quality goods & services
  • Reduced operational costs

 

  1. Pace of growth (2 mks)
  • Reduced costs
  • Reduced need for manpower
  • Reduced space requirement
  • Greater output

 

  1. State three reasons why users may resist the introduction of information and communicationTechnology (ICT) to their place of work
    1. Fear of change- people are creatures of habit, hence are afraid of change
    2. Fear of losing their jobs: By installing the computer into an organization, employees fear that they might end up losing their jobs
  • Fear of failure – Since the computer is very new in a given working environment, the people will be afraid that they might never get used to it.
  1. Loss of control: The management fear that once a computer system is implemented, they might lose control of the organization.

 

CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN ICT

  1. Give a brief description of the following careers available in the computing field.
    • A Software engineers is one who is skilled in software development and technical operations of computer hardware

He develops and updates both system and application software together with the associated documentations.

 

  • Data processing managers (DPM)                                                   ( 2 mks)

A data processing manager is the person who usually is in charge of the overall running of the data processing department in an organization

He plans, monitors and controls the personnel, ensures that resources and labour are available as required and interfaces to users

 

  1. Differentiate between software engineer and a computer engineer ( 2mks) Software engineer develops software/ programs as per requirements; computer engineer designs computer hardware and improves on existing ones.
  2. (a) Sate three public universities where one can further  her computer studies ( 3 mks)
    • Nairobi university
    • Moi University
    • Kenyatta University
    • Jomo Kenyatta University of agriculture and Technology (JKUAT)
    • Egerton University
    • Maseno university

(b) Identify at least three related courses offered at

            (i) College level

  • Certificate in information technology
  • Diploma in information technology
  • Diploma in Education (computer science)

 

            (ii) University level

  • Computer science
  • Information technology
  • Information systems

 

  1. (a) Name three responsibilities that are carried out by a:

            (i) Web administrator

  • Develop & test websites
  • Maintains, updates & modifies information on the websites to meet new demands by

the users.

  • Monitors the access & use of internet connection by enforcing security measures
  • Downwards information needed by an organization or institution from internet websites

 

(ii) Computer trainer

  • Training people on how to use a computer & the various application programs
  • Development training reference materials
  • Guiding learners on how to acquire knowledge through carrying out research
  • Advising the learners on the best career opportunities in the broad field of ICT – Preparing learners for ICT examinations

 

  1. Explain two factors one would consider before enrolling for an ICT course in a college
    • The cost of the course
    • Marketability of the course, i.e. whether it offers courses recognized both locally and

internationally.

  • Basic course requirement, e.g. qualifications
  • Job opportunities

 

 

 

 

K.C.S.E SAMPLE PAPER

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education 

451/1 computer studies

Paper 1 (theory)

2 ½ hours

 

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

This paper consists of TWO sections A and B

Answer ALL the questions in section A.

Answer questions 16 and any other THREE questions from section B

 

 

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION  QUESTION SCORE
A 1- 15  
  16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
  TOTAL SCORE  

 

 

SECTION A (40 marks)

Answer all the questions in this section

1.Computer systems are built from three types of physical components: processors, memoriesand I/O devices

(a) State two tasks of a processor

  • To fetch data & information from memory
  • Decodes instructions
  • Execute/ runs programs
  • Controls hardware operations through sending of control signals

 

(b) State the functions of I/O devices

  • Transfer information into & out of the computer
  • Serves as the interface between the user & the computer
  • Enables the user to communicate with the computer

 

2.Threats to the safety of computer system take many forms such as: white- collar crime,natural disasters, vandalism and carelessness.

Give one way as to how each of these forms of threat can be controlled       ( 2mks)

(i) White- collar crime

  • Use of policies
  • System auditing and use of log files
  • Use of passwords
  • putting in place punitive measures
  • Data encryption
  • Use of firewalls

 

(ii) Natural disasters

  • Use of UPS
  • Use of backups
  • Installation of lightening arrestors
  • Having standby fire fighting equipment
  • Use of fire- proof data saves
  • Contingency plans

 

(iii) Vandalism

  • Tighten security measures, e.g. use of alarm systems, fitting, burglar- proof doors
  • Punitive measures.

 

(iv) Carelessness

  • Better selection of personnel
  • Improve employee training and Education Plus Agencies
  • Limit access to data and computers
  • Regular backups
  • Use of UNDELETE and UNFORMAT utilities

 

  1. (a) Explain the term nibbles as used in data representation in computers ( 1 mk)

A nibble is a group of 4 binary usually representing a numeric number.

 

(b) Perform the following binary arithmetic, giving the answers in decimal notation 

(3 mks)

(i) 1110.0111 + 1101001.11

 

1110.0111

1101001.011 +

1110111.1101

 

(ii). 1001011.011 – 111.111

1001011.011

        111.111 –

1000011.100

 

  1. (a) Distinguish between machine and assembly language ( 2 mks)

Machine language uses machine codes (binary digits) that consist of 0‟s & 1‟s, whereas assembly language makes uses mnemonic codes (symbolic representations of the machine code.

(b) State the type of translator necessary for a program written in:                    ( 2mks)

 

  • High level language

Interpreter or compiler

  • Assembly language

Assembler

  1. Briefly explain the purpose of the following types of program documentation: ( 3mks)
  • User manual

This is a manual provided for an end user to enable him/ her use the program. It is applicable in user- oriented documentation.

 

  • Reference guide

I is used by someone who already knows how to  use the program but needs to be reminded about a particular point or  obtain detailed  information about a particular feature.

 

(c) Quick reference guide

This is a single sheet or card small enough to fit into a pocket, which  the user may keep handy for help with common  tasks  carried out  with as program.

 

  1. State any two features of a user- friendly program ( 2mks)
  • Error reporting and recovery
  • Good screen display
  • Validation of input
  • Comment statements
  • Indentations
  • Self- descriptive variables
  • Menu driven
  • Online help

 

  1. (a) Distinguish between labels and formulae with respect to spreadsheets ( 2 mks) Labels are text consisting of alphanumeric characters, while a formula is a sequence of values, cell references, functions and arithmetic operators whose calculations results to a numeric value.

 

(b) Consider the entries made in the cells below

Cell B2 B3 C10 C11 C13
Entry 200 100 B2 B3 =C10 + C11

 

State the value displayed in cell C13                                                                       (2 mks)

It returns an error message: # VALUE!

 

  1. List three differences between Wide Area Networks (WAN) and local Area Networks

(LAN)                                                                                           ( 3mks)

  • LAN is limited to a small geographical distance
  • Data transmission speed in LANS  is higher
  • Cost of data transmission in LANs is small
  • There are less transmission errors in  LANs

 

  1. Study the flowchart segment below and state the last value printed  from the flowchart

 

 

 

  1. (a) What is an expert system?                                                               ( 1 mk)

An expertsystem is computer software that mimics human expertise in a particular area of specialization

 

(b) State any two components of an expert system                                          (2 mks)

  • Inference mechanism (for making decisions)
  • Knowledge base
  • Explanation facility
  • User interface

 

  1. Give reasons why optical disks are better storage media compared to floppy 

diskettes

  • Have a high storage capacity
  • More secure against alteration, i.e. they require writers to alter their contents
  • More robust, i.e. can resist temperature, electromagnetic fields and not affected by water and dust.
  • Have a relatively high access speed
  • Cheaper per unit of storage. Optical disks can be used for storage of large volumes of data, hence making them economical.
  • Have high data transfer rates

 

 

  1. What are DOS commands used for the following?
    • Changing directories            – CD/CHDIR
    • Viewing directories – DIR/TREE
    • Renaming directories of files – REN/RENAME
    • Deleting a directory – RD/DELTREE
  2. Distinguish between copying and moving text              ( 2 mks)
    • Copying is making a duplicating copy of text, moving  is relocating/ transferring text from one  place in a document to another
    • In copying the original text is left intact, while in moving all the selected text is transferred from its original location to a new location.

 

 

 

  1. (a) Name two methods of paper orientation
    • Portrait
    • Landscape

 

 (b) Name two keys used to delete text in a document                   ( 1mk)

  • Delete
  • Backspace
  1. Name two features of a database package                               ( 2 mks)
    • Database creating facility
    • Table/ filers structures for holding related records
    • Records/ database updating facility
    • Search facility that enables the user to scan through the records in the database so as to find information needed
    • Forms (input screens) for viewing and entering data into a table
    • Sorting facility, which enables the user to organize & arrange the records within the database.
    • Report generating facility
    • Query facility
    • Data validating facility, which ensures that, the correct data is entered into the database
    • Macros which are used to automate frequently performed procedures or tasks

 

 

 

SECTION B (60 MARKS)

Answer question 16 and   any other three questions from this section

 

  1. Study the flowchart  below and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

(a) Write a high level language program for the above flowchart                         ( 7mks)

Program ABC;

Uses WinCRT;

VAR

A, B C COUNT: INTEGER;

BEGIN

A: 0

B=1

REPEAT

Writeln (B)

COUNT: = COUNT + 1;

C: = A+B;

A: = B

B: = C;

 

UNTIL COUNT = 10

 

END

 

OR

Program ABC (input, output);

USES Win CRT;

 

VAR

A, B, C, COUNT: INTEGER;

BEGIN

A: =0;

B: = 1

FOR COUNT: 0 TO 10 DO

Begin

Writeln (B);

C: A + B

A: = B;

B: = C‟

End;

 

END

 

  • List the outputs of the flowchart above (5 mks)

 

1,1,2,3,5,8,13,21,34,55 (any ten integers)

 

  • Modify the flowcharts so that it adds up all its outputs and displays the sum obtained

                             

                             

      (3 mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A computer specification has the following details:

Pentium II

1.44 MB floppy disk drive

20 GB hard disk

Full multimedia

17” SVGA monitor

Pre installed operating system

Pre- installed office suite

 

            (a) What is meant by?

  • 44 MB floppy disk drive?

It has a floppy disk for diskettes of capacity 1.44 megabytes

 

  • 20 GB hard disk?

Refers to the storage capacity of the hard disk in Gigabytes

 

  • 17” SVGA monitors

Refers to the type (colour) and size (17 – inch) of the screen

 

  • Which operating system might be pre- installed in this computer and why? (2 mks)

Any version of windows, Linux, Macintosh, OS/2, UNIX, Solaris, Scounix

Reason- the office suite can only work under windows environment          (3 mks)

 

  • List three Multimedia components
  • Optical drive (CD- ROM or DVD – ROM drive)
  • Speakers (headphones)
  • Media Player software
  • Microphone
  • Sound card/ adapter
  • TV Tuner card – Editing card
  • Digital camera
  • VGA or SVGA graphics card and monitor
  • A RAM of 32 MB or higher
  • (i) What is meant by computer aided manufacture?

CAM is the use of computers in the manufacture of industrial products     (2 mks)

 

            (ii) Give two examples of computer aided design software                        ( 2mks)

  • AutoCAD
  • ArchCAD
  • Draffics
  • 3 Dmacs

 

  1. (a) Give three examples of network software                                           ( 3 mks)
  • UNIX
  • Linux
  • Novell NetWare
  • Microsoft Windows NT
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 – Microsoft Windows 2003

 

(b) List any three items that may be referred to as data terminal equipment in a network

( 3mks)

  • Servers
  • Dummy terminals
  • File servers
  • Printers
  • Modems
  • Terminators

 

(c) Briefly explain the following terms as used in networking                               ( 4mks)

  • Remote communication
    • This is the transfer of data between computers in different locations
    • It is a long- distance  data transfer  without  the use of cables

 

  • Distributed processing

Distributed processing is the sharing of computer processing power

 

(d)      State three advantages and two disadvantages of  mesh  network topology ( 5 mks)

 

Advantages of mesh topology

  • It is fast
  • Failure on one mode will not cause communication breakdown
  • Easy to troubleshoot cable problems. If two machines are not communicating, the administrator will only check the cable between them.
  • Enhances flexibility in communication
  • Enhances fault tolerance provided by redundant/excessive links

 

Disadvantages

  • Difficult and expensive to install and maintain
  • Very costly as it requires large amounts of  cables ( or redundant  links)
  • Difficult to add  more  nodes  when the network  is large
  • Difficult to isolate faults due to lack of a central control point

 

19.(a) A company has decided to computerize their operations. They have decided to purchasepackages instead of developing their own programs. Give three advantages

and two disadvantages of their approach.                                                         ( 5mks)

 

Advantages of packages

  • They are cheaper to purchase as the cost  of developing them is effectively shared  between  the purchases
  • There is saving of the programming effort because; the company buys the software when  ready- made
  • Packages are thoroughly tested
  • Relatively quick results  are obtained

 

Disadvantages of packages

  • The purchaser is not in direct control of the software because he/ she is not involved in developing it.
  • Packages are produced to meet general needs, hence may not deal with the specific user or company needs.
  • Packages cannot be modified (customized) Due to the application of the developer‟s copyright acts.
  • Packages include extra facilities which  may  not be required by an individual user  or company
  • Packages may allow only a clumsy solution to the task  at  hand
  • Some packages have capabilities which will require the user to develop them further.
  • It is easy to forget the commands to use the package, especially if it is not used frequently.

(b) (i) Explain why a value such as 6112334445555 may be displayed as ####### when

typedin a cell on  a spreadsheet                                                                                ( 2 mks)

 

  • How can the problem in (b) (i) above be corrected?

By increasing the column width

 

(c) With reasons, briefly describe the most appropriate type of printer or output device

for the output of:                                                                                                       (6 mks)

  • Customer invoices on multi- part stationery
    • Dot- matrix printer ( or any impact printer)

It produces sharp impact on both original land and the copies

 

  • Letters to customers
    • LaserJet Printer (or any impact printer) it is fast & produces quality printouts

OR

  • Dot- matrix printer – It is cheaper for bulky printing
  • Detailed engineering designs

Plotters

Have appropriate facilities for drawing & graphical output

  1. (a) Distinguish between the following pairs of terms
    • Data verification and data validation

Verification is checking data manually to ensure/ ascertain that it has been transcribed (written out) correctly.

Validation involves subjecting data to checks built in a program to check for its appropriateness or integrity before it is processed.

 

  • Data encryption and passwords

Encryption- mixing up, distorting or changing of data being transmitted over a network to prevent unauthorized disclosure.

A password – a secret code used to prevent unauthorized access of data in a computer

 

(iii) Dry run and walkthrough

Dry run is where the program is tested on paper before it is keyed in

Walkthrough is a style of evaluating a program by a team of professionals which in turn reports to the programming team.

 

  • Draw a labeled diagram to illustrate the internal structure of a diskette. (4 mks)

 

 

  • Give two differences between post Office Mail electronic mail ( E- mail) ( 2 mks)
    • Post office mail is operated manually; Email is computerized
    • Post office mail is slow; email is fast
    • Email has a wide area of coverage
    • Email is more secure

 

(d) Speed and accuracy are some of the advantages of using computers in banking. State threeother advantages of using computers in banking   (3 mks)

  • Makes it easy to access information
  • It is easy to update records
  • requires less space for storage of documents
  • Improved data security & privacy

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

            K.C.S.E SAMPLE PAPER

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education 

451/1 computer studies

Paper 1 (theory)

2 ½ hours

 

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

This paper consists of TWO sections A and B

Answer ALL the questions in section A.

Answer questions 16 and any other THREE questions from section B

 

 

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION  QUESTION SCORE
A 1- 15  
  16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
  TOTAL SCORE  

 

 

 

SECTION A ( 40 marks)

Answer all the questions in this section

 

  1. How is a point of sale terminal used in a business organization? ( 2 mks)
    • It can be used for pricing the different types of commodities
    • It can be used as a bar code reader
    • Fore checking stock levels (stock control)
    • For adding totals of purchase & calculating customers change
    • For receipt production

           

  1. Distinguish between compiler and interpreter (2 mks)
    • A compiler translates the entire program at once as a unit before execution can begin. An Interpreter translates one instruction of the source program at a time. The translated instruction is immediately obeyed before the next instruction can be translated.
    • An interpreter translates the program each time it is needed for execution; compiled programs can be saved on a storage media and run when required.
    • For an Interpreter, syntax errors are reported & corrected before the execution can continue.

For a compiler, syntax errors are reported & corrected after the source code has been translated to its object code equivalent.

 

 

  1. Explain why computers use binary numbers in data representation (2 mks)

Data is stored in computers in binary form. The computer‟s CPU carries arithmetic & logical operations by binary numbers.

This is because; binary numbers has only two digits, 0 & 1, which make it suitable for representing two states of data such as OFF & ON.

 

  1. What is meant by the term dry running as used in program development? (2 mks) A method of checking a program for logical errors by making the corrections on a paper or from the printouts

 

  1. A computer teacher has put a rule that diskettes should not be used in the computer laboratory

 

            (a) Give a reason for the rule

  • To prevent the spread of viruses between the computers
  • To prevent unauthorized copying of programs from or to the computers   –             Students may carry immoral files  using the diskettes

 

            (b) State two alternatives that can be used to achieve the same objective          (2 mks)

  • Using diskless computers
  • Use of antivirus software to detect/ clean viruses before use

 

  1. List three differences between a laser printer and a dot matrix printer (3 mks)
    • Laser printers are faster than dot matrix printers
    • Laser printers are quiet while dot matrices are noisy
    • Laser printers use thermal technology while dot matrix is an impact printer
    • Laser jets use Toner cartridges while dot matrix use ribbons
    • A laser printer is expensive than a dot matrix
    • The print quality of a laser printer is better

 

  1. List four stages involved in the data processing cycle ( 2 mks)
    • Data collection/ preparation
    • Data input
    • Processing
    • Output of information

 

  1. (a) What is a utility software?

This is a program used frequently by the computer to carry out routine jobs

Utility software is used to manage computer files, diagnose and repair computer problems and assist in helping the computer to run more efficiently.

 

            (b) Give four examples of utility software

  • Text editors
  • Sort utility
  • Language translators
  • Merge utility
  • Loader
  • Copy utility
  • Linker
  • Dump utility
  • Diagnostic tools
  • Database management system

 

  1. Distinguish between an intelligent terminal and dump terminal
    • An intelligent terminal is one which is capable of performing some limited amount of processing on data before transmitting what is beyond their processing abilities to the central computer.
    • A dump terminal is one which does not have any of its own processing capabilities/

power. It relies on the processing capabilities of the central computer that serves it.

 

  1. List two duties of the following personnel

            (a) Database administrator

  • Designs & develops database applications for the organization
  • Installs & co- ordinates database systems
  • Updates the database by adding new record, modifying the existing records & deleting the unnecessary records.
  • Responsibilities for the security of data in the database (i.e. designs & sets up security measures needed to control access to the organization‟s data.
  • Ensures the database meets the information needs of the organization
  • Ensures facilities for retrieving data and structuring reports are appropriate to the needs of the organization
  • Responsible for documenting the manuals for users

 

            (b) Data processing manager

  • Ensures that the organizational information needs are met
  • In charge of the overall running of the data processing departments, e.g. he is in charge of purchasing the required equipment

 

  1. Differentiate between source program and object program
    • Source program is the program as written by the programmer using an editor program either in high level or assembly language.
    • Object program is the program in machine code (or binary form) produced by a compiler or assembler after translating the source program, and can be readily and can be readily loaded into the computer.

 

  1. (a) In DOS, what are the following commands used for?

(i)        RD       – Remove directory- means deleting a directory from the tree            (ii)       DEL    – deletes all files in a particular directory

           

(b) What happens when the following commands are typed in the DOS environment?

  • CD Changes the directory one level up the directory tree
  • Dir It lists all the contents of the current directory

 

  1. A student presented a budget in the form of a worksheet as follows
  A B C
1 Item Amount  
2 Fare 200  
3 Stationery 50  
4 Bread 300  
5 Miscellaneous 150  
6 Total    

The student intends to have spent half the amount by mid- term

  • Given that the value 0.5 is typed in cell B9, write the shortest formula that would be typed in cell C2 and then copied down the column to obtain half the values in column B.(1 mks)

 

= B2*$B9

 

  • Write two different formulae that can be typed to obtain the total in cell B6 and then copied tocell C6.

= SUM (B2: B5)                                                                                             (2 mks)

OR

= B2 + B3 + B4 + B5

 

 

  1. State three operations that can be performed on a relational database files (3 mks)
    • Indexing
    • Sorting
    • Filtering
    • Querying
    • Updating of records
    • Report generation

 

  1. List three parts that constitute an array definition statement ( 3 mks)
    • Array name
    • Range, which contains the initial value & the final value
    • Data type

E.g. Score: Array [1….50] of integer

 

SECTION B (60 marks)

Answer question 16 and any other three questions from this section

 

  1. Bidii wholesalers  has two categories of customers for  order processing, category „A‟ obtains 10% discount on all orders up to Kshs 10,000 otherwise the discount is 20%  on

the entire  order. Category “B‟ obtains 30% discount on all orders if the debt repayment is „good‟ otherwise the discount is 15%. Draw a flowchart for the order processing. (15 mks)

  1. (a) List three application areas of artificial intelligence                           ( 3 mks)
    • Expert systems, e.g. medical diagnosis, engine repair, legal defense etc
    • Natural language processing
    • Artificial neutral networks e.g. investment analysis, signature Analysis, etc
    • Robotic/ perception systems

 

(b)       With the improvement in price and performance of computers and communication equipment it will be possible for people in various business organizations to work from home. Such working using a PC as a remote terminal is often described as teleworking. State three advantages and three disadvantages of working from home.

                                                                                                                                    ( 12mks)

Advantages

  • Reduces unnecessary travel to the place of work
  • Reduces traveling expense (i.e. saves traveling time, risk and cost)
  • There is less stress due to commuting inconveniences such as traffic jams
  • Reduces office space, equipment and cost
  • Extends working hours
  • Suitable for people with disabilities, because they are able to overcome the barrier of not being able to commute  to an office
  • People can live where they choose without the worry of having to move towns and break up social & family networks in order to find suitable employment.

 

 

 

Disadvantages

  • Lack/ unavailability of appropriate facilities to allow the work to be done
  • There is poor security on home offices
  • Privacy threats
  • Lack of control and supervision. The workers have to be able to motive themselves to work without supervision
  • There is possible delegation of duties to unauthorized persons
  • Isolated employees may be exploited in an environment where they can‟ t easily get support from co- workers

 

  1. (a) Explain three ways by which computer users can protect their eyes from harmful

emissions from the computer screen                                                ( 6 mks)

  • Using antiglare (radiation filter) screens that are specially tinted to reduce the radiation from the monitor or light that reaches the eye.
  • Controlling light intensity by adjusting the brightness buttons on the screen
  • Tilting the monitors so as not to face the user directly
  • Wearing special spectacles when using computers in order to control the light intensity.
  • Avoid using flickering monitors as they can cause extreme eye strain that can damage eyesight.
  • Very bright wall paints reflect too much light into the user‟s eyes. – Taking frequent rests

 

(b)  List three factors to be considered when deciding on the choice of an electronic data processing method

  • Type and size of business
  • Timing aspects of the information produces
  • Link between applications
  • Volume of data records held in the organization
  • Cost pf acquiring the relevant hardware, software, storage media, etc the cost of maintenance
  • Operation speed
  • Quality of output required

 

(c)       Explain time sharing data processing mode, giving two advantages and two

disadvantages                                                            (6 mks)

Time sharing is a processing mode where a central processor services 2 or more users who have different requirements.

 

Advantages of time sharing

  • Reduces processor idle time. This is because the processor doesn‟t have to wait for the

slower commutating peripherals

  • Helpful to small companies which cannot afford purchasing a computer & the related facilities. The company can be served at a fee through time- sharing processing mode.
  • Provides better services to the user since the output is fast
  • Files are held online, hence enquiries or file interrogation is possible
  • There is user – computer dialogue established through the terminals connected to the host/ central computer
  • Avoids duplicating of software
  • The user of the system can benefit from the computer facilities through remote terminals

 

Disadvantages of time- sharing

  • Te user has no control over the central computer
  • Response time is high  when the users are many
  • Not reliable as regards to the security & privacy of data

 

  1. A school bought a computer system. The hardware items supplied include: a 800 MHz processor, 64 MB of RAM, a sound card, speakers, a monitor, a keyboard, a 120 GB hard disk, a floppy disk drive, a CD – Read/ write drive, a mouse, a modem, an inkjet printer and a joystick.

The software supplied include: an operating  system, a BASIC interpreter  and the following  packages: spreadsheets, graphics, word  processor, art, database  and games

 

(a)      List three input devices from the given specifications

  • Keyboard
  • Mouse
  • Joystick

 

(b) Explain the meaning of the following

(i)        800 MHZ

  • 800 megahertz/ 800 million hertz
  • It‟s the processing speed of the CPU in Megahertz
  • It means that, the system cock has a speed of 800 million oscillations per second

( 2mks)

  • 64 MB of RAM

This is a measure of the storage capacity of the primary memory/ Random access  Memory (RAM) in megabytes

 

  • 120 GB hard disk

 

  • This is the measure of the hard disk storage capacity  in gigabytes
  • 120 Gigabytes

 

(c)       Some of the students in the school use the computer to do homework. Name thepackage used to:

  • Do calculations and draw graphs                             (1 mk)

Spreadsheets

 

  • Write an essay

Word processor

 

  • Make a poster

Art

(d)      Students enjoy  playing noisy computer games

(i) Which two hardware items are needed to produce sound? (2 mks)

  • Sound card
  • Speakers

                        (ii) Which input device is only used for playing games?

Joystick                                                                                   (1 mk)

 

  1. A school organizes its work in directories. The director WP contains the files CATS, EXAMS and ASSIGNMENTS. The directory of SP contain the spreadsheet files.  The directory DB contains the database files. The directory PROG is contained in the OTHERS directory. The directory WP also contains the PERSONAL directory. Given that the directory STUDENT contains directories SP, DB, WP and OTHERS

 

  • Draw the directory tree structure with C as the root        (7 mks)

 

 

 

  • Write the path at which the contents of subdirectory DB can be erased or displayed

                                                                                                                                    (2 mks)

C: STUDENT\DB>

 

  • Write the path for the directory  PROG                                        ( 2 mks)

C:\STUDENT\OTHERS\PROG>

 

  • Give two reasons for storing files in directories and subdirectories (2 mks)
  • Management of the files will be easier
  • Retrieving of certain files will be easier
  • To avoid accidental deletion/ erasure of files when the files in C are being deleted.

 

  • Give two disadvantages of using command driven interfaces as compared to menu

driven  interfaces                                                       ( 2 mks)

  • The user must know the command to type
  • It is less user- friendly i.e. it is not easy to use
  • The user is required to master the format/ syntax of all commands and their usage

perfectly.

  • Writing commands is time consuming

 

 

K.C.S.E SAMPLE PAPER

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education Plus Agencies 451/1 computer studies

Paper 1 (theory)

2 ½ hours

 

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

This paper consists of TWO sections A and B

Answer ALL the questions in section A.

Answer questions 16 and any other THREE questions from section B

 

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION  QUESTION SCORE
A 1- 15  
  16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
  TOTAL SCORE  

 

 

SECTION A (40 Marks)

Answer all the questions in this section

  1. (a) What is disk formatting
    • Process of preparing a new disk for use by imprinting empty tracks & sectors on the surface  of the disk  that can  be recognized and access by a particular operating system
    • The preparation/ initialization of a disk for storage of data

(b) Indicate whether the following devices are used for input or output

                                                                                                            ( 2mks)

  • Plotter –           Output
  • Light pen             –           Input
  • mouse – Input
  • Visual display unit- Input/ output

 

  1. (a) Explain why the following controls should be implemented for computer based

systems                                                                                               ( 2 mks)

  • Back- ups – Backups can be used to recover/ restore/ prevent lost data
  • Password- Passwords control access to computer systems/ facilities

 

(b) For each of the following give one reason why they are not allowed in a computer

laboratory                                                                                          ( 2 mks)

 

(i) Smoking

  • Smoke particles settle on storage devices and  may scratch them  during read/ write operation
  • It can cause fire
  • It deposits ash on devices causing malfunction
  • It affects the health of other users

 

(ii) Eating foods

Food particles may fall into the moving parts of the computer and damage them

 

  1. Distinguish between real, integer and character data types as used in programming:

            Real:

  • Used for numeric values that may contain fractions/ decimals
  • Has a higher range than integer

 

Integer

  • Used for whole numbers
  • Has a lower range than real

 

Characters

  • Used for alphanumeric/ control/ signal/ graphical character –       Character uses fewer bits than a real or integer

 

  1. The cells K3 to K10 of a worksheet contain remarks on students ‟ performance such as very good, good, fair and fail depending on the average mark. Write a formula that can be used to count ALL students who have the remark “very good”. (3 mks)

=COUNTIF (K3:K10,‟‟Verry Good‟‟)

 

  1. (a) State the purpose of registers in a computer system  ( 1 mks)

They act as high speed storage locations. They are used to hold data and instructions temporarily just before and after processing.

 

(b)      Name two multiprogramming operating systems

  • Linux
  • Microsoft windows 98
  • UNIX
  • Microsoft windows 2000
  • OS/2
  • Microsoft Windows Me
  • Novell Netware
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • Macintosh OS
  1. (a) A serial file comprises of records placed in positions 1 to 10. State the position of the

end ofthe file market.                                                ( 1mk)

The end- of – file marker is the position immediately after the last record, i.e.  position 11

 

            (b) State the purpose of each of the following:

            (i) File server software

  • Controls access to avail files stored on a networked/ shared storage location
  • Services client requests for files

            (ii) Communication software

  • Used for receiving/ sending messages or data in a network
  • Used for routing traffic
  • Used for assigning identities to nodes

 

  1. (a) Name the control structure depicted by the flowchart below ( 1 mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Selection control structure e.g., If-then-else

 

 

 

(b) Explain the following terms as used in program implementation  ( 2 mks) (i) parallel running

This is where both the existing and the new systems are run concurrently/simultaneously (at the same time) for a period of time until users have gained confidence in the new system.  Data is processed on both systems in order to compare their performance, and also cross check the results.

 

  1. ii) Direct change over

This is a complete replacement of the existing system with the new system in one bold move.  The existing system is stopped & abandoned and the new system starts operating immediately.

 

  1. Consider the linear arrays:
  2. i) AA (5: 50)             ii)             BBB (-5:50)  iii)             CCC (18)

 

Find the number of elements in each array.                                                (3mks)

AAA (5:50)   = 50- 5 +1 =46
BBB (-5: 50) = 10 – (-5) +1 =16
CCC (18)          = 18 – 1 +1 =18/cannot be determined

 

  1. Define the term artificial intelligence. (2mks)

Artificial intelligence is the development of machines that imitate/copy human-like qualities in particular areas, e.g. learning, reasoning, communicating, seeing, hearing and self-correction

These are programs that make computers to mimic human intelligence

A study in which computer systems are made to think/act/imitate human beings

 

  1. Name two types of relationships that can be applied in database design. (2mks)
    • One to one
    • One to many/ Many to One
    • Many to Many
  2. Explain the following terms as used in word processing:   (3 mks)
    1. Indenting

It is moving of line/paragraph text away from the left or right margin

Leaving a space at the beginning of a line/paragraph of text from the margin

  1. Alignment

Refers to how text is positioned/lined up in a paragraph relative to the left, right or  centre of the page.

  1. Word wrap

A facility that word processor use to automatically move the text cursor to the beginning of the next line when it reaches the right margin automatic rolling of text to the next line when you reach the end of the line.

  1. Outline two ways in which computers can be used in hotels. (2mks)
    • Reservation/booking of rooms
    • Record keeping on sales and purchases (stock control)
    • Producing bills& payrolls
    • Marketing and advertising
    • Communication
    • Security
  2. a) Explain binary coded decimal code of data representation. (1mk)

This is a data encoding system that uses 4 binary digits to represent an individual decimal digit.

 

  1. b) Write the number 45110 in BCD notation               (1mk)
Number 4 5 1
BCD equivalent 0100 0101 0001

 

45110  = 010001010001BCD

 

  1. Arrange the following data units in ascending order of size.

BYTE, FILE, BIT, NIBBLE                                                  (2mks)

 

Bit       Nibble             Byte                File

 

 

  1. State two health issues that may result from prolonged use of computers. (2mks)
    • Harmful radiations that cause damage to eyesight/eye problems
    • eyestrain/eye fatigue
    • Headaches
    • Repetitive Strain Injury (RSI) i.e. arm strain, wrist strain
    • finger deformation
    • Back strain.

 

 

 

SECTION B (60 MKS)

 

ANSWER QUESTION 16 AND ANY OTHER THREE QUESTIONS FROM THIS SECTION

 

  1. a) State the stage of program development in which:                         (2mks)
    1. A flowchart would be drawn

Program design

 

  1. The programmer would check whether the program does as required program

Testing

  • The user guide would be written

Program testing

 

  • The user guide would be written

Program documentation

           

  1. The requirements specification would be written.

Problem definition/analysis

 

           

 

  1. State the output of the following flowchart segment

 

 

 

A= 30, B= 30        (2mks)

 

           

 

 

 

  1. i) Draw a flowchart to compute the combined resistance (R) of two 

resistors R+1 and Ra=2 in parallel using the formula;        (51/2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) WRITE A PROGRAM USING Pascal or c languages for the flowchart in c(i) above.

(5mks)

PROGRAM resistors (Input, Output );

VAR

R, R1, R2: Real;                     1

 

Begin

Writeln („Input R1 and R2‟); Readln (R1, R2)   1

 

R: = 1/ (1/R+ 1/R2); 3 (reciprocals-1mk, sum/reci – 1mk, result r- 1mk)

Writeln( R);     ½

 

END

  1. a) List paragraph formatting activities in word processing.  (3mks)

 

  • Changing case           –           Borders
  • Background –           Drop caps
  • Bullets and numbering – alignment
  • Paragraph Spacing –           Indentation
  • Tabs –           columns

 

  1. b) Differentiate between bolding and highlighting text.                      (2mks)

 

            Highlighting:

  • Selecting or marking a given of text e.g., a word, sentence or paragraph, in order to work with it
  • Highlighting is temporary.

 

Bolding:

  • making the selected text appear darker then the rest of the text – To add emphasis to the text by thickening/darkening the characters
  • Bolding is permanents.

 

  1. c) The following information shows the income and expenditure for “behayote” matatu  for five days.  The income from Monday to Friday was Ksh. 4,000, 9,000, 10,000, 15,000, and 12,000 respectively while the expenditure for the same period was Kshs. 2,000, e, 000, 7,000, 5,000, and 6,000 respectively.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Draw a spreadsheet that would contain the information. Indicate the rows as 1, 2,

3…..And the columns as a, B, C….                                                  (4mks)

 

 

 

  A B C
1    BEBA YO TE MATATU  
2 Day Income

(Ksh)

Expenditure

(Ksh)

3 Monday 4,000 2,000
4 Tuesday 9,000 3,000
5 Wednesday 10,000 7,000
6 Thursday 15,000 5,000
7 Friday 12,000 6,000

 

3 columns with titles @ 1 mark each = 3 marks

Labeling rows/columns                      1 mark

 

  1. State the expression that would be used to obtain:
    • Monday‟s profit (2mks)

= B3-C3

  • Total income

= SUM(B3:B7) -OR-   =B3 + B4 + B5 + B6 + B7

  • Highest expenditure.

= MAX(C3:C7)

  1. (a) Subtract Oil 12 from 10012

1001

0111

0010                                        =00102                     =102  

(b)       Using two’s complement, subtract 7 from 4 and give the answer in decimal

notation.                                                                                                         (4 marks)

Step 1: Write it as 4 + (-7)

Step 2: Change the values to 8 binary digits.

 

2 4 Rem
2 2 0
  1 0
  1 1
     
2 7 Rem
2 3 1
  1 1
  1 1

=000001002

 

 

 

=0000011

 

Step 3: Get the Ones complement of the second value.

=111110002

Step 4: Add 1 to the One’s complement to get Two’s complement.

=11111000

              1 +

11111001

 

Step 5: Add the binary equivalent of the first value to the Two’s complement of the second value. 00000100

11111001 +

11111101                                = 111111012

 

(c)       Convert: 91Bi6 to octal                                                         (3 marks)

Step 1: Convert 91B16 to decimal

162

 

16′

 

16°

 

9

 

1

 

B

 

9xl62 +1×16’+ 11×16° 2304+16 + 11 =233110

Step 2: Convert 233110 to octal

8

 

2331

 

Rem

 

8

 

291 3

 

8

 

36

 

3

 

8

 

4

 

4

 

 

 

4

 

4

 

 

  • 3768to hexadecimal

Step 1: Convert 3768 to decimal

 

82 81 80
3 7 6

 

3×82 + 7×81 + 6×80

192+56+6= 25410

 

 

 

16

 

254

 

Rem

 

16

 

15

 

14

 

 

 

15

 

15

 

Step 2: Convert 25410 to hexadecimal

3768=FE16

 

  • 62510to binary (4 marks)

 

2 9 Rem
2 4 1
2 2 0
  1 0
  1 1

0.625×2-1.25   1

0.250×2 = 0.50  0

0.50×2 =1.00  1

 

0.62510-1012

 

9.62510= 1001.1012

 

  1. (a) Explain what the following DOS commands will do when executed.
  • A:\>copy *.* B: (2 marks)

Copy all the files from drive A: to drive B:

  • C:\>ERASE *.DOC (2 marks)

Delete all files with extension .DOC from drive C:

  • B:\>DIR P*.BAT (2 marks)

Display all the files beginning with P and have extension of .BAT in drive B:

  • A:\>MD EXAMS (2 marks)

Creates a directory called EXAMS in drive A:

(b)       (i)        With the aid of a diagram, explain hierarchical (tree) network topology.

(3

marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • It is connected in such a way that nodes are in different levels of control such that higher nodes control those below them.
  • A child node has only one parent but a parent node can have more than one child.
  • The child nodes can only be accessed through the parents.

(ii)       List two advantages and two disadvantages of hierarchical network 

topology.                                                                                             (4 marks)

Advantages

  • Provides centralized control.
  • Enhances data security & privacy.
  • Easy to isolate faults.
  • Easy to add and remove nodes.
  • If a non-critical node fails, partial communication is still possible.

Disadvantages

  • Slow data movement along the branches.
  • If the parent node fails, the child nodes are inaccessible.
  • Difficult/sophisticated to implement in a wide area network.
  1. (a) Name and explain the function of the keyboard keys represented by the following 

symbols.

 

 

Tab key:                                                         (2 marks)

 

 

  • Used in Word processors to move certain text or the cursor at set intervals on the
  • Same line to the required position on the screen.
  • Used to move from one cell to another. Used to move the cursor between options. ,
  • Used to indent text.

 

Enter key:                                                                                                      (2 marks)

 

  • It is used as a RETURN key. When pressed at the end of a text line or paragraph in a word processor, it forces the text cursor to move to the next line or paragraph.
  • It is used to issue completion commands to the computer. It is used to instruct the computer to carry out (execute) a command that has been typed or selected on the screen.

 

Shift key:                                                                                                       (2 marks)

 

  • It can be used for changing cases, e.g., to get single capital letters.
  • It is used to get the punctuation marks on top of the Number keys or the symbols

on top of certain keys .especially on the alphanumeric section.

  • Used for shortcuts in combination with other keys, e.g., SHIFT + DEL

 

(b)       Simulation is one of the application areas of computers, 

(i)     What is meant by the term simulation?                                               (1 mark)

Simulation is the designing of models of either an actual or theoretical physical item, and analyzing/testing the execution output using a computer. (ii)    Name two application areas of simulation. (2 marks)

  • In training of pilots, using flight simulators.
  • In medicine to train doctors on operation techniques.
  • In engineering, e.g.
  • Architectural design (of buildings)
  • Design of electronic circuits, ships, roads and cars.
  • Design of bridges.
  • Aeronautical engineering (i.e., design of aircrafts)
  • To simulate the timing of traffic lights.
  • To simulate the timing of a nuclear attack for testing national defences.
  • Aviation training.
  • Laboratory experiments
  • Missile launch.
  • Space exploration.
  • Vehicle accidents.
  • Entertainment, e.g., games.

(iii)   State three advantages of computer based simulation. (3 marks)

  • Saves cost – it is an economical/cheap way of testing models before actually building them.
  • It enables the manufacturers identify weaknesses of the real situation or object, hence;
  • put the correct reinforcements to their designs
  • Reduces risks – it allows some activities that would otherwise be expensive & dangerous in real-life situation to be put under test.
  • .

(c)    Explain three ways in which computers have impacted on education.

  • Standardizing learning.
  • Has ensured quality output.
  • Brought the need for retraining staff. – Enabled distance learning,
  • Created jobs, e.g., computer trainers.
  • Causes job displacement and replacement.

(3 marks)

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Latest KCSE Exam Papers with Answers

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga AGRICULTURE F1T2  MS 

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga AGRICULTURE F1T2  QS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Agriculture PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Agriculture PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Agriculture PP2 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Agriculture PP2

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Biology confidential

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga BIOLOGY F1T2  MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Biology PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Biology PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Biology PP2 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Biology PP3 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Biology PP3

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Business Studies PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Business Studies PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Business Studies PP2 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Business Studies PP2

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga C.R.E. PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga C.R.E. PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga C.R.E. PP2 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Chemistry Confidential

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Chemistry PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Chemistry PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Chemistry PP2 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Chemistry PP2

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Chemistry PP3 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Chemistry PP3

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga English PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga English PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga English PP2 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga English PP2

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga English PP3 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga English PP3

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Geography PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Geography PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Geography PP2 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Geography PP2

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga History PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga History PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga History PP2

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Kiswahili PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Kiswahili PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Kiswahili PP2 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Kiswahili PP3 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Kiswahili PP3

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Mathematics PP 2 MSS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Mathematics PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Mathematics PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Physics Confidential

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Physics PP1 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Physics PP1

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Physics PP2

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Physics pp3 MS

Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Physics PP3

  Bunyore Girls & FS Kamusinga Mock Exams

Word Processing Free Computer Studies Notes

WORD PROCESSING.

 

Word processing is the art of text manipulation.  It involves creating & producing professional looking documents such as letters, memos, reports, etc.

 

Definition of a Word Processor.

 

 

  • A Word Processor is a computer program that enables a person to create, save, retrieve, edit, format, and print text based documents.

 

Initially, the term Word processor was used to refer a computer system with a special piece of software used for the production of documents.

 

Purpose of Word Processing.

 

A Word processor is a tool that can be used to prepare & produce documents.  It can be used in:

 

  • Writing Letters (i.e., Business & general mail).
  • Writing Memos.
  • Writing Books.
  • Writing Articles, Research letters such as Reports/thesis and Term papers.
  • Writing Essays and Projects.
  • Writing Curriculum vitae and Resumes.
  • Writing weekly Newsletters on sports, entertainment, etc.
  • Writing Lease agreements and other legal documents.

 

Common Features (Characteristics) of a Word processor.

 

A Word processor performs the same function as a typewriter, but offers very many useful features / facilities, which can be used to make your work more efficient and attractive.

 

A Word processor can be used to produce quality-finished documents of high standards compared to a typewriter.

 

The following are some of the facilities provided by all Word processors:

 

  • They allow the user to create a file, save it, and retrieve (recover/open) it when required for reuse, printing, editing or formatting.
  • Has Text- editing features, such as: –
  • Copy & Paste, which allows a marked block of text to be moved to another part of the document.

 

  • Find, which allows the user to search for words or phrases within the document.

 

  • Search & Replace, which allows replacement of every occurrence of a certain combination of characters with another set of characters.

 

  • Undo, which allows actions that have been performed to be reversed, such that if some text was accidentally deleted, then the action can be undone.

 

  • Contains Text and Page formatting features such as: –
  • Justification of text, which could be Left, Right, Centre, or Full.
  • Indents and use of Tabs for text alignment.
  • Page Numbering.
  • Insert of page Headers and Footers.

 

 

  • Has different Fonts (lettering/typescripts), Character sizes & Styles such as Bold, Italic, Underline, etc.
  • Enables Printing of documents: single or multiple copies, full or part of a document.

 

  • Enables creation of Tables, which can be used to perform certain calculations & sorting on a given text.

 

  • Has an inbuilt dictionary.
  • Contains Tools such as Spelling and grammar checkers, Bookmarks & Thesaurus (which provides alternative words – synonyms).

 

  • Typing errors can be corrected and the text modified before printing the final version.

 

  • Enables the use of document templates, which can be used to quickly create the most frequently used documents once the format has been set.

 

  • Allows Mail merging, which makes it possible to combine several letters.

 

This is very useful when similar letters has to be sent to several people.  The names and addresses of each person can be merged with one single standard document and printed out.

 

  • Enables creation of Newspaper layouts, which can be used for manipulation of Column text.

 

  • Has the ability to add graphics within documents.

 

  • Allows creation of Footnotes and Endnotes.

 

  • Provides file protection using Passwords.

 

  • Contain Macros, which can be used to automate the most frequent & repetitive tasks.
  • Have the ability to create and import tables, text and graphics from other programs.

 

  • All Word processors have similar document windows with the following features:

 

  • They are designed to look like a piece of paper with a few electronic improvements.
  • The screen is blank before typing of text.
  • There is a Cursor, which blinks at the position where you can begin entering text.
  • There is a Status bar that provides the user with information about current status such as saving operation, the name of the file in use, the current page, and column cursor position.
  • Word wrap: A facility/feature that automatically moves a word or cursor to the beginning of the next line if there is insufficient room at the end of the current line.
  • Scrolling: This is the vertical movement of text document on the screen, either using the Up or Down arrow keys, Page Up or Page Down keys, or using the Mouse in Windows based word processors.
  • Help: Contains instructions, tips, pointers, explanations and guidance on how to use an application.
  • Editing modes: Word processors have two editing modes; Insert mode and Type over mode.

 

In Insert mode, every character typed between words, lines or characters is placed at the cursor position.  This pushes all the text in front of the cursor away without deleting it.

 

In Type over mode, every character typed deletes what was there before and replaces it with new text at the cursor position.

 

Common examples of Word processors: –

 

* Microsoft Word.                              * WordStar.

* Corel WordPerfect.                         * Wang writer.

* Lotus WordPro.                               * WordWrite.

 

Advantages of Word processors.

 

Word processors have almost replaced typewriters and other writing tools as the means of creating documents.  This is because; a word processor has a number of advantages that include:

 

  • A document can be stored in the computer for future reference in computer files. The files do not occupy physical space like the one on paper; hence, this creates a paperless document processing environment.
  • Typing using a word processor is easier & more efficient because some actions are automated.

 

Examples;

 

  • Word wrap feature automatically takes the cursor to the beginning of the next line once you reach the end of the current line.
  • Automatic insertion of a new page after reaching the end of the current page.
  • Most word processors have special editing tools such as Spelling and grammar checkers that help the user to easily correct grammar and spelling mistakes. Thesaurus helps to find a word with similar meanings.
  • Most word processors have Insert and Type over Therefore, one can easily insert or replace a word or a phrase without affecting the structure and neatness of the document.
  • Word processors have superior document formatting features such as underlining, boldfacing, italicization, applying different colours, etc.

 

Formatting refers to the art of making the document more attractive and appealing to the eye.

 

  • A Word processor enables one to produce many copies of a document through printing; whereas, a typewriter may require retying of the entire document when we want many copies.
  • Word processor has Cut, Copy and Paste commands that enable the user to incorporate other text without having to retype it.
  • Provides secrecy in writing documents through Passwords.
  • Allow simple arithmetic operations such as additions, multiplications, etc.
  • Allows Mail merging (combining of several documents).

 

Disadvantages of Word processors.

 

  • They are Expensive.
  • The use of Word processors creates unemployment.
  • The use of the Word processors is limited only to those areas with power supply.
  • There is need of a literate person to operate it.

 

Factors to consider when choosing a Word processor.

 

The choice of a word processor depend on:

 

  1. The type of operating system.

E.g., most microcomputers are currently running on Windows based operating systems.  This means that you should consider acquiring a Word processor based on graphical user interface.

  1. Its user-friendliness (ease to use).
  2. Its formatting and editing features. They should be good and in variety.

 

Review Questions 1.1

 

  1. (a). What is Word processing?

(b). Give THREE examples of Word processors used at present.

  1. State the purpose of word processing.
  2. Identify any FOUR advantages and TWO disadvantages of using a Word processor to prepare documents compared to manual Typewriter.
  3. (a). What is document formatting?

(b). List TWO editing features and THREE formatting features of a good Word processor.

  1. Explain the difference between Type over and Insert mode in word processing.
  2. What is word wrap?

 

Review Questions 1.2

 

 

  1. (a). What is a Word Processor?

(b). Name two common Word processors used in the market today.

(c). Name any THREE advantages of a Word processor.

  1. Briefly describe FIVE features of Word processors.
  2. What constraints do early Word processors have?

 

Review Questions 1.3

 

 

  1. Name any THREE characteristics of a Word processor.

SOCIAL STUDIES GRADE 1 NOTES- NEW CBC

TERM ONE

OUR HOME

A _________is a place where a family lives (tree, home)
One or many _________will make a home (houses, people)
Our home and what is around us make up our _________ (compound, house)
Every home must have a ________ (car, house)
Our home is in ________ estate
Types of houses
A hut is a _________ house (traditional, modern)
A hut has ___________doors (one, two)
Many huts together make a ___________ (homestead)
A place where we store grains is called a __________ (granary, hut)
A__________ is house for the ____________ and ___________ (manyatta, bus, Luo, Maasai, Samburu)
A manyatta is a _______ house (traditional, bad)
__________are many houses in one tall building (flats, stairs)
Flats are mainly found in ________ (towns, villages)
A flat is a _______ house (traditional, modern)
A block of flats is also called_________ (apartment, semi – apartment)
This houses stay for a _________time (short, long)
A camp has many _______ together (tents, huts)
Semi-permanent houses include

GRADE ONE ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES
____
____
 Makuti houses
 Mabati houses
 Timber houses
 Small huts
Permanent houses
This houses stay for a _________ time (long, short)
It is a _________house (modern, traditional)
Permanent house include
Bungalow
Storied houses
Materials used in building
The roof of a hut is made of ___________
The wall of a hut is made of ___________
The floor of s hut is made of ___________
A manyatta is made of ___________and ____________
_________ are used to make a granary
A mabati house is made of ___________
Another name for mabati is ___________
A timber house is made of __________
The roof of a permanent house is made of ___________
The walls of a permanent house is made of ___________
Parts of a house
A house has different parts called __________ (rooms, toilet)
Name the rooms found in your home
 Bedroom

____
 Kitchen
 Bedroom
 Bathroom
 Store
 Toilet
The sitting room is also called____________
The _______is also called the washing area
A kitchen is also called the _________area
The bedroom is also called the _______area
Uses of different parts of the house
We ____________and rest in the sitting room
When it is time to sleep we go to ___________ (bedroom, store)
When it is time to eat we go to __________ (dining, store)
Food is cooked in the _____ (kitchen, store)
Farm tools are kept in the __________ (toilet, stores)
Tissue paper is found in the ________ (toilet, store)
People sleep in the ________
We wash our bodies in the ________
Importance of houses
Houses protect us from hot sun, heavy clouds and strong winds
Our house keeps us safe from dangerous _________________ (people, trees)
__________are bad people who steal from our houses (thieves, teachers)
A _______person is a person I do not know (mother, stranger)
Birds stay in a _________ (nest, house)

____
A dog lives in a _________ (kennel, nest)

SAFETY IN THE HOME

Things found in the home
Some things are found inside the house and others outside the house
Name of some things found in the house
 Lamp
 Broom
 Chair
 Jiko
 Basin
 Utensils
 Beds
 Cupboards
Some animals kept at home
 Dog
 Cat
 Chicken
 Pig
 Donkey
 Sheep
 Camel
Uses of things found in the home
A panga is used for ___________
We use a lamp to ____________ (light) up a house
A __________is used to collect rubbish in the compound (jembe, rake)
Peter wants to cut grass; he will use a ______________ (panga, slasher)
We use a ________ to sweep

____
We listen to news from the _________
People use _______________to split firewood
Uses of some animals found at home
Donkeys and camels help us to carry ____________ things (heavy bad)
Name 3 animals that give us milk
_____________
_____________
______________
Sheep, rabbits and pigs give us___________ (meat, wool)
Match the animals and the meat
Cow mutton
Goat pork
Hen beef
Sheep goat meat
Pig chicken
A sheep give us_______and________
Dangerous objects at home
Some objects are dangerous they can ____________ us (hurt, love)
Do not play with ___________ (toys, fire)
Fire can ___________us or even our houses (burn, wash)
A hot jiko can __________us (burn,)
A dog can _________us and a cat can ___________us (scratch, bite)
Putting things like sticks into electrical sockets can cause_________ (shock, play)

____
Playing with matchsticks can cause __________ (fire, rain)
Medicine should be kept away from ___________ (children, teachers)
Broken bottles can __________us (hurt)
Name four sharp objects
______________
________________
________________
_____________
Keeping our homes clean
We sweep the floor to remove __________ (dirt, soap)
We clean utensils to keep away_________and _____________ (rats, dogs, cockroaches)
We should cut long _________around our home (grass, tree)
_________and__________ are some animals that can hide in long grass
We remove cobwebs to keep away __________ (spiders, cows)
Tools are kept safely in the ___________ (kitchen, store)
We should sleep under the _________ (bed, mosquito net)
A fence keeps away_________ from entering the home (friends, strangers)
Dirty toilets have ________ (flies, flowers)
A _________takes care of our home at night (teacher, watchman)

OUR FAMILY

____
MEANING OF A FAMILY

A group of people who are related is called ____________ (group, family)
A family has __________and _________
Father and mother are my _______________ (parents, enemies)
Father is a __________parent (male, female)
A ________ is a female parent (mother, father)
A male child is a _______ and a female child is a _____________
In a family we ________one another (love, hate)
Types of families
Nuclear family
It is made up of father, mother and children
__________is the head of the family (father, mother)
A nuclear family has _________parents (one, two)
A single parent family
It has __________parents (one, two)
It is made up of ___________and _____________
Father and _______make up a single family
An extended family
______are members of an extended family

____
My grandparents call me __________ (grandchild, sister)
Uncle, aunts, cousins are my _________ (relatives, friends)
A boy will be called ___by his grandparents (granddaughter, grandson)
How family members are related
My parents calls me a ________ or a ________ (son, daughter)
My mother’s sister is my ____________
My father’s mother is my __________
My brothers and sisters child is my ____________
The child of my aunt is my_________________ (uncle, aunt)
My father’s brother is my _________ (uncle, aunt)
Work done by family members
___cooks for us at home (mother, aunt)
Our ________pay our school fees
Her work is to tell us stories, she is my _____________
Children should help their parents by
___________
____________
______________
When work is shared it becomes _________________ (easier, good)
Sharing work makes us __________ (happy, sad)
Family celebrations
A celebration is a _________ (parade, ceremony)
Name three family celebrations

____
_______________
_______________
_______________
The day I was born is my _________
In a birthday party people are __________
We celebrate the birth of a child by giving___________ (gifts, stones)
When two people get __________there is a wedding ceremony (money, married)
Wedding celebrations are _________ ceremonies (sad, happy)
When someone dies we go for _________ (wedding, funeral)
A funeral is a ________ceremony (happy, sad)
Religious celebrations
Muslims worship in a ________
Hindus celebrate __________
Christians worship in a ___________
Iddul –fitr is celebrated by __________
Hindus worship in a _________
Christmas is celebrated by ___________
National celebrations
Match the celebrations
Celebration date
New year 1st may
Labour Day 20th October
Madaraka day 25th December
Jamhuri day 26th December

____
Mashujaa day 1st June
Christmas day 12th December
Boxing Day 1st January

TERM 2

OUR FAMILY NEEDS AND CHILD RIGHTS

FOOD
Food gives us __________to work and play
We eat food in order to grow _________
Food makes us look __________
We get food from plants and _______________
After eating food we should drink ___________
Water is ___________
We cover our food to keep away ______________
Match the following
Hen pork
Pig fillet
Cow chicken
Fish mutton
Sheep beef
Draw and name three foods we eat
__________
___________
___________

____
(Water, strong, animals, soil, energy, life, fat, healthy, water
Clothes
We wear ___________ to cover our bodies
When it is cold we wear_________clothes
In __________places people wear light clothes
Clothes we wear at school are called ______
We use ___________ on a rainy day
Shoes make us look __________
On a muddy day we wear ______________
Draw clothes we wear
(Heavy, light, umbrella, gumboots, smart, warm, clothes, uniform)
Shelter
People live in a _________
Another name for a house is _________
Houses protect us from _________-animals
Houses provide us with__________
We ___________i n houses at night
Every home must have a __________
Name three types of houses
___________
___________
____________
(Wild, shelter, domestic, sleep, food, toilet, manyatta, stoned house, hut)

____
How to meet family needs
To meet family needs we need to ____________
Our parent’s _________to get money
My mother is a __________
A__________sells fish to get money
A__________grows food
A cow gives us _________and___________
A sheep gives us ________and __________
We buy food from the ___________
A cobbler repairs our ________
Revision: basic needs
Name three basic needs
_____________
___________
___________
Name three sources of water
______________
______________
_____________
Shelter protect us from
__________________
__________________
__________________
Name three types of food that we eat
__________________
_________________
___________________
Name three types of clothes we wear

____
________________
________________
_______________
A person who makes clothes is a ______________
A carpenter uses_________to make a house
Maintaining a happy family
Good behaviour in the family
Good behaviour means _________manners
We should ____________other people
We should not ___________our parents and friends
We say __________when we do something wrong
We say _________when we wake up in the morning
Children should ________their parents
We say ________when people do good things
We say ________- when asking for something
(Good, bad, abuse, respect, love, sorry, good morning, beat, obey, thank you, please
Child rights
A right is a ________ to do something
Children’s right makes them to be treated ___________
All children have a right to __________life
All children need food to __________
Children should go to school
Child _________is when children work for money

____
When sick children should be taken to __________
Parents should__________from bad people
(Freedom, well, badly, good, die, labour, hospitals, protect)
OUR SCHOOL
Name of our school
Our school is called __________
People ________in School
A school is a place where we learn to ____________and _____________
Our school is a ____________school
Boys wear __________-and__________ while girls wear____________and _____________ to school
The pupils in our school are ________
Our school was started by _________
(Learn, fight, read, and write, public, private, shirts, skirts, dresses, blouses, boys and girls, boys alone)
Symbols of the school and their importance
School logo
A _____is a symbol of the school
Our school motto is __________
Name two thing found in the logo of our school
______________
_____________
Draw the school logo
Name two things that you can see on the school logo
(Logo, fearing God wisdom begins)

____
The flag
This is a __________
The flag of Kenya has ______colours
We stand at _________-while raising the flag
We rise the flag __________and _______________every week
Name the colours of our flag
_______________
________________
________________
________________
Red on our flag shows ___________
Green on our flag means ___________
_____________raises the flag at our school
The Colour on top of the flag is ___________
Flag, 4, 10, attention, ease, Monday, Friday, black, white, red, green, blood, Colour, natural resources,
scouts, black)
National anthem
______anthem is sang when raising the flag
National anthem is a ____________-for our country
Name two languages that we use when we sing national anthem
____________
_____________
There are __________verses in the national anthem
Complete the following sentence of the national anthem

____
“Oh God of all ___________”
(Church, National, Prayer, English, Kiswahili, 4, 3, Creation)
Revision
Children should _________their parents
Patents and friends should not be __________by children
Good behaviour means good ___________
We should wash our __________after visiting the toilet
Children should wear___________
Children should live in a _________
Children should go to __________to learn
Good children say_____-when they do something wrong (obey, abused, good, hands, sorry, legs,
clothes, school, house)
School compound
Our school compound has ____________and____________
We help ourselves in the _____________
In ___________–we are given story books to read
Our school has __________where we go to play at breaktime
We plant ________and__________in our Shamba
We should keep our school compound _________
Draw and name two things found in the school compound
(Classroom, kitchen, dormitory, stores, library, toilet, bush, playground, maize, potatoes, cabbages,
coffee, small, clean)
Our school routine

____
We go to school from ___________to ______________
I go to school for ___________days in a week
Assembly is also called________
We go for assembly at ____________o clock in the morning
When the bell rings we change the subject
We go for lunch at ____________
After learning we leave school in the _________
(Monday to Sunday, Monday to Friday, 7, 8, school, circle, parade, 5, 9, 10.00am 12.45pm, every
morning, every afternoon)
People in the school and their roles
Some people in the school community are ____________
We have __________teachers in our school
There are _________pupils in our school
My class teacher is called________
The secretary types___________and______________
The __________guards the school during day and night
A __________drives our school bus
Food is cooked from the ____________
(Teachers, cooks, drivers, gateman, secretary, 2, 10, 60, tests, books, exams, 100, 700, kitchen)
Our classroom
Am in class _____________
We learn in the _________room
Name some things found in your classroom
We sit on ________

____
In our classrooms desks are arranged into ____________rows
________sits behind in class
The ___________tells us what to do when the teacher is absent
We keep our books in _________after classes
We use _________to clean the blackboard
Name three things you do to keep the classroom clean
_____________
____________
____________

REVISION: OUR SCHOOL

The special song for our school is called__________
Our school motto says________
Write three needs in your school
____________
____________
____________
The school __________make we look different from other pupils
We should keep our school ____________
The colours of our school uniform are ________and ___________
The name of our head teacher is ___________
Class rules
__________guides us in class
Pupil’smust________the class rules
Name two rules in the class
We should _________our teachers

____
The __________help us keep order in the classroom
We clean our school by____________
We ___________our class everyday
We use __________-for sweeping
Name three things you do to keep your classroom clean
____________
____________
___________
Taking care of things in our classroom/school
We write using _________in school
All children in school write on ____________
The teacher __________the cupboard so that the books cannot be stolen
Before going home we should ___________the windows
Our__________locks the classroom
Tearing books to make toys is ___________
It is bad to play with chairs and tables
A class timetable shows time and___________that we learn everyday
Safety on the way to and from school
Different ways of travelling to school
I go to school by _________
Kama lives far from school; he goes to school by __________
Some pupils ___________to school because they live near the school
Name three ways that we can use to go to school

____
_____________
______________
_____________
Draw two means of travelling to school
How to use the road safely
Road safety means free from___________on the road
Road_________helps us use the road safely
We should __________road signs
We should walk on the _________side of the road
Before crossing the road, look ____________, look_________look____–again and cross if the road is
clear
A__________is a person walking on foot
Another name for zebra crossing is ___________
The colours of a zebra crossing are __________-and _____________
Draw and Colour the road signs for
Bus stop
Stop
Dangers of talking and going with strangers
A ___________is a person I don’t know
We should not talk to _____________
Write two things that strangers might do to you
_____________
______________
Write three things we should not accept from strangers

____
_____________
_____________
_____________
Strangers can__________to us
We should walk with the other ____________
Gifts from strangers can be __________
Revision
We should cross the road only when it is _________
It is wrong to __________near the road
People we do not know are ____________
We should not get out of a ______________vehicle
Name two ways of travelling to school
Important features on the way to school
Features seen along the way
We see many things on our way to ___________
Things that we see are called __________features
Name three physical features that you see on your way to school
Many trees growing together make a __________
Animals that live in the forest are called __________animals
Name some of the wild animals
A_________has a lot of water
We buy vegetables and fruits from__________

____
Draw some things you see when coming to school
______________
_______________
_______________
Christians go to __________and Muslims pray in __________
Importance of the features to the people living near our school
We grow plants in a _________
Plants give us ____________
Wild animals are___________because they attract visitors
We get water and fish from a __________
Trees provide a ________for birds and monkeys
Tourists bring a lot of ___________when they visit us
We get ___________from trees in the forest
Visitors who come to see wild animals are called__________
We cross a river using a ____________

Maseno School Latest KCSE Mocks Plus Marking Schemes Free

Maseno School Latest KCSE Mocks Plus Marking Schemes Free

101-1.pdf
101-2.pdf
101-3.pdf
102-1.pdf
102-3.pdf
121-1-2.pdf
121-2-2.pdf
231-1.pdf
231-2.pdf
231-3 Confidential.pdf
231-3.pdf
232-1.pdf
232-2.pdf
232-3 Confidential.pdf
232-3.pdf
233-1-1.pdf
233-2-1.pdf
233-3 Confidential.pdf
233-3-1.pdf
311-1.pdf
311-2 .pdf
312-1-1.pdf
312-2.pdf
313-1.pdf
313-2.pdf
POST MOCK MIDGEA GEO T3 2023 PP1.docx

Here are the subject codes for your reference:

S/N Subject Name Subject Code
1 English 101
2 Kiswahili 102
3 Mathematics 121
4 Mathematics, Alternative B 122
5 Biology 231
6 Physics 232
7 Chemistry- 233
8 Biology for the Blind 236
9 General Science 237
10 History 311
11 Geography 312
12 CRE 313
13 IRE 314
14 HRE 315
15 Home Science 441
16 Art and Design 442
17 Agriculture 443
18 Wood Work 444
19 Metal Work 445
20 Building Construction 446
21 Power Mechanics 447
22 Electricity 448
23 Drawing and Design 449
24 Aviation Technology 450
25 Computer Studies 451
26 French 501
27 German 502
28 Arabic 503
29 Sign Language 504
30 Music 511
31 Business Studies 565

 

Form 4 Termly Exams KCSE Revision Papers and Answers

Form 4 Termly Exams KCSE Revision Papers and Answers

Agriculture P1.pdf
CRE P1.pdf
CRE P2.pdf
Biology P3 MS.pdf
Kiswahili P1.pdf
Maths P1.pdf
Physics P1 MS.pdf
Physics P1 MS.pdf
Maths P2 MS.pdf
Kiswahili P1.pdf
CRE P1.pdf
CRE P2.pdf
Biology P3 MS.pdf
Maths P2.pdf
Physics P1.pdf
Geography P1 M_S.pdf
Geography P2 Ms.pdf
Geography P2.pdf
History P1 .pdf
History P1 Ms (1).pdf
History P2 MS (2).pdf
KISWAHILI P2 Ms.pdf
Kiswahili P2.pdf
Kiswahili P2_1.pdf
Kiswahili P3 Ms.pdf
Kiswahili P3.pdf
Chemistry P1 MS.pdf
Chemistry P1.pdf
Chemistry P2 MS.pdf
Chemistry P2.pdf
Chemistry P3 Ms.pdf
Chemistry P3.pdf
CRE P2 MS.pdf
English P1 MS.pdf
English P1.pdf
English P2 MS.pdf
English P2.pdf
English P3 MS .pdf
English P3.pdf
Agriculture P1 Ms.pdf
Agriculture P2 Ms.pdf
Agriculture P2.pdf
Biology P1 MS.pdf
Biology P2 MS.pdf
Biology P3.pdf
Business P1 Ms.pdf
Business P1.pdf
Business P2 MS.pdf
Business P2.pdf
Maths P1 MS.pdf

THE PEARL SIMPLIFIED & LATEST NOTES

The Pearl

John Ernest Steinbeck

The Pearl Author/Context

John Ernest Steinbeck was born on February 27, 1902 in his childhood home of the Salinas Valley in California. In this environment, Steinbeck developed an appreciation for the sights, sounds, and smells of the natural world. The connection between man and nature and the inevitability of man meeting his determined fate are two common themes in his novels.

 

As a child, Steinbeck grew up in a supportive middle-class family. Although his mother, once a schoolteacher, would have preferred her son to make his way in a dignified profession, Steinbeck’s father gave the writer a small allowance from his own salary so that his son could pursue his writing career.

Steinbeck went to Stanford intermittently for five years without ever earning a degree, and during that time, he worked odd jobs, often involving physical labor. He liked these jobs because it brought him into contact with men of courage, strength, and honesty. He admired them for these qualities and their lack of hypocrisy.

At the age of twenty-seven, Steinbeck published his first novel, Cup of Gold, in 1929. From that point came thirteen novels, two collections of short stories, dramatizations of two of his novels, a play in story form, a documentary, and two volumes of reportage, as well as a journal of travel and scientific research. His novels include: To a God Unknown (1932), Tortilla Flat (1935), In Dubious Battle (1936), The Red Pony (1937), The Grapes of Wrath (1939), Of Mice and Men (1940), The Moon Is Down (1942), Cannery Row (1945), The Wayward Bus (1947), The Pearl (1947), East of Eden (1952), Sweet Thursday (1954), and The Winter of Our Discontent (1961).

The Grapes of Wrath won a Pulitzer Prize in 1940, and Steinbeck received the Nobel Prize for Literature in 1962. After Steinbeck won the Nobel Prize, he ceased to write any significant fiction, but he did write journalistic pieces, including America and Americans (1966).

Despite winning the Nobel and Pulitzer Prizes, critics weren’t sure what to make of Steinbeck because his style seemed to change with every novel. Some considered these changes an example of his versatility as a writer, while others viewed it as immaturity and an inability to establish his own style.

“Those who have written about Steinbeck have disagreed far more widely — and deeply — than they have about any other important writer of our time. . . . There is at least one notable characteristic of Steinbeck’s writing on which otherwise conflicting critics agree: he is a man in whom the faculty of pity is strong and close to the surface. . . . It may turn out . . . that the essence of Steinbeck-man and Steinbeck-writer lies in these two quite uncomplicated truths: he earnestly wishes to make people understand one another and he is able, like Blake, to ‘seek love in the pity of others’ woe.'”

Steinbeck died at his home in New York City in December of 1968.

THE PREFACE

The Pearl begins with a short preface in which Steinbeck introduces the story of the great pearl, along with his three main characters-Kino the fisherman, his wife Juana, and their infant son Coyotito. Their story has been told so often, the Preface asserts, that it lives in people’s minds and hearts. The story can be considered a parable.

NOTE: THE INTRODUCTION

Steinbeck inserted the Preface to make sure readers understood that the story had universal importance. Through stylized language and the suggestion of a parable, he indicates that you should look beyond the simple plot in order to find a deeper meaning. Perhaps because he had been criticized for creating shallow or flat characters, this short introduction is his way of announcing that the characters are to be regarded mainly as symbols.

The Pearl Plot Summary

Kino, a young pearl diver in La Paz, enjoys his simple life until the day his son, Coyotito, is stung by a scorpion. The wealthy town doctor will not treat the baby because Kino cannot pay the doctor’s fee, so Kino and his wife, Juana, are left only to hope their child is saved. That day Kino goes diving, and finds a great pearl, the Pearl of the World, and knows he is suddenly a wealthy man. The word travels quickly about the pearl and many in the town begin to plot ways to steal it.

While the townspeople plot against Kino, he dreams of marrying Juana in a church, buying a rifle, and sending Coyotito to school so that he can learn to read. Kino believes that an education will free his son from the poverty and ignorance that have oppressed their people for more than four hundred years.

The doctor comes to treat Coyotito once he learns of Kino’s pearl, and although the baby is healed by Juana’s remedy, the doctor takes advantage of Kino’s ignorance. He convinces Kino that the child is still ill and will die without the care of a doctor. The doctor then manipulates Kino into unwittingly revealing where he has hidden the great pearl. Kino moves the pearl when the doctor leaves. That night, an intruder comes into Kino’s hut and roots around near the spot where Kino had first buried the pearl.

The next day, Kino tries to sell the pearl in town. The pearl buyers have already planned to convince Kino that the great pearl he has found is worth very little because it is too large. This way they can purchase the pearl for a low price. But when the buyers try to cheat Kino, he refuses to sell the pearl and plans to travel to another city to sell at a fair price. His brother, Tom Juan, feels Kino’s plan is foolish because it defies his entire way of life and puts his family in danger. Kino is now on his own, although he doesn’t know it yet.

Juana warns Kino that the pearl is evil and will destroy his family, but he refuses to throw it away because it is his one chance to provide a different life for his family. That night, Juana takes the pearl and tries to throw it into the sea, but Kino stops her and beats her. On his way back to their hut, Kino is attacked and he kills the man in self-defense. Juana goes to gather their things and escape and finds the floor of their hut completely dug up. While she’s inside the hut getting the baby, someone lights it on fire.

Kino, Juana, and Coyotito hide with Kino’s brother for a day before embarking on their journey to a new city under the cover of darkness. While they are resting during the day, Kino discovers that there are trackers following them. He knows that they will steal the pearl and kill his family if they catch them. To escape, Kino and Juana take the baby and run to the mountains where they hide in a cave at nightfall. The trackers camp just below the ridge where they are hiding. Kino sneaks down in the night to kill the trackers, but before he can attack them, Coyotito cries out. The trackers, thinking it’s a coyote, shoot at the dark cave where Juana and Coyotito are hiding. As the shot is fired, Kino springs on the trackers and kills them all. Unfortunately, Coyotito was killed by the first gunshot, and Kino’s journey with the pearl ends in tragedy.

Realizing that the pearl is cursed and has destroyed his family (as Juana forewarned), Kino and Juana return to La Paz and throw the cursed pearl into the sea.

SETTING

The events of The Pearl take place on an estuary (the mouth of a river) somewhere on the coast of Mexico, in the fictitious town of La Paz. If you look at a map, you’ll see a long peninsula descending from the U.S. state of California. The peninsula, called Baja California, is part of Mexico and is separated from the rest of Mexico by the Gulf of California. (Another name for the Gulf of California is the Sea of Cortez, or Cortes.) Steinbeck traveled in this area with his friend Ed Ricketts in 1940 and described his experiences in The Sea of Cortez (1941).

Geographical features mentioned in The Pearl give clues to the setting. In a relatively short time, Kino walks from the estuary through desert scrub to mountains. This would be possible in Baja California.

Steinbeck doesn’t tell you exactly when the events of the novel take place because they came from a legend. Although no date is given, you are told that the witnesses of Kino’s return were the grandfathers of the present villagers. If Steinbeck heard the legend in 1940, that would set the story somewhere around 1900.

In order to understand Steinbeck’s story, it will help you to know that Indians of Mexico had been under the domination of people of Spanish descent for some three hundred years at the time of the legend. A civil-religious hierarchy governed; although church (Roman Catholic) and state were outwardly separated, they worked together in many aspects of Mexican life. You’ll see in the story how the priest and the pearl buyers act as allies in the social hierarchy, with the Indians at the bottom of the ladder. In many cases the Indians could not attend school or own land.

Although Spanish culture was imposed on Indians, the ancient religions and other aspects of the culture of the various tribes survived. Watch for places where you can see that Kino and Juana have merged both traditions-for example, Juana’s combination of Catholic Hail Marys and ancient prayers.

One aspect of Mexican culture that plays a part in the novel is that of mi tierra (my land). The birthplace of an Indian had enormous significance. Many Mexicans, especially Mexican Indians, believed they were meant to stay where they were born, and they developed a special attachment to their birthplace. Knowing this concept might help you understand what a huge step Kino takes when he decides to leave La Paz for the capital.

CHAPTER I

As a new day begins, Kino awakens peacefully next to his sleeping wife. He is content with his world and hears the Song of the Family playing happily in his mind. It is an indication that all is well.

NOTE: THE SONGS AND WHOLENESS

Throughout The Pearl you will read about various “songs” that play in the minds of Steinbeck’s characters. Such songs include the Song of the Family and the Song of Evil. These are ancient songs that have been passed down by generations of Indians. Steinbeck uses them to show the traditional, almost instinctual responses of his characters to their environment. When things are happy, they hear the Song of the Family. When evil threatens, they are alerted by the Song of Evil. Kino’s songs often mark occasions of celebration: he celebrates the morning and the existence of his family; he celebrates life and its events. The songs were individual parts of the Whole. This theme of wholeness is central to Steinbeck’s thinking: everything has its place in the universe, and when something happens to one of the parts, the whole system is affected.

Kino wraps himself in the one blanket that he owns, and watches the dawn break over the Gulf of California. The little Indian village is located somewhere on the peninsula of Baja California, Mexico, on the shore of the Gulf of California. While Juana prepares breakfast of corncake and pulque, Kino watches “with the detachment of God” as some ants try to outsmart each other in the dirt. His song blends with Juana’s ancient song, and together they form a unity (the “Whole”).

 

NOTE: THE ANTS

From the very start, Steinbeck tries to show similarities between the human and animal worlds. The ants, sabotaging and outwitting each other with sand traps, are little different from human beings on the battlefield, in the marketplace, or in other human competitions. Notice that Kino does nothing to alter the outcome of the struggle. A major theme of The Pearl is man’s struggle with nature and with the historical, racial, and class differences that prevent him from fulfilling his goals. By identifying Kino with God, is Steinbeck saying that man’s life and struggles are not subject to divine interference? Try to keep some of these larger issues in mind as you read the novel.

Kino returns to his brush hut, a primitive abode with a crude doorway and mats on a dirt floor. A streak of sun falls on the rope that holds Coyotito’s box. Suddenly, the peace of the morning is shattered when a scorpion crawls down the rope and stings the infant. Kino grabs the insect and grinds it into the dust while Juana takes her child and sucks out the poison. She whispers some ancient magic and mutters a “Hail Mary,” which shows the Roman Catholic influence in her religious beliefs. Coyotito’s screaming summons the neighbors, including Kino’s older brother, Juan Tomas, and his fat wife, Apolonia. Kino watches Juana in action and wonders at her strength, endurance, and patience.

NOTE: THE SCORPION EPISODE

The scorpion attack is part of the human struggle for existence and parallels the attacks by men later on. Steinbeck uses this attack to point out the difficulty of life in general-that no matter how hard people struggle in life, there always seems to be another problem or obstacle in their path.

Juana tells Kino to get the doctor. While this may seem like a reasonable request, it is actually an unusual one for an Indian. The class distinctions between the poor Indians and people of Spanish descent like the doctor were enormous. Kino realizes that since he is an Indian and has no money, the doctor will not come to treat Coyotito. Hearing that, Juana decides they will go to him. The theme of wholeness arises again when the villagers swarm around Juana and Kino: “The thing had become a neighborhood affair.” As mentioned earlier, the Whole is affected when something happens to one of the parts.

NOTE: CLASS DISTINCTION

Hundreds of years ago, Spanish conquerors took over Mexico and established their social, political, and economic dominance over the Indian population. The Spaniards and their descendants, because of their money and military power, became the ruling class. The Indians became the exploited, lower class.

The villagers, amazed by this decision, follow Juana and Kino to the doctor’s house, passing the four beggars who gather in front of the church. Steinbeck uses the beggars to illustrate the doctor’s character: “They knew his ignorance, his cruelty, his avarice, his appetites, his sins. They knew his clumsy abortions and the little brown pennies he gave sparingly for alms.” Through this unspoken knowledge about the doctor, you come to see the class struggle that is part of the lives of the members of Kino’s tribe.

Everyone suspects the doctor will not treat Coyotito. But the parents must try anyway. In his rage, Kino pounds against the doctor’s gate with the iron ring knocker. His thoughts about the doctor are described in the language of oppression: weakness, fear, anger, rage, and terror. The pounding of the music of the enemy mixes with the sound of the iron ring pounding at the doctor’s gate.

The servant who answers the call is an Indian like Kino, yet he will not speak to Kino in his own language. He makes it clear that Kino must wait for an answer outside the bolted gate.

NOTE: ON LANGUAGE

Language is used here as a sign of class distinction. When the Indian servant says, “A little moment,” Steinbeck is implying that he is speaking Spanish-un momentito. The -ito ending gives a noun the meaning of “small” or “tiny.” The baby’s name, Coyotito, means “a little coyote.” When the servant refuses to speak in the Indian language, he is reminding Kino of his lowly place. The incident also shows that people of Spanish descent set Indians against each other.

The doctor’s home, elegantly decadent, represents “the other world” and is contrasted with the primitive Indian huts. The doctor, dressed in a silk dressing gown (robe) that barely covers his fat belly, sips chocolate clumsily from a delicate china cup. He has the trappings of the rich, whereas you have seen that Kino eats corncake in the dirt, near a fire, wrapped in an old blanket. By now, you have probably noticed the tone of a parable, which is designed to teach a simple moral lesson. What message is Steinbeck communicating in this contrast between the doctor and the Indians?

As expected, the doctor, claiming that he is not a veterinarian, refuses to treat Coyotito. A wave of shame engulfs the people who witness Kino’s humiliation. Kino stands at the gate for a long time, then angrily punches it. He stares at his bloody knuckles, a symbol of the struggle between people of Spanish background and Indians. The doctor’s insulting refusal shocks Kino into realizing that something drastic must happen if he is to provide for his son’s future. It’s not that Kino or his family must “change,” but that they must find some way of exerting control over their environment. Do you think that Kino is a victim of fate? Are there changes he could have made to improve his life?

 

 

 

NOTE: NATURE VS. CIVILIZATION

Steinbeck uses nature imagery to contrast the Indians with the “civilized” life of the town. The doctor, who represents those who control the village, lives in a large home of stone and plaster, while Kino and the other Indians live in an impoverished neighborhood of small brush huts with dirt floors. Whereas the doctor drinks chocolate from a silver pot, Kino drinks pulque (a fermented drink made from a flowering plant) from an earthen jug, squatting on the dirt. The doctor sleeps in a plush bed, but Kino and his wife sleep on simple mats thrown on the ground. Yet the doctor’s house is gloomy and dark, whereas Kino’s hut is right on the beautiful Gulf of California. The doctor is frustrated and greedy; Kino is happy and content. The doctor has money; Kino has none. The doctor is agitated; the Indians are in tune with nature. The doctor is “refined”; the Indians have the simple, instinctual ways of animals. (“All the doctor’s race spoke to all of Kino’s race as though they were simple animals.”)

What does this contrast tell you? One idea to think about is that the further one moves away from nature, the more “unnatural” one becomes. And with this move toward a culture based on money, one grows more discontent with life, more restricted and tense. The birds at the Gulf fly free, while the doctor’s bird is caged. Kino is at peace when the novel begins. But he is soon thrown into conflict when he leaves nature in pursuit of money and civilization. This conflict will persist until he returns to his natural habitat.

CHAPTER II

In the opening description of the beach, the narrator leads your eyes inland from the sea. The beach and the water nearby are full of life, each creature living and growing in its own way and in its own place. Despite the vision of the sea teeming with life, the narrator cautions that in the Gulf, vision cannot be trusted. The hazy mirages that occur there have taught Kino’s people for centuries not to trust their vision, for the Gulf has “the vagueness of a dream.”

Kino’s village is located on a broad estuary lined with canoes. He and Juana are proud of his canoe-a gift from his father, who had received it from Kino’s grandfather. It is their only possession of value and symbolizes the ancient Indian civilization that continues to guide Kino. As his source of income, the canoe is a necessity.

That morning, when Kino and Juana come down to the beach, she makes a poultice (medicinal compress) of seaweed for Coyotito’s shoulder. This is probably a better remedy than what the doctor would have offered, yet it lacks the doctor’s authority. Worrying about her son, Juana prays that they will find a pearl in order to pay the doctor to heal Coyotito.

NOTE:

Juana’s natural instincts are strong. She reacts to the situations in her life with compassion and intelligence, as her administering of her poultice demonstrates. But she is aware of her simplicity and doubts the effectiveness of her methods, when compared with those of the doctor. Keep this in mind when you read of the doctor’s actions in the next chapter.

After pushing the canoe into the water, Kino and Juana work together to paddle toward the oyster bed where Kino fishes and searches for pearls. The oyster bed has historical significance. Steinbeck notes that the Spanish conquerors had worked this bed and that the pearls taken from it had greatly aided the king of Spain, financing both his wars and the decoration of his churches.

NOTE: PEARL FORMATION

Pearls are formed through an accident of nature. A grain of sand becomes caught inside the fleshy folds of an oyster and, to protect itself from irritation, the oyster coats the grain with layer after layer of a milky cement. This process forms a pearl. This contrast between the natural definition of a pearl and its value to humans in terms of wealth is one of the many contrasts Steinbeck uses to tell you something significant about reality and appearances. It is also one of the many levels of symbolic meaning that the pearl conveys.

Kino knows that a great pearl will bring him much money, but he does not dare hope for such a pearl because it is not good to want too much. As he descends into the water, he hears the Song of the Pearl That Might Be, and in the canoe above, Juana makes the “magic of prayer.”

Moments after Kino goes underwater, he finds a large oyster in which there is a “ghostly gleam.” It is the Pearl of the World-great and perfect and stunning. Kino’s troubles seem to be over. The money he will receive from the sale of the pearl will eliminate the humiliations of poverty. Yet Kino does not hope for too much since that might drive good luck away. Kino’s people have always felt a need to be tactful with both the Christian God and the old Indian gods so as not to appear greedy. Why do you think they feel this way?

NOTE: SUPERSTITIONS

Juana and Kino do not want to offend the gods by hoping for too much. On one level this is a superstition inherited from their ancestors (Juana’s “magic of prayer”). But on another level, it is consistent with the idea of wholeness, whereby each person plays his part in life and removes from life what is his due. Though illiterate, Juana and Kino understand the principle of balance. If you ask for more than your fair share, you may end up with even less. Notice that the pearl gives off a “ghostly gleam.” Already there is a hint of death.

Kino looks at the pearl and sees that it captures the light as perfectly as the moon. He can see dreams of a better future for his family in the pearl. This passage marks the beginning of Kino’s dreams, or “visions,” where reality becomes confused with the illusion of a better world. His dreams go deep-right through to his soul-and Kino will soon begin to identify his soul with the pearl. Don’t forget the warning about mirages, however, at the beginning of the chapter. Will the pearl prove a lucky find or something quite different?

While Kino holds the pearl in the hand he had smashed against the doctor’s gate, Juana notices that Coyotito’s swelling has gone down. The poison is leaving the infant’s body. Kino screams with delight as he looks at the pearl, and this causes the other divers to race toward his canoe.

By screaming so loudly, Kino attracts attention to his discovery. This sets in motion the reactions of the community, each person adding to the total reaction of the whole. Before he knows it, Kino will become alienated from the people of his own village. He will be the outsider who deviates from the natural system. And in biological systems, the deviant is usually punished, sometimes by death. If you were in Kino’s shoes, would you react as he did?

CHAPTER III

Kino’s village is compared to a “colonial animal,” with a physical body, emotions, and a nervous system that communicates news in a rapid, invisible way. By the time Kino and Juana return to their house, everyone knows that he has found the Pearl of the World. Suddenly, people become interested in Kino. When the priest hears the news, he thinks of certain repairs needed by the church. The doctor, fantasizing about his younger, happier days in Paris, announces that Kino is his client and that he is treating Coyotito for the scorpion sting.

NOTE: THEME OF WHOLENESS

With the comparison of the village to a colonial animal, Steinbeck presents his idea that each person is part of a larger whole. No event happens to an individual in isolation. The procession of villagers to the doctor’s house prepared you for this idea. And it is reinforced by the closeness felt by Mexican Indians to their village. There is a feeling of belonging, perhaps because of village unity and the hierarchy of power. Rarely do people leave their village.

The unscrupulous pearl buyers are delighted by the news. Though they pretend to be independent buyers with private little offices, they all work for the same man. They are the “arms” of his organization, and nothing gives them more pleasure than buying pearls at ridiculously low prices.

A “curiously dark residue” is created when the people think about Kino’s pearl. It taps into their dreams, plans, hopes, fantasies, and desires. And the only person preventing them from fulfilling their dreams is Kino. Because of this, he becomes every man’s enemy, though he doesn’t know it. His discovery has provoked something thoroughly evil in the town, a “black distillate” as poisonous as the scorpion. This comparison of the pearl’s effect with the scorpion’s poison is one of the major biological comparisons in The Pearl. (Another is the description of the village as a colonial animal.) The pearl, once a source of promise and beauty, has now become an evil omen.

NOTE: GREED AND ENVY

The pearl causes a sinister change in town. Kino has become a “have” in a world of “have-nots.” As a result, he is an outsider, an enemy. The pearl has planted the seeds of many dreams in the minds of many people who have been deprived of too much for too long. Their greed and envy create a threat to Kino. In his excitement, Kino is blinded to events around him. But his brother, Juan Tomas, sees the threat and will warn Kino about it.

Later, Kino sits with his family and friends, admiring the pearl. Juan Tomas asks what he will do now that he has become rich. Kino peers into the pearl for an answer, as if looking into a crystal ball. He has a vision of a proper church wedding, where he and Juana will be dressed in fine clothes. And he will purchase a harpoon and a rifle.

Kino wants status and recognition, and it is the rifle that seems to symbolically break down the social order that keeps the Indians under the domination of the Spaniards. While it is acceptable for Kino to imagine having a wedding, fine clothes, and other niceties, a rifle would ordinarily be an impossible purchase for poor Indians. The mere thought of Kino’s owning a rifle tells you that he has crossed the line that separates his original simple life from the passion for wealth that will devour him. The rifle symbolizes Kino’s intention to cease being exploited by people of Spanish descent. In the hands of an Indian, a gun could change the power structure. So could the next part of Kino’s dream-an education for his son-since knowledge will eventually free the Indians from the bonds of ignorance. On an even higher symbolic level, the rifle might be thought of as the final blow of truth that allows innocence and goodness to triumph over evil. This passage about Kino’s visions reminds you that The Pearl is an allegory in which concrete objects often stand for ideas.

At dusk, the villagers whisper that the priest is coming. Like the doctor, the priest lives in town and rarely visits these “children.” Without knowing why, Kino hears the Song of Evil, but faintly, when the priest enters. The Father says Kino is named for a great man of the Church (Eusebio Kino, a Jesuit missionary in present-day Mexico and Arizona from the 1680s to his death in 1711) and that it is in the books. Kino isn’t sure of this and hopes that someday his son will know what is in the books. The priest wants to make certain that the Church gets its share from the sale of the pearl. Do you think Steinbeck is implying that the Church contributes to the exploitation of the Indians?

NOTE: KINO, THE PRIEST, AND RELIGION

The priest’s visit is preceded by the suggestion that Kino might be punished for trying to change things. How are God, the priest, the future, and Kino’s plans related? Kino believes that his future is vulnerable to attack because he has spoken openly of his plans. In fact, Kino feels threatened by this representative of religion. Although the priest appears to be concerned that Kino do the “right” thing, his major interest is the pearl. His stilted biblical language (“thou” and “thee”) rings false. And he has not married Kino in the church or baptized Coyotito because Kino has never had the money to pay for these services. Do you think the priest’s actions are motivated by self-interest? Remember that in the original story Kino wants to use the pearl’s wealth primarily to guarantee his salvation by purchasing in advance the masses necessary to release his soul from Purgatory. Doesn’t such a practice as buying one’s salvation also suggest the corruption of the Church?

After the priest leaves, Kino still hears the shrill music of evil in his ears. A thin dog wanders by, but as Kino looks down, he fails to see the animal. This is another sign that Kino’s eyes are blind to simple, everyday events.

The doctor arrives after dark. Kino is filled with hatred, rage, and fear, but lets the doctor in when the corrupt old man says there might be a delayed reaction to the scorpion sting. In his ignorance, Kino does not know what to do, but he does not want his son to suffer.

To play on the couple’s fears, the doctor puts on a grand show. He gives the baby some poisonous white powder and says he will come back in an hour, for he knows the poison will strike by then. When the doctor leaves, Kino buries the pearl in the corner of the hut. Coyotito becomes very sick again, and in an hour the doctor returns.

NOTE: Before the doctor returns, Steinbeck inserts an important description of the estuary at night. There is the sound of big fish eating little fish, the familiar sound of slaughter-a symbol of the relationship between the Spanish and the Indians, between the rulers and the oppressed.

The doctor has not fooled anyone, even though he gives Coyotito a few drops of ammonia in a cup of water to calm him. The doctor says that because of his knowledge of scorpion poison, Coyotito will now recover. He pretends to be surprised that Kino has found a pearl, but asks questions, hoping that Kino will glance at the place where the pearl is hidden. Kino does this, and the doctor leaves the hut knowing the location of the pearl.

Later that night, Kino and Juana are awakened by an intruder in their hut. Fearing this might happen, Kino had moved the pearl. But he is wounded in the scuffle with the attacker.

For the first time, Juana begs Kino to get rid of the pearl. She feels it is evil and will destroy them. But Kino resists. He is infatuated with dreams of the future and refuses to surrender to outsiders.

NOTE:

The shrewd and conniving doctor is one of the first to prey upon Kino, but he will not be the last. Juana’s instincts about the pearl are correct, and Kino’s stubbornness will launch him on a path of destruction. Within the scope of the parable, what does Kino’s attitude tell you about the quest for money? Whose side do you take in the disagreement between Juana and Kino?

 

 

 

CHAPTER IV

This is the day Kino will sell the pearl. Everyone in La Paz is aware of Kino’s plans and will take part in the ritual. Juana wears her wedding skirt and dresses Coyotito in baptismal clothes. Kino steps out of his hut and heads up the procession, accompanied by his brother, Juan Tomas. Though Juana walks behind her husband, there will be a time when she breaks custom and walks together with him.

Juan Tomas warns Kino to beware of the pearl buyers. They are cheats, he says, and will try to fool him about the price. He reminds Kino of the time some men in the village wanted to obtain more money for their pearls by pooling them and sending an Indian agent to the capital to sell them. Twice they tried it, but on both occasions the agents disappeared. Do you think the agents ran off with the money, or were they perhaps robbed and killed?

The brothers talk about the annual sermon that the priest delivers on this incident. He insists it’s a message from God that each person is meant to maintain his or her position in life, whatever it might be: “Each man and woman is like a soldier sent by God to guard some part of the castle of the Universe.”

NOTE:

When you consider the source of this sermon-the priest-you may conclude that it’s a story he uses to manipulate the Indians. There is a strong political and social component-God wants you to stay in your place-and the Indians are expected to obey. It is very possible that Steinbeck wants you to regard the sermon in the same light as the doctor’s remedies. Do you think Kino and Juan Tomas believe the priest’s message?

The brothers squint their eyes and tighten their lips in preparation for the pearl buyers. The people in the procession know that this is an important day, and they follow Kino’s lead.

In the meantime, the pearl buyers sit at their desks, excited about the much-discussed pearl. One of them, a fat, plodding man, plays disappearing tricks with a coin while waiting. The symbolic disappearance of the coin foreshadows the episode that follows.

When Kino arrives, the villagers wait outside while he shows one of the buyers his pearl. The pearl buyers have already conspired how to handle the buying of the pearl. With a look of sadness and contempt for the poor man who doesn’t know the value of things, one of the buyers tells Kino that the pearl, like fool’s gold, is only a curiosity. He offers Kino a thousand pesos, but Kino knows it is worth fifty thousand.

Kino, growing “tight and hard,” feels the circling of vultures and wolves. He hears the music of the enemy and knows that he is being cheated. As if to confirm his price, the pearl buyer sends for the other buyers, claiming that they know nothing of his offer. The first man refuses to do business because the pearl is a “monstrosity.” The second dealer says it is soft, chalky, and worthless. The third offers five hundred pesos.

Disgusted, Kino withdraws his pearl and says he’ll sell it in the capital. The men, realizing they have not fooled Kino, promptly offer fifteen hundred pesos. They know that they will be punished by their boss if they don’t purchase the pearl. But Kino understands their scheme and decides to leave.

That evening, the villagers discuss Kino’s decision. Some support him; others think he was wrong. Kino, however, is terrified of what he has done. He feels he has “lost one world and [has] not gained another.” What do you think this means? Kino knows more about the world than he did a few days earlier. Though he is vulnerable, he must harden himself to the attacks that await him. His instinctual awareness of this causes him anxiety, as does the idea of leaving the village of his birth.

Juan Tomas sees that Kino is treading on new ground without knowing the way. He says that, in the capital, Kino will be among strangers and will be leaving behind his friends and family. (If you have been looking for the symbolic meaning of the characters, look carefully at Juan Tomas here. Do you see why some readers think he represents the traditional Indian ways?) Only Juana seems to be on Kino’s side, even though the pearl frightens her.

Later on, Kino is restless and goes for a walk. Sensing danger, he feels for his knife. Juana hears a scuffle and puts the baby down to look for a rock in order to come to Kino’s aid. By the time she reaches Kino, his clothes have been torn apart by an attacker looking for the pearl. He is half conscious, his cheek slashed.

Juana cleans the wound, then pleads with Kino to throw the pearl away. Kino can only repeat his dream, as if repetition will make it come true. He asks Juana to believe in him (“I am a man”), then promises they will leave for the capital in the morning.

NOTE:

You might be wondering about the relationship between Kino and Juana at this point. It is clear that Kino has deep love and respect for his wife. She is warm and loving and also strong and secure. Yet within the social structure of their society, the male is the absolute head of the family. Do you think Kino is comfortable as the decision maker? Or would he prefer to share responsibility equally with Juana? He seems obsessed with his dream and, for the moment, won’t let anyone, including Juana, challenge it.

 

 

 

CHAPTER V

Kino awakens in the darkness as Juana quietly leaves the hut with something in her hand. Enraged, Kino follows her to the shore. But when she sees him coming, Juana begins to run. Kino grabs her arm before she can throw the pearl into the water. Then, hissing like a snake, he beats her. When she falls against the rocks, he kicks her viciously in the side. This is the same Kino who had so tenderly loved her two days earlier and had wondered at her strength.

What has changed him? What makes them both do what they are doing? Juana wants to expose the dream-filled destruction she sees Kino driven toward. But she doesn’t fight back, because submission is part of her role as Kino’s wife. When Kino beats her, he is defending his manliness and his dream, for the two have become one.

NOTE: KINO’S DREAM

Kino’s dream has challenged the system. In Chapter IV, Steinbeck showed you the reflexive response of the town, the colonial animal, to the pearl. In the deepening conflict, Kino will lose everything that connects him to this town. The purpose of Chapter V is to show Kino’s isolation. If you keep in mind the metaphor (comparison) of the town as a colonial animal, this separation can mean only one thing-destruction. Kino’s battle with Juana foreshadows the death of his family. He is now like the deviant from a closely interrelated ecological system. He is separated from his natural environment. From now on, he will lack the protection of his kin and the strength of his tradition. He is a free agent, flung into the world to face ruthless predators.

Kino is attacked again on the path to his hut-this time, by more than one assailant. In self-defense, Kino kills one of them, and with this action, Juana realizes that their old way of life is ended. She finds the pearl in the path just before seeing the two men lying there, one of whom is bleeding from the throat. She sponges Kino’s wounds and revives him after dragging the dead man into the bushes. As Kino recovers consciousness, she tells him what has happened, and they realize they must leave the village before daybreak.

By killing a man, Kino has crossed a threshold; there is now no turning back to the old life. Before this, Kino could have sold the pearl and given up his dream of changing the way things are. In his quest for his dream, Kino rebels against both the natural and the social system-and tries to impose his own will. This attempted revolt will bring Kino ever closer to destruction.

Kino instructs Juana to prepare Coyotito and pack some food while he readies the canoe. As he stumbles down to the beach, he is horrified to see that his canoe has been destroyed.

 

 

 

NOTE: THE CANOE

For Kino, as for any fisherman, the destruction of his boat is an immeasurable loss. Not only does it mean the loss of his prized possession and his means to an income, but it also means the loss of a part of his heritage. The psychological impact of the loss of his canoe is as significant for Kino as the dead man in the path was for Juana. The old way of life is over. Filled with rage, Kino now becomes like an animal, living only to protect himself and his family. (But notice that even in his rage, it never occurs to Kino to take another’s boat.) Why does Steinbeck use this animal comparison? Does Kino really have to become like an animal to preserve his dream of a better life as a man? Is Steinbeck necessarily implying that animal traits are lower than human ones?

Juana scurries down the path with the news that their hut is on fire. She and Kino make plans to hide in his brother’s house until the next night, when they will leave for the mountains. Juan Tomas tells him that there is a devil in the pearl, but he agrees to help Kino. He spends the day telling neighbors that Kino has fled the village. From each visit, he returns with something borrowed that will help his brother-a few beans, some salt, and a knife.

That night, before the moon rises, Kino sets forth with his family. Once more, Juan Tomas asks Kino to consider giving up the pearl. But Kino answers that the pearl has become his soul, and that if he gives it up, he will lose his soul.

NOTE: THE PEARL AS KINO’S SOUL

Kino has become so obsessed with the pearl that nothing else matters. Every breath is devoted to making his dream come true, at the risk of placing his family in grave danger. In a material sense, a person dies when his soul leaves his body. If Kino were to throw away his soul, he would die spiritually as well. His soul-that is, the pearl and his dream-is all that holds him to life. Why do you think Kino considers the pearl as his soul? Do you see a religious meaning here? Has Kino substituted a dream of fulfillment on earth for the traditional Christian concept of salvation after death? Some readers think that the dream of the pearl has corrupted Kino’s true soul, driving him to sacrifice his family and reject his past. Others see the pearl as Kino’s only hope for dignity as a man. In this sense, the pearl would be a fitting metaphor for his soul.

CHAPTER VI

The moment has come for Kino and his family to leave their village in search of their dream. This chapter can best be understood when divided into three parts: the flight, the confrontation with the trackers, and the return.

Kino and Juana flee toward Loreto, the city where “the miraculous Virgin has her station.” They make certain, however, not to be seen in the town of La Paz where, two days earlier, they had led a procession to the doctor’s house. There is a strong wind this night as the couple go “out into the world.” (These words may remind you of Adam and Eve leaving the Garden of Eden in the Old Testament Book of Genesis.) Kino is grateful for the wind because it means the blowing sand will cover their tracks.

The flight has stirred something primitive and basic in Kino, as if part of his ancient Indian heritage has reawakened in him. His survival instinct (akin to animal instinct) has been revived, and he is wary of attackers.

Hour after hour the march proceeds until at last they come upon a road with deeply cut wheel tracks. Since the wind has died down, they decide to walk in the tracks as an added safety measure. A wagon cutting through the sand will easily erase their footsteps. Though the evils of the night are all around them, Kino hears the music of the pearl in his head. The screeching owls and laughing coyotes do not trouble him, since he has the knife for protection.

NOTE:

Kino and Juana’s march to Loreto resembles a pilgrimage to a religious shrine. In fact, Steinbeck notes that Loreto is the city where the Virgin Mary “has her station.” Kino’s passion for the pearl approaches an almost religious fervor. You’ve seen earlier that Kino and Juana combine ancient Indian and Catholic prayers, that they refer to God and the gods. Has the religion of the pearl taken over from both these sets of belief? Have all Kino’s gods abandoned him, or is it the other way around?

At dawn, after walking all night, they find a little hiding spot in a clearing near the road. Juana settles in to feed Coyotito while Kino returns to the road to sweep away their footprints. Before long, a cart creeks along the path, wiping out all the tracks. Relieved, Kino returns to Juana and shares some corncakes with her. While eating, Kino spots a little column of ants near his foot; he puts his foot in their way and watches them climb over it. Recall that in Chapter I, Kino did not interfere with the ants, despite his God-like position. Now he makes the ants climb over his foot, a difficult task for an ant. Is Steinbeck commenting on God’s indifference to human struggle? Would God create an obstacle as carelessly as Kino puts his foot in the ants’ path?

It is hot and they are far from the Gulf. Kino shows Juana the poisonous trees and bushes to avoid. In the midst of these warnings, Juana asks if they are being followed. Kino knows that this will happen and that it will prove the pearl’s worth. He looks into the pearl for his former vision of the future but sees only pictures of the past-the dead man, Juana’s beaten face, and the baby’s illness. In an effort to blot out these images, Kino asserts that their son will have a fine education. Yet all he sees is Coyotito’s face, “thick and feverish from medicine.” Alarmed by the vision, Kino hears the music of evil intermingled with that of the pearl.

 

 

NOTE: KINO’S VISIONS

Throughout the novel, Kino has seen visions in the pearl. In keeping with a cinematic technique, Steinbeck has used the pearl as a sort of mirror in which Kino sees visual reflections of his mind. When he is excited about the future, the vision shows his church wedding, fine clothes, and Coyotito going to school. Now that he is a pursued animal, Kino’s visions show only the dark, frightening aspects of life. What role do these visions play on the symbolic level of the story?

Kino falls asleep. Steinbeck then describes the impassive Juana, sitting with the flies buzzing around her facial cuts and bruises, watching Coyotito until his innocent playing makes her smile and respond.

The two of them together make clear the difficulty of their own and their people’s position. The Indians have little choice. If they submit meekly to oppression, they will be allowed to live as we see Juana living. They will be beaten any time they try to change things. But they will also be allowed a measure of innocent contentment as long as they do not peer into the future. (Do you remember how happy Kino was on that first morning? Juana is also happy watching the innocence of the baby.) If they do not submit, they will be crushed.

Kino sits up suddenly and whispers to Juana to be silent. He hears something and feels for his knife. In the distance, he sees two men on foot and one on horseback. They are trackers in search of the pearl, and Kino knows they will persist until the find him. He fears that careless footprints will reveal his whereabouts and that even his sweeping the footprints might give him away. Kino is now a hunted man.

NOTE:

Steinbeck is a master of suspense. One of his strengths as a novelist is the ability to keep the story moving. Even with its many descriptions, The Pearl maintains a rapid pace. As it moves to a conclusion, you can almost feel Kino and Juana running.

As the trackers approach, Kino plans to leap at the one with the rifle, then kill the other two. Juana muffles Coyotito’s noises while the trackers stop at the swept spot. After closely examining the sand, the trackers move on, look back, then continue their journey. Kino knows that they will return, and he panics like a trapped animal. Flight is the only solution. Finally, Juana provokes him into making a decision: they will go to the mountains.

They hurry frantically toward the high place, not bothering to cover their tracks. Time is crucial since the trackers will soon discover the broken twigs and crushed plants. Kino wants Juana to remain in the crevice while he plants false signs that will lead the trackers further up into the mountains. But she refuses to leave him. So they decide to move in zigzags instead of a straight line, leaving a multitude of signs to confuse the trackers.

The flight to the mountains suggests several meanings. One is that Kino’s action is a natural one. “And Kino ran for the high place, as nearly all animals do when they are pursued.” Another level of meaning comes from the image of the “naked granite mountains… standing monolithic against the sky.” The image is a reminder of the implacable forces of both nature and society against which the Indians must struggle to survive. Some readers find a reference to another, older story of a father who takes his son to the mountains. They see the story of Kino and Coyotito as a reversal of the Old Testament story of Abraham and Isaac. (See Note on page 50.)

As the sun falls, they climb higher to a bubbling spring where animals come to drink. Kino knows that the trackers, needing water, will also plan to come here. But that’s a risk he’ll have to take. From this altitude, Kino spots the trackers far down the slope. They appear no bigger than swarming ants.

NOTE: ANT IMAGERY

This is the third time that ants have appeared in The Pearl. Steinbeck uses them to show the parallels between animal and human behavior, and to portray the relative insignificance of individual human beings in the scheme of the universe.

Juana takes a supply of water and heads for a cave up above. Meanwhile, Kino runs up the mountain, then down again, “clawing and tearing at the ferns and wild grape” as he goes. By misleading the trackers into climbing higher, he and Juana will be able to escape down the mountain. His one fear is that Coyotito’s cries will reveal their location. But Juana says this won’t happen.

By dusk, the trackers arrive at the water spring. Kino watches them from the cave entrance and realizes that they intend to set up camp. This is bad news since he and Juana know they won’t be able to keep Coyotito quiet for the entire night. Kino has no choice but to kill the trackers.

Kino touches his son on the head, then feels Juana’s cheek. In preparation for the murder, Kino strips the last remains of civilization-his clothes-from his body. Kino’s naked, brown body now camouflages him. He must move slowly in order not to dislodge a stone. This requires great stamina-the courage of an animal on the prowl. As Kino reaches the trackers’ camp, his heart thunders as he prepares for the attack.

Just as Kino is about to strike, the moon makes him very visible. He hesitates for a moment-a tragic mistake-and the baby cries, drawing the attention of the tracker on duty. In a bitter play on the baby’s name, the trackers discuss whether it is a human cry or that of a coyote with her litter. The man with the rifle, taking no chances, raises the rifle to shoot. Kino springs, but he is a moment too late. The rifle goes off before Kino reaches him.

 

 

NOTE: ABRAHAM AND ISAAC

Some readers see the fate of Coyotito in the mountains as a reminder of the biblical story of Abraham and Isaac-in reverse. In that story, Abraham was instructed by God to take his son to the mountain and sacrifice him. When Abraham showed God that he was willing to make the sacrifice, God substituted a ram for Isaac and rewarded Abraham. “I will indeed bless you, and I will multiply your descendants as the stars of heaven and as the sand which is on the seashore. And your descendants shall possess the gate of their enemies…. “(Genesis 22:15-18) In The Pearl, the son is sacrificed; God has not interceded. And there seems little chance of Kino’s descendants overcoming their enemies. Unlike Abraham, however, Kino is denied the chance to save his people.

In a frenzy of rage, Kino takes on a machinelike quality and kills all three trackersone with his knife, one with a blow to the head with the rifle butt, and one slowly and deliberately with shots from the rifle. After the sounds of the killing fade away, Kino hears mournful sounds. It is Juana-something terrible has happened to Coyotito. His head has been blown away.

Steinbeck ends the chapter with a description of the sad return of Kino and Juana to their native village. Not only do the old people who actually saw them return remember it, but also the younger ones whose fathers and grandfathers told them about it. The event truly involved everyone in the village of La Paz.

It is late afternoon when the couple returns to La Paz (ironically, La Paz is Spanish for peace). Walking side by side, Kino carries the rifle and Juana supports Coyotito’s body in a bundle over her shoulder. Juana is “as remote and as removed as Heaven,” while Kino is “as dangerous as a rising storm.”

NOTE:

You will recall that, earlier in The Pearl, Juana walked behind her husband. Now they walk together, side by side. What do you see in this new sign of equality? Is it an indication that they are now removed from the old system that has oppressed them? Or is it a sign that they are no longer a part of their ancient Indian culture?

Kino and Juana walk through the town as if it weren’t there. Passing the ruins of their burned hut, they proceed to the water, where Kino takes the pearl, looks into it, and sees evil faces peering at him. The pearl has become ugly, “like a malignant growth.” Kino asks if Juana wants to throw it, but she tells him to do it. With that, he flings it into the Gulf, where it splashes in the distance, then drops to the bottom, its music fading away to nothing.

 

 

NOTE: SOME CONCLUSIONS

It is bitter irony that after all Kino suffers to keep the pearl, he throws it back into the ocean, where it is lost forever. How can we understand why Kino does this and what the meanings of this story of the poor fisherman might be?

Does Kino throw the pearl away because he feels guilty, as some readers suggest? If this is so, then Kino must feel that he has been greedy and that his greed has caused the death of Coyotito, all the other deaths, and much pain and suffering. The original version of the legend was clearly a warning about greed. Can you see a parallel warning in Kino’s final gesture?

We know there is rage in Kino at the end, because Steinbeck uses images like “a rising storm,” “a tower of fear,” and “a battle cry” in his description of Kino’s return. Do you think Kino throws the pearl away as a gesture of rage and disgust? Has he learned that Indians are not allowed to dream? Is the gesture a last protest against social oppression?

You might also conclude that Kino’s new understanding stretches even further than the boundaries of his own social system. It was not only the pearl buyers and the doctor and the tracker with the horse who betrayed him. Indians also worked against him. (He had to beg his brother for one day’s refuge!) It is possible that Kino at the end looks with disgust at humans in general, regardless of social position. From this point of view, the novel seems to be a depiction of the universal weakness and selfishness of people.

Still another conclusion is that Kino’s tragedy was not so much a victory of evil over good as it was a natural phenomenon. Throughout the novel, Steinbeck has used biological comparisons to suggest that no event happens to an individual alone. The natural order-of ants, fish, scorpions, and men-is a predatory one, and Kino just happens to get caught in it. Kino’s action might suggest that he is submitting to the inevitability of the natural (and social) order-to his fate.

There is no single answer. The meaning you take from this story of the fisherman and the pearl will depend on how you see Kino and on how you interpret the meaning of the pearl, on your own experiences, and on many other factors. Steinbeck does not point dramatically and conclusively to one interpretation. Some readers have seen this inconclusiveness as a weakness in the novel. Perhaps The Pearl is not conclusive, but it does serve as a kind of record of the conflicts experienced by people-conflicts within themselves and with the systems under which they live.

 

 

 

 

Themes in John Steinbeck’s The Pearl

Price of Wisdom.

Juana understands far sooner than Kino the danger in possessing the pearl. “It will destroy us all,” she cries out to him. “Even our son.” After Kino and Juana’s way of life has been obliterated—their house burned and Kino’s canoe smashed—Juan Tomás attempts to save them from further destruction. “There is a devil in this pearl,” he tells Kino. “You should have sold it and passed on the devil. Perhaps you can still sell it and buy peace for yourself.” Kino refuses, clinging to the pearl although he perceives it differently: “I have it … And I will keep it … now it is my misfortune and my life and I will keep it.” When Kino is caught up in dreams of the future, he beats Juana for attempting to throw the pearl into the Gulf; at the conclusion of the story, it is Kino who returns the pearl to the sea. Juana stands beside him, the bloodied body of their dead son wrapped in her shawl—a terrible price to pay for Kino’s acquiring wisdom.

What, however, is the wisdom of The Pearl, if indeed it is a parable? The question remains unanswered in the story, but a passage from the text suggests an interpretation:

For it is said that humans are never satisfied; that you give them one thing and they want something more. And this is said in disparagement, whereas it is one of the greatest talents the species has and one that has made it superior to animals that are satisfied with what they have.

The lesson inherent in Kino’s possessing “the Pearl of the World” may be found in this characteristic of human nature: the desire for more. One of man’s “greatest talents,” the story suggests, is also a curse that creates dissatisfaction and destroys contentment.

Before finding the pearl, Kino lives a peaceful and secure existence, in harmony with the natural world; he finds happiness and fulfillment in the simple routines of his life—waking up beside Juana, listening to “the little splash of morning waves on the beach,” watching Coyotito sleep in his cradle, and standing on the beach before dawn to watch the sun rise out of the Gulf. The morning before Kino finds the pearl is “a morning like other mornings and yet perfect among mornings.” He lives within “the Song of the Family”; it rises sometimes “to an aching chord that caught the throat, saying this is safety, this is warmth, this is the Whole.”

When the pearl comes into his possession, Kino forfeits his old life for new dreams; he gains nothing and loses almost everything of real value. When he and Juana return to their village with Coyotito’s body, they have been transformed by grief and seem “removed from human experience.” The pearl, once luminous and enchanting, now seems ugly and gray to Kino, “like a malignant growth.” Standing at the water’s edge, he flings it into the sea “with all his might.” Readers find many meanings in The Pearl, as Steinbeck intended, but the primary truth of the story seems to be a warning as much as a lesson—to be aware of the human drive to want more than we have and to appreciate and protect what is truly valuable in our lives before it is lost.

Before the narrative begins, an introductory paragraph identifies the story of Kino and the great pearl as having been told in the town so many times in the past that it has become a part of every man’s heart and mind. In the story are “only good and bad things and black and white things and good and evil things and no in between anywhere.” Thus the story is a morality tale, a parable perhaps from which readers derive personal meaning. In regard to literary themes, The Pearl offers many themes for readers to consider; each theme develops organically from the setting and raises universal questions about human nature and human experience. That said, however, I think the most important one is this:

Greed and Corruption

As the word spreads that Kino has found a huge pearl, the news of his discovery “stirred up something infinitely black and evil in the town”; greed is a “black distillate” comparable to the poison of a scorpion. It infects rich and poor alike. The beggars in the street, the merchants, the pearl buyers, the doctor, and the local priest—all think of the pearl in terms of how they might profit from Kino’s possessing it. Greed drives some people in the town to commit acts of violence against Kino in attempting to steal the pearl. Blood is shed.

Corruption fueled by greed is evident in individual lives and in society at large. The doctor is corrupted by his love of money and fine possessions; in a silk robe, he sits in his beautiful house, sipping chocolate from a china cup, while he refuses to aid Coyotito, who has been stung by a scorpion. The baby is only an Indian, after all, and the doctor, he insists, is not a “veterinary”; moreover, Coyotito’s father, Kino, has nothing of value to give to the doctor in return for his treating the sick child. Later, the doctor uses his knowledge of medicine to make a recovering Coyotito ill in order to “save” him and gain access to Kino’s pearl. In the cold, calculated perversion of his profession, the doctor exhibits his moral corruption as a physician and as a human being.

The doctor’s attitude toward the native Indian population is rooted in centuries of colonial conquest and subjugation. He is “of a race which for nearly four hundred years had beaten and starved and robbed and despised Kino’s race, and frightened it too ….” The consequence of this history is a corrupt society determined to keep Kino’s people imprisoned by poverty and ignorance. From the pearl buyers in La Paz (secret representatives of a single buyer) who conspire to pay the Indians as little as possible for their pearls to the priest whose sermons admonish the Indians to accept their station in life, the institutions in society work in concert to deny freedom and justice to every member of Kino’s race. In doing so, those in power enrich themselves at the expense of the poor and the powerless.

Greed

Before the pearl, Kino was content with his wife, Juana, and their child. He reflected on how lucky he felt to have such a cheerful and cooperative wife. As long as he had his canoe, he felt like he could provide for his family. The only reason he wanted the pearl was so that he could get medical treatment for his son, but after his son heals, Kino begins thinking about other things he might buy. His friends and neighbors can no longer be trusted as even the priest tries to figure out how to get a share of the profit. When Juana sees that the greed surrounding the pearl is destroying them, she tries to get rid of it. However, Kino catches her. ‘Her arm was up to throw when he leaped at her and caught her arm and wrenched the pearl from her. He struck her in the face with his clenched fist and she fell among the boulders, and he kicked her in the side.’ Kino once valued Juana as his most valued asset, but because of his greed, she became the target of his disgust to the point that he beats her.

Obsession.

In Chapter II, Kino dives for pearls in a desperate attempt to find one of value with which to pay the doctor to treat Coyotito for the scorpion sting that could kill him. Instead, Coyotito’s condition improves, the result of Juana’s treating his wound with an “old remedy,” and Kino finds not just a valuable pearl but “the Pearl of the World.” With these two events, Kino’s life changes dramatically. In the magnificence of the huge, perfect pearl, Kino envisions a future unlike any he had ever dared to imagine; looking into the glowing surface of the pearl, he sees “dreams form”—new clothes for his family, his and Juana’s wedding in the church, a harpoon and a rifle for himself, and most of all, an education for Coyotito. Kino’s contentment with the “Song of the Family” is now lost in “the music of the pearl” that sings with “triumph” in him.

Becoming a rich man changes Kino’s life immediately in ways he does not anticipate as “shadowy figures” attempt to steal the pearl. He is attacked, his home is invaded, and he kills a man in self-defense when he is attacked a second time. When Juana tries to throw the pearl back into the sea, believing that it is evil and will destroy them, Kino beats her with animal savagery and then is sickened by what he has done to her. For Kino, possessing the pearl with all its promises has become an obsession; he pursues it until his and Juana’s old life is destroyed and their baby is dead.

Despite the initial death and destruction the pearl brings into his and Juana’s life, Kino will not give it up. Rather than sell it to the corrupt pearl buyers for essentially nothing, he chooses to defy the system and sell it in the capital for a fair price; after his house has been burned and his canoe destroyed, he still refuses to sell the pearl in La Paz. “This pearl has become my soul,” Kino says. “If I give it up I shall lose my soul.” Leaving the old life behind, he takes Juana and Coyotito on a journey to the capital, leaving the trail and fleeing into the mountains when they are tracked by three men who will kill them for the pearl. Kino prevails over the trackers, killing them all, but his obsession with the pearl ends only when he realizes Coyotito has died, the innocent victim of a rifle shot. Returning to the village with Juana by his side, Kino throws the pearl into the sea.

 

Nature of Power.

Power vs. powerlessness is a theme that runs throughout The Pearl. Kino’s race has been subjugated for centuries by European colonialism. The oyster bed where Kino finds the great pearl is the same bed “that had raised the King of Spain to be a great power in Europe in past years, had helped to pay for his wars, and had decorated the churches for his soul’s sake.” Kino’s conquered people have remained powerless for four hundred years, “since first the strangers came with arguments and authority and gunpowder to back up both.” Once established, the subjugation of the Indians has been perpetuated by society’s ensuring that they remain poor and ignorant. Any desire they might have for a better life is suppressed by the church; the priest in La Paz teaches that each person must “remain faithful” to his station in life, assigned by God, in order to protect the universe from “the assaults of Hell.”

Kino is well aware of how powerless he is in life. After finding the pearl, his dreams of the future include buying a rifle, a weapon that gives a man power. More significantly, however, he dreams of an education for his son. If Coyotito could read, “the boy would know what things were in the books and what things were not.” Kino understands that real power lies in knowledge: “My son will read and open the books, and my son will write and know writing. And my son will make numbers, and these things will make us free because he will know—he will know and through him we will know.” The pearl means more than wealth to Kino; it offers an end to being trapped by ignorance. “This is our one chance,” he tells Juana. “Our son must go to school. He must break out of the pot that holds us in.” In defying the pearl buyers and challenging the system they represent, Kino initiates a power struggle that ultimately ends in Coyotito’s death.

Pride is also an important theme.

Kino’s subjugation by society has not destroyed his pride or self-respect. Only for fear of Coyotito’s dying does he ask, hat in hand, for the doctor’s assistance. When he is turned away with an obvious lie by the doctor’s servant, Kino feels so deeply humiliated he is overcome by rage. He stands at the gate to the doctor’s house for “a long time,” puts his “suppliant hat on his head,” and then strikes the gate with “a crushing blow.” He will not consent to being marginalized; his pride will not allow him to endure passively the doctor’s insult.

Kino’s pride is manifested again in his confrontation with the pearl buyers in La Paz. Knowing that he is being cheated, Kino refuses to sell his pearl to them; in declaring that he will sell the pearl in the capital, Kino asserts his independence and refuses to be humiliated again. Later, when Kino’s house is burned and his canoe destroyed, the loss is more than material. To Juan Tomás Kino says, “[a]n insult has been put on me that is deeper than my life.” Kino’s pride, as much as his desire to secure money for Coyotito’s future, demands that he challenge the system that holds him down. He has no choice, for as he tells Juana, “I am a man.”

In ”The Pearl” by John Steinbeck, the theme of the destructive power of greed is explored as the characters navigate their personal desires, destiny, and racism. We will explore the devastating effect of Kino’s sudden change from being poor but happy, to possibly instantly wealthy.

Sin Brings Destruction

John Steinbeck’s The Pearl is a parable that demonstrates the destructive force of greed. The characters in the story begin as poverty-stricken, but happy. By the end of the story, they have been destroyed by their own greed. It begins when Coyotito, Kino and Juana’s son, is stung by a deadly scorpion, but the doctor refuses to treat him because the family is Indian and has no money. Kino dives for pearls to make money to help his son, but by the time he comes upon a large, magnificent pearl, Coyotito’s health improves. Kino begins to think how he can better the lives of himself and his family, but the greedy pearl buyers try to cheat him. The greed that creeps into the entire city turns friends into enemies. Over time, Kino loses everything for the sake of the pearl. Had Kino continued to remain grateful for his blessings rather than always pursuing more, the pearl would have lost its power to destroy him. The sub-themes of destiny and racism against the indigent people by the European colonists is also addressed. The theme is the main point addressed in a literary work.

Destiny

Kino has been taught his entire life that it is wrong to try to better himself beyond the position in which God placed him. As a child, his father taught him that the reason why pearl divers kept being cheated by agents who promised to get the divers more money for their product at the capital is because ‘…each man and woman is like a soldier sent by God to guard some part of the castle of the Universe. And some are in the ramparts and some far deep in the darkness of the walls. But each one must remain faithful to his post and must not go running about, else the castle is in danger from the assaults of Hell.’ Despite his brother reminding him of this story, Kino persists on getting the best price for his pearl. Kino’s attempt to ‘leave his station’ results in complete destruction of Kino’s family.

Further, the pearl itself is destined to be in the ocean. Terrible things continue to happen to Kino’s family until Kino finally realizes that he needs to return the pearl to its home.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The Pearl Topic Tracking: Evil

Topic Tracking: Evil

Chapter 1

Evil 1: Evil is introduced in the form of the scorpion that stings Coyotito. Until that moment, Kino’s home is peaceful, filled with the Song of Family. But when he spots the scorpion dangling above Coyotito’s bed, Kino recognizes the strains of the Song of Evil that recur throughout the story. The Song of Evil comes when anything threatens the family, and Kino does all that he can to destroy the evil and hush the sinister melody of the Song of Evil so that the Song of Family can return.

Evil 2: Kino hears the Song of Evil again when he and Juana stand at the gates of the doctor’s house. Kino knows that the doctor is of the race that has abused Kino’s own people for four hundred years; despite the fact that they need the doctor’s help, Kino knows that the doctor is still the enemy. He will try to cheat them or abuse them as his people have always done to Kino’s own race.

Chapter 3

Evil 3: The buyers are out to take advantage of Kino and his pearl. Their goal is to cheat him and ruin his plans of happiness and peace for his family.

Evil 4: The doctor comes to take advantage of Kino’s ignorance by making Coyotito sick and pretending that his illness is the result of the scorpion sting. Because Kino and Juana are uneducated, they are afraid to doubt the doctor’s word, and he uses it to profit from their newfound wealth. He pretends as if he doesn’t know of Kino’s pearl, yet the only reason he has condescended to treat an Indian baby was to try and seek out where Kino might be hiding it. The pearl brings evil in the form of greed: many seek to take advantage of Kino’s newfound wealth.

Chapter 4

Evil 5: The buyers work together to cheat Kino of his pearl and intend to give him very little money for it. They have planned to convince him that his pearl is worthless and pretend that they’re doing him a favor by taking it off his hands. The buyers are aware of the pearl’s tremendous value, and intend to con the “uneducated native;” he will trust them because they are the “experts.”

Evil 6: Kino believes that his friends will help protect him from the evils that might befall him because of the pearl, but instead of finding protection with his neighbors, he is attacked. His pearl has turned friends into enemies; they are jealous and envy the pearl of the world that Kino has found.

 

Chapter 5

Evil 7: The pearl turns Juana and Kino against one another. The evil power of the pearl is strong enough to inspire violence between them. Juana and Kino are so close to one another that conversation isn’t even needed, and yet the pearl is able to divide them. It has brought injury and danger, and now it pulls Juana and Kino away from each other.

Evil 8: Kino is forced to kill a man to defend himself and the pearl. Then Kino’s hut is burned after someone searching for the pearl has ransacked it. Those who covet the great pearl destroy everything that Kino and Juana have in their attempts to find it. The Pearl is making everyone turn against them, and Kino and Juana know that they are no longer safe in their village, and must escape.

Chapter 6

Evil 9: Kino looks into the pearl expecting to see visions of the dreams he had the night after he found the pearl, but the only things he sees are the horrible things that have happened to his family since he found the pearl. He begins to realize the evil the pearl contains, but still refuses to give it up.

Evil 10: In a dream, Kino has a premonition of danger. He wakes and discovers trackers are following his family. He knows that they will find them and kill them for the pearl. He feels trapped because there is no way for them to escape the trackers.

Evil 11: In the struggle to protect his family and survive, Kino turns into a killing machine. He attacks, swiftly and brutally, killing all three men who were tracking his family in a quest to steal his great pearl. Kino has been forced to do terrible things to survive and to protect the pearl from being stolen. The pearl’s value has made it evil.

The Pearl Topic Tracking: Family

Chapter 1

Family 1: Kino hears the Song of Family in each routine of his life. Although their life is simple, the rhythm of their habits and the sounds of each part of their lives make up a song that is important to Kino. It fills his ears and he is content with the safe and sturdy song. Kino will protect this song and the family it represents because it is all he has and he loves it.

Chapter 2

Family 2: Kino inherited his canoe, his only thing of value, from his father and grandfather, and it makes him proud. It is his legacy and he takes great care of it because it is the tool he uses to provide for his family. The canoe is the only inheritance he has beyond the songs of his people, and Kino loves his canoe.

Chapter 3

Family 3: Kino cannot take a chance that the doctor is lying to him about Coyotito’s health because he doesn’t want his child to suffer. The doctor takes advantage of a parent’s concern for his child to turn a profit. He knows that Kino will trust enough in the doctor’s knowledge to allow him to treat Coyotito because Kino is unsure that the baby is healed.

Chapter 4

Family 4: Kino won’t give up the pearl even though it’s brought nothing but pain because he sees its value as a chance to provide for his son’s education, allowing him to escape their simple life. Kino does not want those with a formal education to take advantage of Coyotito, like they do to other uneducated natives. He wants more for his son and his family than their simple life, and the pearl is the key to those aspirations.

Chapter 5

Family 5: The pearl that Kino expected to protect his family is now tearing it apart. Juana warns Kino that the pearl will destroy their family, but Kino refuses to believe it because he thinks that the wealth the pearl offers is the best way to protect his family. He thinks that by keeping the pearl, he is doing what is best for his family, but the pearl is only pushing him and Juana apart. If it is dividing them, it cannot protect the family from harm. It only makes life more precarious for them.

Family 6: Juan Tomas helps his brother in every way that he can, by diverting the neighbors and gathering supplies for Kino’s journey. Juan knows that the pearl has brought evil onto his brother’s family, and he does all the he can to help them escape from it, but he cannot convince Kino to get rid of the pearl.

Chapter 6

Family 7: As Kino, Juana, and Coyotito are making their escape, Kino believes that his family will triumph because they seem to be getting away. He begins to believe that everything will work out; the pearl promises security and peace, and they will escape the bad luck that has plagued them since he found the pearl. He believes that now his family will prosper.

Family 8: Kino considers giving himself up to the trackers because there is no way that he and his family can get away from them. The thought momentarily defeats him, until Juana reminds him that the trackers will kill her and Coyotito as well, and that prods Kino into action.

Family 9: In the midst of danger, their survival depends on keeping the baby quiet through the night. If he cries, their hiding place is given away, but if he can keep silent, perhaps Kino will be able to disarm the men and secure his family’s escape.

Family 10: Juana was right from the beginning — the pearl did destroy their son. The trackers who were following them kill Coyotito. Kino’s insistence that the pearl would find peace and happiness for his family costs Coyotito his life and leaves a hole in their family that would not have been there had Kino never found the pearl.

The Pearl Topic Tracking: Superstition

Chapter 1

Superstition 1: When Coyotito is in danger of being stung by the scorpion, Juana mutters an ancient magic incantation and then some Hail Marys to protect her son. The ancient, superstitious religion of the peasantry has been mixed with the Catholicism of the Western upper class. Juana appeals to native gods and the Western God, uncertain of which holds the true power. This mingling of a polytheistic religion with Roman Catholicism is common in native countries that are colonized. The natives combine the gods of their own religion with the figures of Catholicism. Elements of their original faith remain, such as incantations like the one Juana mutters.

Chapter 2

Superstition 2: Juana prays that Kino will find a pearl so that they can have Coyotito’s scorpion sting treated by the doctor. She prays in an attempt to force from the gods the luck she and Kino need to take care of Coyotito. Finding a pearl of value is strictly luck. Pearls themselves are accidental, and finding a pearl is considered a gift from the gods or God.

Superstition 3: When Kino finds the large shell, he is reluctant to open it first because he doesn’t want to show the gods or God that he wants the pearl so much. He believes that if he wants it too much, it won’t happen, and so he waits to open the shell.

Chapter 3

Superstition 4: Kino worries that the gods will get revenge against him if he finds success. He knows that the gods hate when men plan for success, and now that Kino is making plans, he fears that something will come and rob him of this opportunity.

Superstition 5: Juana believes that the pearl is cursed because it has brought an intruder into their home. She warns Kino that it will destroy them all, including their son, if they don’t throw it back into the sea, but Kino won’t listen. His desire to use the pearl to educate his son and make a better life for his family is too strong. He ignores Juana’s warning and keeps the pearl.

 

 

 

Chapter 4

Superstition 6: Juana still believes that the pearl is cursed, and she asks Kino to throw it back into the sea again, but he refuses. He insists that it is their only chance and he won’t give it up. Juana, however, knows that the pearl will only bring more evil and disaster to them, and decides she must take matters into her own hands, and get rid of the pearl.

Chapter 5

Superstition 7: Juana decides that if Kino won’t get rid of the cursed pearl, she will. She takes the pearl and tries to throw it back into the sea to protect her family from any more danger, but Kino stops her. Her fear of the pearl is well-founded; Kino beats her for trying to get rid of the pearl, further proving that the pearl is cursed and evil. It has made Kino attack and harm the one person he loves most.

Superstition 8: Juan warns Kino that the pearl is cursed and that he must get rid of it to pass the evil on to someone else. He hopes that Kino can sell it soon so that the evil of the pearl will not destroy his family before Kino can rid himself of it.

Chapter 6

Superstition 9: When Kino looks into the pearl and sees only the tragedies that have befallen his family, he begins to believe that the pearl is cursed, but he still cannot part with it.

Superstition 10: Kino and Juana throw the pearl back into the sea after Coyotito is killed by the trackers. The cursed pearl has brought about the death of their child and forced Kino to kill to survive and protect his family. The great pearl has brought nothing but misery to Kino and his family, and together they throw the cursed object back into the sea. As it sinks, the music of the pearl turns to a whisper and then disappears.

 

The Pearl Major Characters

Kino: Kino is a young pearl diver who feels his obligation to his family very strongly. He knows his place as the provider and works hard to supply for his family’s needs. He finds The Pearl of the World and expects to use it to pay for his son, Coyotito’s, education. He also dreams that with the pearl he can buy his family new clothes and a rifle for himself, but the pearl only brings him trouble. His neighbors turn on him and try to steal the pearl from him and he has to leave his home after killing an attacker. Although it was self-defense, he knows that his family is in danger. He and Juana run away with Coyotito, but trackers follow them. He knows that they are after the pearl and that they will catch his family, so he sneaks into their camp and kills them all. In the shooting that goes on in the camp, a stray bullet kills his son. He and Juana return to La Paz with their dead child and they throw the pearl into the sea.

Juana: Juana is Kino’s strong, quiet wife who takes care of her family. The rhythm of her motions is the Song of Family for Kino. She obeys her husband in most instances, but when she realizes that the pearl is only bringing trouble to her family, she urges him to throw it away. He refuses, and while he sleeps, she takes the pearl to the beach and is about to throw it in, when Kino catches her and beats her for taking the pearl. She accompanies her husband out of La Paz and urges him again to get rid of the cursed pearl, but he won’t until their son, Coyotito, is accidentally shot by a tracker’s rifle. After the tragedy, Kino and Juana walk side by side back to La Paz and throw the pearl into the sea together.

Coyotito: Coyotito is Kino and Juana’s first-born child who is stung by a scorpion and needs medical treatment. Unfortunately, the local doctor will not treat the baby because Kino has no money. When the doctor hears about Kino’s pearl, he comes to treat Coyotito. Kino expects that the pearl will purchase great things for his family, the greatest being an education for his son so that they cannot be cheated by the merchants and the other upper class citizens of La Paz who have taken advantage of Kino’s people for four hundred years. But that great dream is destroyed when Coyotito is killed by a gunshot while Kino is killing the trackers who are following them. Kino killed them to protect his family and the pearl and the dream of the future that the pearl provided, but his dream and his family are destroyed when Coyotito dies. Kino and Juana return to La Paz with Coyotito’s small body and throw the pearl into the sea.

Minor Characters

Juan Tomas: Juan Tomas is Kino’s older brother. Juan gives Kino advice about selling the pearl. He walks beside Kino when they travel to the pearl buyers. Later, he warns his brother that by refusing to sell his pearl to the buyers, Kino is defying their way of life and putting his family in danger. When Kino seeks refuge with Juan Tomas, he is granted it. Juan gathers supplies that Kino and Juana will need on their journey and protects his brother’s family until they depart.

Apolonia: Apolonia is Juan Tomas’ wife. She follows her husband as he escorts Kino into town to sell the pearl, and she raises a formal mourning when Kino’s hut burns and no sign of them is found.

Doctor: The doctor is wealthier than the peasants of La Paz, and he scoffs at natives, like Kino and Juana, who seek his treatment without money. When Kino and Juana brought Coyotito to the doctor to heal the scorpion sting, he refused them. Later, when he heard that Kino had found the Pearl of the World, he came to their hut to treat the baby. He pretended not to know that Kino had found a great pearl, so that when Kino talked about it, he could watch to see if his eyes went to the spot where it was buried in the hut. Sure enough, Kino gave its location away and that night someone came to his hut to dig out the pearl, but Kino had since moved it. Kino stabbed at the intruder, but did not make a fatal swing and the intruder (possibly the doctor) hit him in the head and then escaped.

Trackers: Two trackers and a man with a rifle followed Kino and Juana out of La Paz. Kino saw them coming while Juana hid in the woods. When Kino realized that they were tracking him, he and Juana hurried up to the smooth rocks of the mountains so that they would be harder to follow. When night fell, the trackers were just below the cave in which Kino, Juana, and Coyotito were hiding. Kino sneaked down the sheer face of the mountain and into their camp and killed them all. In the chaos, Coyotito was shot and killed.

The Priest: The priest was the local religious authority, and when he learned of Kino’s pearl, he hoped that he could convince Kino to use his wealth for the good of the church. He made a visit to Kino’s hut that night to talk to Kino about his duty to give part of his wealth to God, who had ultimately created the pearl.

The Buyers: The pearl buyers of the town acted as if they worked for themselves, but they were actually all controlled by one man. The pretense of competition among the pearl buyers made it easier to cheat the Indians out of their pearls. By putting on a show of competing over the best price, the man in charge and the buyers were adept at ripping off the natives. When they told Kino that his great pearl was worth only a thousand pesos, he got angry and left to take the pearl to the capital. That night, Kino’s family was attacked in their home, and he believed that the buyers were responsible for it.

The Pearl Objects/Places

Scorpion: The scorpion introduces the Song of Evil for Kino because it threatens the safety of his family. When the scorpion stings Coyotito before Kino can get to it, it introduces pain and panic.

Song of Family: The Song of Family is the rhythm that Kino hears in the life of his family, and in their routines. It’s the music of their life together and reflects their peaceful interaction with one another, even in silence.

Song of Evil: The Song of Evil is the thundering that he hears whenever something threatens his family. The Song of Evil plays when the scorpion threatens his son and the thieves attack his family.

Song of the Pearl that Might Be: The Song of the Pearl that Might Be is what Kino hears when he is diving for pearls. This is the sound of his own hope that he will find a great pearl that will provide his family with luxury and peace.

The Pearl of the World: Kino found a great and beautiful pearl, The Pearl of the World, and it created its own music in his life. He hoped to use the pearl to buy his family new clothes and a rifle for himself. He also wanted to send Coyotito to school so that he could learn to read and become educated. Coyotito could then know what was in the great books, and could no longer be cheated by wealthy, educated people. Despite the high hopes Kino had for his family after finding the pearl, it brought them only grief. Neighbors began trying to steal it in the night and Kino killed a villager who attacked him for the pearl. To protect his family, Kino is forced to escape the village. Trackers, lusting after the pearl, followed Kino and his family. Kino, knowing the trackers will kill him and his family, attacked. During the fight, Coyotito was shot by the tracker’s rifle. The pearl that once promised peace and prosperity brought Kino and Juana only tragedy. They returned to La Paz and threw it back into the sea.

Kino’s Canoe: Kino’s canoe was the one thing of value he owned until he found the pearl. He inherited the canoe from his father and grandfather and took excellent care of it. Kino used the boat to provide for his family. After he found the pearl, someone put a hole in the bottom of his canoe, forcing Kino and Juana to escape La Paz on foot. Kino was sad at the loss of his boat because it was a part of his heritage.

STYLE AND LANGUAGE USE

The Pearl is a short novel. Its plot is well defined, the action moves forward within a structure of six chapters, it has a core of central characters, and the suspense builds as the story moves along. Readers say the sentences reflect the spoken quality of the New Testament-perhaps an influence of Steinbeck’s early reading of the Bible. The author has chosen his words with precision, a skill he developed in part by working as a journalist.

In the preface to The Pearl you learn that the story will be told in the form of a parable. A parable is a short work, usually fictitious, that illustrates a lesson, often on the subject of good and evil. This is reminiscent of the New Testament, where many of Christ’s lessons are told in parable form. The biblical tone is underscored by Steinbeck’s mention in the preface of the struggle between good and evil.

Also, like the Bible (and traditional folktales), The Pearl contains little dialogue. The characters speak infrequently, but their thoughts and feelings are made clear through Steinbeck’s powerful descriptions. He excelled at selecting the exact word and correct turn of phrase-and his lack of dialogue emphasizes the quiet intensity and simple manner of his characters. Their nonverbal quality helps to reinforce their discomfort in the presence of the sophisticated doctor, priest, and pearl buyers, who are experts at using language.

The Pearl contains many scientific metaphors and similes-figures of speech used to compare one object with another in order to suggest a similarity between them. For example, the Indian village is compared to the habitat of a colonial animal.

POINT OF VIEW

The Pearl is told by a third-person narrator who stands outside the action and knows everything about the characters and their actions. The narrator is said to be omniscient, which means all-knowing. In the introduction and in the final passage of the novel, the narrator speaks of events that happened long ago and have become important through repetition: “And because the story has been told so often, it has taken root in every man’s mind.”

For most of the novel, the narrator abandons the past and takes you directly into the present. This is the advantage of his omniscience: he can move back and forth, from past to present to future, whenever a different focus will help you understand his story. Perhaps the most gripping narrative in the present is the one where Kino attacks and kills the trackers. In this passage, you feel you are part of the action-as if you were standing next to Kino.

The movement from distant narration of the past to close-up narration that seems to recount the present may seem inconsistent. But remember that Steinbeck is trying to tell an old tale in the form of a novel. He needs a narrator who can communicate both the immediate action of the novel’s plot and the universal nature of the tale (or parable).

The third-person narrative is also flexible in its focus on characters. It allows you to change perspectives and to judge the characters for their individual thoughts and actions. The thoughts and actions of characters are not filtered through the intelligence of one person, as in a first-person narration, but are presented reasonably objectively and with the wide-ranging facts available to an omniscient narrator.

FORM AND STRUCTURE

An important novel can usually be interpreted on many levels, and this is certainly the case with The Pearl. The book’s structure is as simple as the legend, or folktale, on which it is based: It begins and ends with Kino as an impoverished fisherman who, in the process of pursuing his dream, is nearly destroyed. Readers often speak of The Pearl as an allegory or a parable.

An allegory is a story meant to teach a spiritual or moral lesson, in which the characters and action symbolize abstract concepts. A parable is a short allegory, which has long been associated with the New Testament. Christ used parables to teach moral lessons (for example, the Good Samaritan and the lesson of the Talents).

Some readers see The Pearl as an allegory of social oppression. In this view, Juan Tomas is a symbol of the ancient Indian wisdom, Kino is a symbol of the Indians’ desire for freedom, and the doctor, priest, and pearl buyers are symbols of the oppressive Spanish culture. The pearl represents Kino’s means of escaping oppression, but the powerful forces of the social system are too strong for even the pearl to overcome. When Kino throws his great treasure back into the sea, the message seems to be that the poor Indian doesn’t have a chance.

Other readers see in The Pearl a strong allegorical message about human greed. Kino becomes the symbol of the poor but happy man who is destroyed when he begins to want the things of the material world. The pearl that was supposed to bring happiness and fulfillment brings only destruction. At the end both Kino’s dream and his son are dead.

In the original story on which Steinbeck based his own, the fisher sees the pearl as a means of saving his soul through the purchase of Roman Catholic masses “sufficient to pop him out of Purgatory like a squeezed watermelon seed.” (Purgatory, in Catholicism, is the temporary place or condition where the repentant sinner is absolved after death, and where mortal sins are punished before the soul can attain salvation.) When the fisher decides to throw the pearl back, he feels like a “free man” despite the insecurity of both his soul and his future.

In the novel, Kino says that the pearl has become his soul. This closely echoes the Gospel According to Matthew in the New Testament, in which the Kingdom of Heaven is compared to a “pearl of great price.” If the pearl is seen as a symbol of salvation, what is the meaning of its loss at the end? Is Kino, like the fisherman of the original story, lucky to return to a state of simple human happiness and poverty? Or is he denied a soul as punishment for his reliance on material things, or for his daring to overreach his lowly status?

In his preface to The Pearl, Steinbeck says: “If the story is a parable, perhaps everyone takes his own meaning from it….” It’s up to you to decide whether the
story is a parable, and what meaning you derive from it. In order to be effective, the true parable or allegory must attempt to resolve a conflict in such a way that a consistent interpretation or conclusion can be drawn. Do you think there is one such consistent meaning? Or, do you think the novel can be interpreted on many levels?

 

. A STEP BEYOND

TESTS AND ANSWERS

TEST 1

_____ 1. The songs in The Pearl represent

  1. unspoken feelings and emotions
    B. domination by the Spanish
    C. the poetry Kino has inherited from his ancestors

_____ 2. Which of the following similes does Steinbeck use to describe the relationship of the townspeople?

  1. Each man’s life is like a station in God’s army.
    B. The pearl is like a curse.
    C. The town is like a colonial animal.

_____ 3. After finding the pearl in the path, Juana didn’t throw it back in the water because

  1. she was afraid of getting hit again
    B. Kino stopped her again
    C. she knew the old way was gone when she saw the dead man
 
Your browser does not support the IFRAME tag.

_____ 4. Before Kino finds the pearl, his life might be described as

  1. filled with want and despair
    B. simple and relatively content
    C. monotonous and uncomfortable

_____ 5. The image of big fish eating little fish is symbolic of the relationship between the

  1. Spanish and the Indians
    B. pearl buyers and their unseen boss
    C. trackers and Kino

_____ 6. Which of the following religious references is not appropriate to The Pearl?

  1. the Abraham and Isaac story
    B. the miracle of the loaves and the fishes
    C. the expulsion from the Garden of Eden

_____ 7. When Kino punches the doctor’s gate, you can tell he

  1. has planned the action of protest from the beginning
    B. has been provoked to this kind of violent expression before
    C. surprises himself with the violence of his reaction

_____ 8. In the story of the two villagers who had gone to the capital to sell pearls, it was certain that they had

  1. fled with the profits
    B. been in the employ of the Spanish
    C. never been seen again that

_____ 9. The doctor’s actions are meant to suggest that

  1. this is the way the Spanish generally treat the Indians
    B. he is incompetent and has no business treating the baby
    C. he is different from the other Spanish

_____ 10. Which of the following is not true about Kino’s canoe?

  1. It was passed down to him from his grandfather.
    B. It had been blessed by the priest.
    C. It was the one thing of value owned by Kino.
  2. Why is Kino’s dream of educating Coyotito such a dangerous one?
  3. What role does Juan Tomas play?
  4. Explain the symbolism of the pearl.

TEST 2

_____ 1. When Kino said, “I am a man,” Juana knew this meant that he

  1. no longer needed her
    B. would leave the old way of life
    C. was half insane and half god

_____ 2. Steinbeck uses which of the following images in his description of the Indian trackers to suggest that they were dehumanized?

  1. excited dogs
    B. crying coyotes
    C. scavenger birds

_____ 3. Kino beats Juana for stealing the pearl because

  1. she has disobeyed him
    B. her actions have threatened his dream
    C. she has overstepped her place as a woman

_____ 4. From his experiences in the world, Kino learns that the

  1. established system is the best way of doing things
    B. potential for evil lies within everyone
    C. priest was right all along

_____ 5. Which of the following images does Steinbeck use to describe Kino and Juana when they return to the village at the end?

  1. scorpions
    B. scuttling crabs
    C. towers of darkness

_____ 6. The priest’s visit to Kino’s hut is unusual because

  1. the priest rarely visited the Indians
    B. Kino was not Roman Catholic
    C. it was Sunday
 
Your browser does not support the IFRAME tag.

_____ 7. Which of the following is central to the theme of appearance vs. reality?

  1. the mirages on the Gulf
    B. the image of the mountains
    C. the deceit of the pearl buyers

_____8. Whenever Kino deals with the Spanish, he feels

  1. disgust and superiority
    B. pity and contempt
    C. fear and anger

_____ 9. Juan Tomas hesitates to help Kino because he

  1. thinks Kino is wrong to challenge the system
    B. is afraid the trouble caused by the pearl will spread to him
    C. believes helping is not part of Indian customs

_____ 10. The extensive use of animal imagery in Chapter VI suggests that Kino

  1. has been dehumanized by the ordeal of the pearl
    B. is now outside of the natural world
    C. is worth less than an animal
  2. Choose one biological comparison from The Pearl and explain its use.
  3. Some readers see The Pearl as an allegory on greed. Support or refute this interpretation, citing examples from the novel.
  4. How does the point of view (narrative) of The Pearl work to make the story seem like a retold tale?

ANSWERS

TEST 1

  1. A
    2. C
    3. C
    4. B
    5. A
    6. B
    7. C
    8. C
    9. A
    10. B
  2. The ruling class, descended from the Spanish, controlled the Indians by keeping them poor and ignorant. If Coyotito were sent to school to learn “what is in the books,” he could challenge the authority of the system. He could also educate the other Indians and make them aware of ways they might fight their oppressors.

One scene that might be useful to review is the doctor’s visit to Kino’s hut in Chapter VI. There, you see firsthand how the doctor manipulates Kino through the Indian’s ignorance. Kino wants to throw the doctor out, but he can’t because he doesn’t know if the doctor is lying about the effects of the scorpion sting. The doctor would not have been able to carry off the capsule scene with an educated person. It is this kind of control over the Indians that educating Coyotito would change, and it is too threatening for the Spanish upper class to allow.

Another scene you might want to review is the scene at the pearl buyers. Kino’s people have been dealing with pearls for centuries and certainly know the look of a valuable pearl. Yet they allow the pearl buyers’ tricks to make them doubt their own judgment. If Coyotito were educated, he would be in a position to fight such financial exploitation.

 
Your browser does not support the IFRAME tag.
  1. Juan Tomas is the voice of the Indians who have survived oppression, the voice of experience. He doesn’t try to stop Kino from making the dream of the pearl come true, but he does try to warn Kino that he has overestimated the powers of friendship and underestimated the dangers against him.

One place to look for details is the trip to the pearl buyers in Chapter IV. On the way, Juan Tomas reviews the situation and warns Kino that he might be cheated. He also tries to put the event in the context of tradition. It is here that Juan Tomas reminds Kino of the priest’s sermon about other men who have sought to bypass the pearl buyers. Later on, when Kino says he will go to the capital, Juan Tomas warns him that he will be leaving family and friends. Here you see the concept of mi tierra, the ancient attachment to the place of birth, spoken by Juan Tomas. He is the spokesman for traditional Indian ways.

  1. The pearl functions as a symbol on many levels. In your answer, you may want to consider the pearl as a symbol of human greed, dreams of the future, and the human soul. The idea of human greed is first developed at the beginning of Chapter III with the description of the pearl’s effect on the people of the town. In discussing dreams of the future, include the list of Kino’s dreams or visions, as related in Chapter III. For Kino the pearl is the key to attaining these dreams. In terms of the human soul, before Kino leaves for the mountains, he tells Juan Tomas, “This pearl has become my soul.” This may mean that the pearl and its visions have taken over Kino’s true soul, driving him to go against hopeless forces and to sacrifice his own family. It may also mean that Kino’s only hope for dignity (his own and his people’s) lies in the pearl, and without it he is less than a man.

Whatever aspect of the pearl’s meaning you discuss, you should account for the significance of Kino’s throwing it back in the water at the end. Also, be sure to include in your answer the contrast between the pearl’s great value, beauty, and promise and its ultimate role as a catalyst of envy, greed, and destruction.

TEST 2

  1. C
    2. A
    3. B
    4. B
    5. C
    6. A
    7. A
    8. C
    9. B
    10. A
  2. There are two main biological comparisons in The Pearl. One compares the effect of the pearl to the scorpion’s poison at the beginning of Chapter III. This comparison suggests that greed and evil are possible within each person and can come to the surface under certain circumstances. The pearl is a catalyst that brings out such characteristics in people. Steinbeck might even be suggesting that the tendency to greed and evil is inborn, a part of human nature.

The other biological comparison equates the town with a “colonial animal.” This metaphor reinforces Steinbeck’s claim that humans, as well as other species, are interconnected. Nothing happens to one person (a part of the village) alone. For example, Kino alone finds the pearl, but the pearl affects everyone in the village. The village itself behaves like a single organism whose single parts (each inhabitant) react to a stimulus and together contribute to the reaction of the whole (the village).

  1. The greed that you witness throughout the novel, along with Kino’s final gesture of renunciation, certainly suggest that the novel can be read as a warning about the burden of money and possessions. The valuable pearl brings Kino and his family to destruction. There are, however, points of conflicting evidence to suggest the beneficial aspects of material wealth. For example, Steinbeck suggests that greed is part of human nature and that it has both good and bad aspects. Greed makes a man look beyond himself to larger possibilities, as well as making him greedy covet the things of others. On the positive side, it is a good sign that human beings are always eager for improvements in their lives. This helps to assure the progress of humanity.

As a second example, Kino is humiliated and powerless in the face of the people of Spanish descent. If Steinbeck were trying to make antimaterialism his major theme, he probably would not have made Kino’s fear and rage seem so justified a response to oppression.

  1. Technically, the story of Kino is told by a third-person, omniscient narrator. This narrator speaks from a distance, especially in the introduction and at the end, to give the feeling of an old, retold tale. In other words, rather than hearing a firsthand story that the narrator has personally experienced, you are hearing a story told to the narrator. As the novel progresses, the point of view sometimes becomes more immediate in order to take the reader into the action (the way a movie camera does when it zooms in close). It seems as if the narrator is relating the events as they are happening. In Chapter VI, for example, you seem to be directly involved in the flight of Kino and Juana. Throughout The Pearl, the narrator moves back and forth between “close-up” action and distant storytelling

THEMES

  1. Explain the theme of class struggle in The Pearl.
  2. Discuss the development of social consciousness in The Pearl.
  3. Develop one theme that might come from a feminist reading of The Pearl.
  4. How is the theme of appearance vs. reality developed in the novel?
  5. Describe the role of religion, in general, and the Catholic Church, in particular.
  6. Discuss The Pearl as an anticapitalist novel.

 

 

 

  • FORM AND STRUCTURE
  1. Discuss how the parable form is used in The Pearl.
  2. Discuss the use of Steinbeck’s preface as a technique in the novel. What is its purpose and effect?
  3. Describe the biblical motifs in The Pearl and explain their effects.
  4. Describe the biological metaphor of the “colonial animal” in The Pearl and explain its purpose.

GLOSSARY – VOCABULARY LIST

ALGAE – Water plants without true roots or stems, such as seaweed.

BOUGAINVILLAEA – Tropical shrub with inconspicuous flowers surrounded by large purple or red leaves.

BULWARK – A wall-like structure, like a breakwater, raised for defense.

CACTI – Plural of cactus, a thorny desert plant.

CATALYST – Something (or someone) that hastens or brings about a change or a result.

CONFESSION – In the Catholic Church the admission of sins to a priest in order to gain forgiveness.

EGGSHELL CHINA – Very delicate porcelain that is so thin it is translucent.

ESCARPMENT – Steep slope formed by erosion or a break in the earth.

ESTUARY – Wide mouth of a river where the sea tide meets the river current.

INCANDESCENCE – Emission by a hot body of radiation that makes it visible.

INDIGENE – Native plant or animal.

LEGERDEMAIN – Deceptive performance that depends on manual dexterity; trickery or deceit.

MANGROVES – Tropical trees and shrubs that tend to grow together in thick masses in swampy areas.

MONOLITHIC – Made from a single piece of stone; suggesting an unyielding quality.

PEARL OF THE WORLD -Ideal pearl; largest and most beautiful pearl in the world.

POULTICE – Moist mass of cloth or vegetable matter (like herbs) applied to a sore or inflammation for medicinal purposes.

PRECIPITATE – To separate the solid part out from a solution or the substance separated out.

PULQUE – Fermented drink made from agave plants, popular in Mexico.

SEED PEARLS – Very small pearls that resemble grain or seeds in size and form.

STATION (OF THE VIRGIN) – Shrine dedicated to the Virgin Mary, to which religious pilgrimages are made.

SUPPLIANT – One who asks earnestly or begs.

WINCHESTER CARBINE – Short-barreled, lever-action rifle usually used for deer and big game, famous for its power and accuracy.

REFERENCE

THE CRITICS

THE SOURCE OF THE PEARL

Steinbeck nurtured the fable he heard in Mexico four years before he consciously began to develop it. The moral-that the finder of the pearl would be “free” only when he was rid of it-probably was the original inspiration because it accorded with Steinbeck’s earlier beliefs that money and possessions are an intolerable burden, though he himself saw no conflict in carrying that burden. As he imagined the characters involved, they grew and changed shape; they became part of Steinbeck’s story as distinct from the legend. In changing, of course, they also shaped the story into something unlike the tale as Steinbeck first heard it.

Richard O’Connor, John Steinbeck, 1970

STEINBECK’S STYLE

However meaningful the parable of the pearl may be in the abstract, Steinbeck’s success in fleshing out this parable to the dimensions of a credible, forceful human adventure ultimately rests on his prose style, which is flexible to the extent that here as in most of his other novels it becomes technique as well as medium. It is capable not only of creating an aura of symbolic suggestion, but also of rendering details in terms of a camera.

Peter Lisca, The Wide World of John Steinbeck, 1958

THE PEARL AS SENTIMENTAL

Steinbeck is trying in The Pearl to create a drama of the growth of conscious responsibility, but Kino’s act of throwing away the pearl doesn’t settle things for him as it did for the legendary fisherboy. The source offered a perfect tale of a man who consciously weighed the odds and chose hard work and poverty over being pestered all the time-a story that would have made a wonderfully tough-minded companion piece to Cannery Row.

Steinbeck, however, decided to give the legend some sentimental twists without realizing all the revisions that his first changes would necessitate. Perhaps such a basically fantastic, sentimental story does not warrant such strong condemnation; but The Pearl has been widely used as an introduction to fiction, and it provides the kind of introduction that is a disservice to its author-who wrote much better, controlled works-and to fiction itself by failing to suggest the tough-minded complexity of the greatest examples of the art.

Warren French, John Steinbeck, 1975

THE PEARL AS AN ALLEGORY

Kino is identified symbolically with low animal orders: he must rise early and he must root in the earth for sustenance; but the simple, pastoral life has the beauty of the stars, the dawn, and the singing, happy birds. Yet provided also is a realistic description of village life on the fringe of La Paz. Finally, we should observe that the allegory too has begun. The first sentence-“Kino has awakened in the near dark”- is a statement of multiple allegorical significance. Kino is what modern sociologists are fond of calling a primitive. As such, he comes from a society that is in its infancy; or, to paraphrase Steinbeck, it is in the dark or near-dark intellectually, politically, theologically, and sociologically. But the third sentence tells us that the roosters have been crowing for some time, and we are to understand that Kino has heard the cock of progress crow. He will begin to question the institutions that have kept him primitive: medicine, the church, the pearl industry, the government. The allegory operates then locally, dealing with at first one person, Kino, and then with his people, the Mexican peasants of Lower California. But the allegory works also universally, and Kino is Everyman. The darkness in which he awakes is one of the spirit. The cock crow is one of warning that the spirit must awake to its own dangers.

Harry Morris, “The Pearl: Realism and Allegory” from Steinbeck: A Collection of Critical Essays, 1972

Transcript of Literary Devices in The Pearl

Literary devices in The Pearl. Simlie Metaphor This is how big the pearl was when Kino opened it. He says is was a very large pearl “It was as large as a sea-gull’s egg.” Page 26. “He was an animal now, for hiding, for attacking, and he lived only to preserve himself and his family.” Page 69. This quote is a metaphor because it is comparing Kino to an animal who protects his family. Personification “The nerves of the town were pulsing and vibrating with the news” Page 27 This quote is personification because it says that the town was pulsing and vibrating but towns cant do that. The author was giving the town a human charcteristic. Symbol The scorpion symbolizes evil because Coyotito was stung in Chapter 1 and scorpions are generally thought of as evil. This starts destruction in the family which leds to Kino’s accidents.

Jesma exams class 8 Free download

Jesma exams class 8 Free downloads

Here is a collection of the latest Mentor Series Exams with Marking Schemes for Class 8 KCPE Revision Exams. Remember to download more free secondary and primary teachers’ resources here; TEACHERS’ RESOURCES PORTAL.

CLASS 8 FREE MENTOR SERIES KCPE REVISION EXAMS

ENGLISH MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

MATHEMATICS MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

KISWAHILI MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

SOCIAL STUDIES AND RELIGION MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

MATHS MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

MENTOR SERIES EXAMS MARKING SCHEMES IN PDF.

SCIENCE MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF

ALSO DOWNLOAD;

CLASS 8 KCPE REVISION PAPERS; FREE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS DOWNLOADS

Free KCPE past papers, class 8 exams and revision materials

Class 8 free notes and exams (KCPE)

Class 8 free latest schemes of work downloads

Schemes of work class 5, 6, 7, and 8 term 1 to 3

Targeter series class 8 exams

Targeter series class 8 exams

Targeter series 2 class 8 exams

Class 8 Targeter, Jesma free exams with marking schemes

Jesma exams class 8 pdf

Free Grade 1 Rationalized CBC Notes

Here are the latest Grade 1 Rationalized Notes Free Downloads:

Free grade-1-hygiene-and-nutrition-notes-cbc-curriculum

Free GRADE-1-REVISION-BOOKLET

Free grade-1-art-and-craft-lesson-notes

Free grade-1-hygiene-and-nutrition-lesson-notes-VERSION-2

Free Grade-1-Creative-Arts-Notes

Free Grade-1-CRE-Notes GRADE-1-CRE-NOTES-1

Get Free grade-8-rationalised-social-studies-schemes-of-work-term-2-updated (3) and all other CBC Notes on this site.

Form 1 English Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Form 1 English Exams and Marking Schemes Free

 

NAME………………………………ADM NO…………………..

CLASS………………………………..DATE……………………..

 

ENGLISH

FORM ONE

TERM 3

TIME: 2 ½ HRS

JOINT EXAMINATION

 ENGLISH FORM ONE TERM 3 2023

INSTRUCTIONS

  1. Write your name, admission number, class and date in the spaces provided.
  2. Confirm that you have all the questions.
  3. Answer all questions in the spaces provided.

 

FOR EXAMINER’S USE ONLY.

 

QUESTION MAXIMUM SCORE STUDENT’S SCORE
1.     WRITING 20  
2.     COMPREHENSION PASSAGE 20  
3.     CLOZE TEST 10  
4.     ORAL SKILLS 20  
5.     GRAMMAR 30  
TOTAL 100  
  1. WRITING

Your mother has planned to do an end of year shopping for everyone in the family.

  • Make an inventory of at least five items that you have. (10 mks)
  • ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
  • Make a shopping list of the items you wish her to buy for you. (10 mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. COMPREHENSION PASSAGE

Read the passage below and answer the questions that follow. (20 marks)

The human body can tolerate only a small range of temperature, especially when the person is engaged in vigorous activity. Heat reactions usually occur when large amounts of water and/or salt are lost through excessive sweating following strenuous exercise. When the body becomes overheated and cannot eliminate this excess heat, heat exhaustion and heat stroke are possible.

Heat exhaustion is generally characterized by clammy skin, fatigue, nausea, dizziness, profuse perspiration, and sometimes fainting, resulting from an inadequate intake of water and the loss of fluids. First aid treatment for this condition includes having the victim lie down, raising the feet 8 to 12 inches, applying cool, wet cloths to the skin, and giving the victim sips of salt water (1 teaspoon per glass, half a glass every 15 minutes) over a 1-hour period.

Heat stroke is much more serious; it is an immediate life-threatening situation. The characteristics of heat stroke are a high body temperature (which may reach 106° F or more); a rapid pulse; hot, dry skin; and a blocked sweating mechanism. Victims of this condition may be unconscious, and first-aid measures should be directed at quickly cooling the body. The victim should be placed in a tub of cold water or repeatedly sponged with cool water until his or her temperature is sufficiently lowered. Fans or air conditioners will also help with the cooling process. Care should be taken, however, not to over-chill the victim once the temperature is below 102° F.

  • When, according to the passage, do heat reactions occur? 2 mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • What happens when the body is unable to eliminate excess heat? (2 mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  • What may cause fainting in the case of heat exhaustion, according to the passage?(2 mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • State the first aid treatment for heat exhaustion. (4mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • How can a heat reactionof a victim’s body be cooled? (3 mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Why should care be taken when cooling a victim’s temperature? (1 mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Write in singular. (1mk)

Fans or air conditioners will also help with the cooling process.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • What is the passage about? (2 mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Explain the meaning of the following words as used in the passage. (3 mks)

Perspiration               …………………………………………………………………

Mechanism                 …………………………………………………………………

Excess                        …………………………………………………………………

 

  1. CLOZE TEST

Fill in the gaps in the following passage with the most appropriate word. (10marks)

Jane was walking to her class slowly. She was worried 1__________ the English test she would have to take that morning. As she was reaching the classroom, a piece of paper suddenly fluttered down and landed near her feet. As Jane glanced down at the paper, her heart nearly 2__________ a beat. It was the English test paper complete 3____________ answers!

4___________ very first thought was not to 5____________ anyone about what she had found. She would memorize 6_____________ the answers and do extremely7_____________ in the test. After all, she had not revised for the test. After some hard thinking, however, she knew that it would be a very 8_____________ thing to do. Besides, it would not be fair to her classmates. She decided 9___________ to read the paper and thus folded it neatly, though there was a small voice in her telling her to just keep the paper to herself. In the 10________________, Jane returned the paper to her English subject teacher, Mr. James, without reading it.

  1. ORAL SKILLS

Read the narrative below and then answer the questions that follow. (20 mks)

 

Long ago there lived a king who had many beautiful daughters. But the youngest was as lovely as the sun. Her father had warned her against talking to strangers and walking away from the castle alone.Near the king’s castle was a large, darkforest. In this forest stood an old limetree, beside a spring where an ogre lived.

One day the king’s youngest daughtercame to this tree and sat down in the shadeto rest. After a while she began to toss upher golden ball and catch it as it fell.At last, she failed to catch it. It fell onthe ground and rolled into the spring —splash!It went out of sight. The littleprincess began to sob and weep.Then a voice called out, ” O king’s daughter, why are you weeping? Tell me yourtrouble and I may help you.”

She looked toward the spot from whichcame the voice. There was a frog with hishead stretched out of the water.

” Was it you, old frog, that spoke?” sheasked. ” You cannot help me. I am weeping because I have lost my ball which rolledinto the spring.”

” Then weep no more,” said the frog. ” I can get it out,but what will you give me

if I bring back your plaything? ”

” Oh, anything that you like, dear frog,” said the princess. “What will you have —

my silk dress, my necklace of pearls, or my golden crown? I like my ball best of all.”

” Dresses and pearls and golden crownsare nothing to me,” said the frog. ” I wish

to be your friend and playfellow. I wish tosit at your table, to eat from your plate, todrink from your cup, and to sleep in yourbed. If you will promise me these things,I will bring back your golden ball.”

” Oh, yes,” she said, thinking only of herpretty toy. ” I will promise whatever you

wish.”

Down dived the frog. Soon he came upwith the golden ball in his mouth. He

rolled it on the grass and the king’s daughter picked it up, with a cry of joy. Then

she ran home as fast as a deer.

After many days, the frog came to the castle and the princess refused to kept her promise. The frog then transformed into an ugly ogre and swallowed the princess.

My story ends there.

 

  1. Classify this narrative. Give a reason for your answer.(2mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

  1. Give the examples of the following as used in the narrative. (2mks)

Opening formula………………………………………………………………………………

Closing formula………………………………………………………………………………..

 

  1. Give two examplesof simile in the narrative. (2 mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. What lesson do you learn from the narrative? (2mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Apart from the type of narrative above, name 2 other types of narratives. (2 mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Your teacher has informed you that there will be a debate next Monday.

(i)  How would you prepare for the debate? (3mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • What would you do to ensure that you deliver your points effectively? (3mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Group the words below according to the pronunciation of the sounds in bold. (4 mks)

character,chef, chaos, machine, parachute, chief, chores, core

Chicken/tʃ/ Chemical /k/ Chauffeur/ʃ/
     
     
     
     
     

 

 

  1. Grammar (30 mks)
  2. Fill in each of the gaps below with the correct form of the adjectives given in brackets. (4 marks)

 

  • That room is _________________ than yours. (tidy)
  • He committed the _________________ crime in history. (bad)
  • His story is ___________________ than the previous one. (good)
  • Janet’s house is_______________ (big) than mine.
  1. Change the following sentences into indirect speech. (2mks)

 

  1. “I would like to be successful in life,”James told us.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. “I wrote this poem,” the little girl said.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. Convert the following sentences into passive voice. (2 mks)

 

  1. The students should clean the classrooms.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. The class prefect accused him of breaking the school trophy.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Fill in the blanks with the most appropriate preposition. (2mks)

 

(i) She has lived in Samburu …………………. ten years.

 

(ii) It is improper to hurl abuses ……………………people.

 

  1. Replace the underlined word with the correct word. (4 mks)

 

  1. The teacher was so disappointed that she ordered the students to leave the seen.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. The plain had just taken off when one of the passengers began to scream.

……………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  • By the time this practice ends, everyone must have swum the length of the pull at least twice.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. It is quiet clear that the problem is solved.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

  1. Use the correct form of the word in brackets. (5 mks)

 

  • _________________ is very important. (honest)
  • The hyena is known for his _________________. (greedy)
  • (lovely)
  • Experience is the ________________teacher. (good)
  • We ____________________ to school to acquire knowledge. (goes)

 

 

  1. Punctuate the following sentences. (5 mks)

 

  1. We live in Kasarani Nakuru.
  2. she bought mangoes, bananas and apples.
  3. Which is the biggest lake in East Africa
  4. What a wonderful friend we have in Jesus
  5. I am going home

 

8.Replace the underlined words with an appropriate pronoun    (3 mks)

  1. The old gate does not look good.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Tom and Mary went to school.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Anthony drove Junet and Me.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

9.Fill the gaps with the correct collective noun.                                          (3 marks)

  1. He was attacked by a __________________________of bees.
  2. My father owns a large __________________________ of cattle.
  3. A ____________________________ of thieves broke into our house.

 ___________________________________________________________________________________

JOINT EXAMINATION TERM 3

ENGLISH FORM ONE MARKING SCHEME

  1. WRITING

Your mother has planned to do an end of year shopping for everyone in the family.

  • Make an inventory of at least five items that you have. (10 mks)
  • Make a shopping list of the items you wish her to buy for you. (10 mks)

 

Inventory       

– title 1

-quantity, item, description (3 mks)

-correct tabular entry of at least 5 items (5 mks)

Language 1 mk

Shopping List

Title/heading @ 1mk

Budgeted amount @ 1mk

Columns – number of item, item, type/ brand, quantity, description, price/amount @ ½mk (3mks)

Total – 1 mark

Body-at least 4 categories of items – table well filled – 4 marks

Language – 1 mark

 

  1. COMPREHENSION PASSAGE

 

  1. When, according to the passage, do heat reactions occur? (2 mks)

Heat reactions usually occur when large amounts of water and/or salt are lost through excessive sweating following strenuous exercise.

When the body becomes overheated and cannot eliminate this excess heat.

(1 mk for each answer)

  1. What happens when the body is unable to eliminate excess heat? (2 mks)

Heat exhaustion/ heat stroke may occur.

  1. What may cause fainting in the case of heat exhaustion, according to the passage? (2 mks)

Inadequate intake of water

Loss of fluids.

  1. state the first aid treatment for heat exhaustion. (4mks)
  • having the victim lie down
  • raising the feet 8 to 12 inches
  • applying cool, wet cloths to the skin
  • giving the victim sips of salt water (1 teaspoon per glass, half a glass every 15 minutes) over a 1-hour period.
  1. How can a heat reaction’s victim’s body be cooled? (3 mks)
  2. By placing the victim in a tub of cold water
  3. By repeatedly sponging the victim with cool water until his or her temperature is sufficiently lowered.
  • By using fans or air conditioners.

 

  1. Why should care be taken when cooling a victim’s temperature? (1 mk)

So as not to over-chill the victim once the temperature is below 102° F.

  1. Write in singular. (1mk)

A Fan or an air conditioner will also help with the cooling process.

  1. What is the passage about? (2 mks)

The passage is about the effects of excess heat in our bodies/ Heat reactions/ heat exhaustion and heat stroke/ any other relevant answer.

  1. Explain the meaning of the following words as used in the passage. (3 mks)

Perspiration – sweat

Mechanism – system

Excess – extra

  1. CLOZE TEXT (10 mks)
  2. about
  3. skipped
  4. with
  5. Her (must start in a capital)
  6. tell
  7. all
  8. well
  9. wrong
  10. not
  11. end
  12. ORAL SKILLS
  13. Ogre narrative- there is a superhuman being that changes its form/ that swallows the princess. (2 mks)
  14. Opening formular- long ago –

Closing formular- my story ends there.

  1. as lovely as the sun. – the beauty of the princess is compared to that of the sun./

… as fast as a deer. – comparison of how the princess ran with a deer.(2 mks for any)

  1. We should be obedient – we should always listen to what we are warned against.

We should be honest / we should keep the promises we give/ we should be careful on the promises we give others. (2 mks) (no mark for a negative statement)

  1. Trickster narratives/ why or aetiological or etiological narratives/ myths/ dilemma/ legends. (2 marks for any two)
  2. (i)Get all facts about the motion/ research on the motion.

Prepare a detailed outline/ note down the points.

Rehearse in front of a mirror / before friends/ imaginary audience. (3 mks)

(ii) I would maintain eye contact.

(iii)I would use the appropriate gestures and facial expressions.

(iv) I would project my voice so that every one hears what I am saying/ be loud enough/ be audible.

(v) I would pronounce words clearly, placing stress where it should be.

(vi) I would vary my tone to ensure I do not bore the audience with monotone.

(vii) I would be confident.

(viii)I would use polite language. Any other relevant (3 mks for any 3)

  1. (4 marks)
Chicken /tʃ/ Chemical /k/ Chauffeur /ʃ/
chores½mk core½mk parachute½mk
chief½mk chaos½mk machine½mk
  character½mk chef½mk

 

  1. GRAMMAR
  2. a) tidier
  3. b) worst
  4. c) better
  5. d) bigger (4 mks)
  6. i) James told us that he would like to be successful in life.
  7. ii) The little girl said that she had written that poem. (2 mks)
  8. a) The classrooms should be cleaned by the students.
  9. b) He was accused of breaking the school trophy by the class prefect.( 2 mks)
  10. i) for
  11. ii) at (2 mks)
  12. i) scene
  13. ii) plane

iii) pool

  1. iv) quite (4 mks)

 

  1. Underline the abstract nouns in the following sentences. (5 mks)

 

  • Honesty is very important.
  • The hyena is known for his
  • Love
  • Experience is the best
  • We go to school to acquire knowledge.

 

  1. Punctuate the following sentences. (5 mks)

 

  1. We live in Kasarani, (comma)
  2. She bought mangoes, bananas and apples. (capital S)
  3. Which is the biggest lake in East Africa?(question mark)
  4. What a wonderful friend we have in Jesus!(exclamation mark)
  5. I am going home.(full stop)

 

8.

  1. It
  2. They
  3. Us

 

9.

Swarm

Herd

gang

 

 

 

MOKASA AGRICULTURE JOINT EXAMS PP2 PDF

Name……………………………………………………………………………….Index…………………………………….

443/2

AGRICULTURE

Paper 2

MOKASA EXAMINATION 

2 Hours

MOKASA EXAMINATION

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education

443/2

Agriculture Paper 2

2 hours

Instructions to candidates

This paper consists of three sections, A,B and C. Answer all questions in sections A and B and any two questions in section C. All answers be written in the spaces provided after every question.

Candidates should write their names and index numbers in the spaces provided above.

For Examiner’s Use Only

Section Question Maximum Score Candidates Score
A 1 -16 30  
B 17 -20 20  
C   20  
  20  
  90  

 

SECTION A (30 Marks)

Answer all questions in this section in the spaces provided.

1 Name four meat breads of rabbits.                                                                                                 (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

2 The following is a list of livestock diseases.

Brucelosis

Trypanosomiasis

Newcastle

Anthrax

African swine fever

Black guater

Which of the two diseases

  • Are both bacterial and zoonotic.                                       (1mk)
  • Highly infectious (1mk)

3 State four qualities of marketable eggs.                                                                                                      (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 Mention four reasons for treating timber before using on farm structures.                                        (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 List four sources of power in the farm.                                                                                                       (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

6 State four advantages of embryo transplant in cattle.                                                                           (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

7 Give four circumstances under which a farmer would use an ox-drawn cart instead of a tractor drawn trailer on the farm.                                                                                                                                            (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

8 State four factors that would contribute to the depression of farm equipment.                             (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

9 List two tools used for each of the following farm operations.

  • Tightening barbed wires during fencing. ( ½ mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Smoothening concrete floors during plastering ( ½ mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

10 State four advantages of deep litter system in poultry rearing.                                                        (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

11 State four ways of preventing mastitis in lactating cattle.                                                                    (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

12 State four factors to be considered when selecting heifers for milk production.                             (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

13 State four features of a good maize store.                                                                                               (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

14 State four methods that a farmer can employ to ensure maximum power output from animal power.

(2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15 State four advantages of artificial incubation in poultry rearing.                                                         (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

16 Give two reasons for flushing in sheep management.                                                                             (1mk)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

SECTION B (20 Marks)

Answer all questions provided in this section in the spaces provided.

17 The following diagrams illustrate farm equipment. Study it and answer the questions that follow

 

  • Name the parts labeled A, B, C and D.                        A…………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………( ½ mk)

B…………………………………………………..………………………………………………………………………………..( ½ mk)

C……………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………( ½ mk)

D……………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………… ( ½ mk)

  • Give the function of each of the parts labeled E and F.                         E………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………(1mk)

F……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….(1mk)

  • Give one use of the above equipment. (1mk)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

18 The illustration below shows a practice in layer birds. Use them to answer the questions that follow.

  • What practice is represented above? (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Which illustrated shows the right way of carrying out the practice. (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • State three reasons for carrying out the practice in poultry. (3mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

19 The diagram below shows a routine practice being carried out on an animal. Study it and answer questions that follow.

  • Identify the practice.                                                              (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Name the structure in which the practice is being carried out. (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Give three advantages of using the above structure instead of a plunge dip. (3mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Fill the table below for the following diseases.
Disease Cause Characteristic/Symptom Preventive measures
Coccidiosis      
Blackquater     vaccination
Rinderpest virus    
Milk fever      

(5mks)

SECTION C (40 Marks)

Answer any two questions from this section in the spaces after every question.

21 (a) Explain eight factors that influence the composition of milk in a dairy cow.                              (8mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) Outline six causes of cannibalism in poultry.                                       (6mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. C) Explain six uses of fences in the farm. (6mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

22 (a) Describe New castle disease under the following sub-headings.

  • Causal organism                (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Animal affected (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Symptoms                             (5mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Control measures. (3mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) Describe the principle operation of four-stroke cycle engine. (10mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

23 (a) Outline five signs of parturition in cattle.                                                                                            (5mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) State five reasons for carrying out inbreeding in livestock production. (5mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) Give five effects of parasites on livestock. (5mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. d) Describe the difference between ruminants and non-ruminants digestive system. (5mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..




MOKASA JOIN EXAMINATION 

443/2

AGRICULTURE PAPER 2

MARKING SCHEME.

1– Flemish giant

–  New Zealand white

– California white

– Chinchila

– Earlops

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

2 (a)  -Brucellosis

  • Anthrax

( 2 x ½ mks)

(b) Newcastle

–  Anthrax

– African Swine fever

–  Black quarter

– Brucellosis

(2 x ½ = 1 mk)

3          – Large / heavy

  • Brown
  • Clean
  • Smooth shelled
  • Fresh
  • Good candling qualities

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

 

4   –  prevent attack from insects

  • Prevent attack from fungi/rotting
  • Resist water penetration
  • Increase strength
  • Prevent warping

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

5     -wind

  • Human
  • Solar Biogas
  • Electricity
  • Petroleum

( 4 x ½ = 2 mks)

6      – Superior females are used to produce which are spread widely

  • Stimulates milk production in females not in milk
  • Easier to transport embryos in test tubes
  • Embryos can be stored for long periods waiting for a recipient female
  • No injuries to small body size females from large body sizes
  • No spread of breeding diseases
  • Off springs adapt to the local conditions

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

7      – Un availability of a tractor

  • When transporting small load
  • Where the terrain does not allow the use of a tractor
  • Lack of skills to operate the tractor.

( 4 x ½ = 2 mks)

8       – poor storage

  • Wrong size
  • Lack of maintenance
  • Obsolescence

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

9   (i) –  Chain

  • Pliers
  • Claw hammer
  • ( 2 x ½ = 1mk)

(ii) –  Leveling board

  • Wood float ( reject steel float)

( 2 x ½ = 1mk)

10      – Require small compared to free range

  • Less loss of eggs
  • Easier collection of manure
  • Easier protection of birds from vermins/parasites/diseases
  • High stocking rate
  • Less labour requirement

( 4 x ½ =2mks)

11    – practice farm hygiene/miling infected cows last/using single towel to wipe the udder of cow.

  • Treatment of infected cows to prevent spread.
  • Practicing teat dips after milking.
  • Applying milking jelly/ salve to prevent teat from drying and cracking
  • Practicing good milking techniques.

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

12      – size of the animal

  • Semen/sire to breed it with/mate it.
  • Health of the animal
  • Ancestors performance
  • Rate of growth
  • Dairy conformation.
  • Either male/female twin

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

15       – possible to plan when to hatch

  • Possible to control internal conditions of the incubator
  • Easier to control diseases and parasites
  • Incubator can hold more eggs at any time than the hen can sit on.

(4 x ½ = 2mks)

 

SECTION B (20 Marks)

16  (a)            A – Hose pipe /delivery pipe

  • B – Lance
  • C – shoulder straps
  • D – preumatic lever

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

(b) Trigger – Controls the rate of spray delivery.                                                          (1mk)

Nozzle – Breaks and ejects the liquid as spray

  • Atomizes the spray.

( 1mks)

(c ) – Spraying agricultural chemicals to crops in order to control pests and diseases

-Spraying livestock to control external parasites such as ticks.

( 1 x 1 = 1mks)

17

Diseases Cause Characteristics symptom Preventive measures
Coccidiosis Protozoa/coccidian sp Diarrhoea/whitish/yellow/blood stained Give coccidiostats in drinking water/food
Blackquater Bacteria/clostridium sp Lameness / swollen muscles Vaccination
Rinder pest Virus Diarrhoea with blood- stained feaces Vaccination
Milk fever Low level of calcium(reject lack of calcium) Animal goes down with stiff bent neck. Twitching of muscles –        Injection with calcium preparation eg calcium borogluconate

–        Feeding with calcium rich feed stuff during gestation period

( 1 x 6 = 6mks)

 

18  (a) Debeaking(1mk)

(b)P             (1mk)

(c )– Reduction of egg eating and breaking of eggs

  • Controls cannibalism
  • Prevents injury from pegging or fighting
  • Reduction feed wastages
  • Reduction of feather pulling
  • Moderates pegging order which encourages greater uniformity in the flock.

( 3 x 1 = 3mks)

19   (a) Spraying of livestock against tick control                                                (1mk)

(b) Spray race.                                                                                                    (1mk)

(c )  It is suitable for pregnant and sick animals as animals do not get a shock

  • Acaricide wash is not wasted since its recycled
  • Animals cannot swallow the acaricide wash
  • Spraying is faster less labour is required.
  • ( 3 x 1 = 3mks)

SECTION C

20 (a) Factors that influence composition of milk

  • Age of the animal
  • Condition of the animal i.e emaciation, sickness and pregnancy
  • Stage of lactation and pregnancy: butter fat content in milk tends to be higher at the middle phase of lactation period.
  • Completeness of milking
  • Breed differences
  • Season of the year
  • The type of food eaten by the animal
  • Presence of diseases such as mastitis and if the animal is under treatment through use of different drugs will produce milk with variable composition.

(b) Causes of cannibalism in poultry;

– Presence of external parasites

– overcrowding

– Presence of bright light

– presence of prolapse

– Mineral deficiency

– Introduction of a new bird in a flock.

( 6 x 1 = 6mks)

 

(C )Uses of fences in the farm,

  • It demarcates the farm from that of neighbours
  • Fences keep off wild animals and other intruders from outside the farm
  • They are used to separate crop fields from the pastures facilitating mixed farming
  • They are used to divide pasture into paddocks facilitating controlled grazing systems such as rotational grazing
  • Controls the movements of animals and people preventing the formation of unnecessary paths in the farm.
  • Helps to control the spread of pastures and diseases by keeping off wild and stray animals from the farm
  • Fences help to isolate sick animals from the rest of the herd to prevent disease spread.
  • They enable the farmer to control breeding by rearing different animals in different paddocks
  • They provide security to the homestead and farm animals.
  • It is for aesthetic value, that is, it improves the beauty of the land.

( 6×1 = 6mks)

21 (a) Newcastle disease

  • Causal organism- Virus           (1mk)
  • Animals affected; –   poultry            (1mk)
  • Symtopms
  • The birds have difficulties in breathing, produce a harsh, grating rasping sound when breathing
  • The beaks remain wide open and necks are strained
  • The birds become dull
  • The birds stand with eyes closed all the time
  • The birds loose appetite
  • There are nasal discharges which force the birds to shake their heads to clear it
  • Birds walk with a staggering motion since the nervous system is affected, paralysis of wings and legs may occur
  • Often the birds have their beaks and wings down
  • Birds produce watery greenish diarrhea
  • Eggs laid have soft shells

                       (5 x 1 = 5mks)

  • Control measures;
  • Vaccination should be done during the first six weeks and then two – three months later.
  • Farmers are advised to kill all the birds and burn them once infestation has occurred.
  • The houses be cleaned and disinfected before bringing in new stock.
  • Quarantine is imposed once an outbreak is suspected of occurred.

( 3 x 1 = 3mks)

   (b) Principle operation of four – stroke cycle engine

                 Induction stroke cycle

  • The piston moves down the cylinder causing the inlet valve to open and outlet valve closes. This causes the drawing in of fresh petrol vapour and air into the cylinder.

Compression stroke;

  • Both inlet and outlet valves are closed and the piston moves up the cylinder. This causes compression of the fresh fuel mixture in the combustion chamber.

The power stroke cycle;

  • The fuel air mixture is fully compressed and a spark is produced at the spark plug.
  • This causes the fuel mixture to ignite and expand resulting in high pressure that cause/force the piston to move down the cylinder.

The Exhaust stroke cycle;

  • This is the last stroke where the piston moves up the cylinder to eliminate the burned fuel mixture through an open exhaust valve.

( 1 x 10 = 10  mks)

23 (a) Signs of parturition in cattle;

  • Enlargement of the vulva
  • Thick mucus is discharged from the vulva
  • Relaxation of the hip muscles
  • Full and distended udder.
  • Thick sticky honey like fluid is discharged from the teats
  • Loss of appetite
  • Towards the end water bag emerges and bursts where the fore legs and muzzle is noticed.

( 5 x 1 = 5mks)

(b) Reasons for inbreeding;

–  To increase genetic uniformity in the herd

– Used to fix the required characteristics in the new- breeds.

– To increase phenotypic uniformity

– Used to get proven sires

–  used in animals of high prepotency.

                   (5 x 1 = 5mks)

(C )Effects of parasites in livestock;

  • Causes anemia
  • Deprive the host animal of food
  • Injury and damage to tissues and organs
  • Diseases transmission
  • Cause irritation
  • Obstruction to internal organs.

( 5 x 1 = 5mks)

(d) Difference between Ruminants and non- ruminant digestive system;

Ruminants Non – Ruminants
–         chew the cud

–       have four stomach chambers – thus polygastric

–        Regurgitate food

–        Can digest cellulose. Have micro – organisms in the rumen that digest cellulose.

–        Have no ptyalin in saliva hence no enzymatic digestion in the mouth.

–        Most digestion and absorption takes place in the rumen.

–        Have alkaline saliva due to presence of ammonia.

–        Doesn’t chew the cud

–        Have one stomach chamber – thus monogastric

–        Cannot regurgitate food once swallowed.

–        Have no micro-organisms in the stomach hence cannot digest cellulose except those animals with micro-organisms in the ceacum

–        Have ptyalin in the saliva hence enzymatic digestion begins in the mouth

–        Most digestion and absorption takes place in the small intestines

–        The saliva is neutral in PH.

( 5 x 1 = 5mks) Mark it as a whole.)

CURRENT ELECTRICITY PHYSICS NOTES, REVISION QUESTIONS & ANSWERS

  1. Define the term “e.m.f” of a cell. (1mk)

 

  1. Distinguish between electromotive force and potential difference (2mks)

 

  1. Distinguish between terminal voltage and e.m.f of a battery. 2mks

 

  1. Define the volt.                                   (1mk)

 

  1. Distinguish between open and closed circuit. (2mk)

 

  1. What is meant by the term “lost volts”? (1mk)

 

  1. State Ohms Law. (1mk)

 

  1. State the condition necessary for Ohms Law to be obeyed (1mk)

 

  1. State two conditions that are necessary for a conductor to obey Ohm’s law.

 

  1. Other than temperature state the other factors that affect the resistance of an ohmic conductor.                   (1 mk)

 

  1. What causes electrical resistance in conductors? ( 1mk)

 

  1. Define a non-ohmic conductor (1mk)

 

  1. Define electric resistance. (1mk)

 

  1. Eight dry cells can be arranged to produce a total e.m.f of 12v just like a car battery.

(a)  What is the e.m.f of an individual cell?                                         (2mk)

(b)        Why is it possible to start a car with the lead acid accumulator, but not with the eight dry cells in series?

 

  1. Give a reason why fluorescent tubes are preferred to filament bulbs for domestic lighting

 

  1. A boy who has been driving a car in rain discovers that the movement he alights from it while touching its body he gets an electrical shock. Offer him a scientific explanation why he was not getting the shock while inside even if he touches the metallic parts of the car.

 

  1. A circuit consists of a battery, a metal wire, ammeter and a switch connected in series. The switch is closed and the ammeter reading noted. The metal wire is now heated.

      (i)       State the observations made on the ammeter reading.            (1mk)

      (ii)      Give one observation for the above observation made.      (1mk)

  1. Describe an experiment to verify Ohm’s law given a cell, ammeter, voltmeter, switch, nichrome wire and connecting wires.

 

  1. A battery is connected to an external resistor, R. State any two factors that determine the magnitude of the current produced in the circuit. (2mk)
  2. Figure below shows an ammeter used to measure current through the conductor.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the reading from the meter when the student is using the;

(i) Lower scale.                                                                                 (1mk)

(ii) Upper scale                                                                                 (1mk)

 

  1. Figure below shows a voltmeter used to measure voltage through the conductor. The student used the upper scale.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the reading from the meter.                                             (1mk)

 

 

  1. Figure below shows an ammeter used to measure current through the conductor. The student used the lower scale.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure below shows a voltmeter used to measure voltage through the conductor. The student used the upper scale.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the reading from the meter.                                             (1mk)

 

  1. State why the filament of a lamp is made of tungsten (1mk)

 

  1. Three identical bulbs are connected in series with a battery. At first, the bulbs shine brightly but gradually become dimmer.  Using the same cells, explain how you would increase the brightness of the bulbs.                  (1mk)

 

  1. In large circuits, large resistors in parallel are preferred to low resistors in series. Explain.

 

  1. Describe a laboratory experiment to verify ohm’s law, by use of appropriate diagrams where necessary.                                     (5mk)

 

  1. You are required to determine the resistance per unit length of a nichrome wire X, you are provided with a D.C. power supply an ammeter and voltmete
  2. i) Draw a circuit diagram to show how you would connect the circuit.

 

  1. Describe with aid of a diagram and experiment to verify Ohm’s law

 

  1. A student wishes to investigate the relationship between current and voltage for a certain resistor X. In the space provide, draw a circuit diagram including two cells, rheostat, ammeter, voltmeter and the resistor X that would be suitable in obtaining the desired results.  Describe how you would use the circuit in (a) (i) above to determine the resistance of x.          (5mk)

 

  1. The figure below shows a circuit that can be used to verify Ohm’s law

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explain briefly how the setup can be used to verify ohm’s law          (4mks)

  1. An ammeter, a voltmeter and a bulb are connected in a circuit so as to measure the current flowing and the potential difference across both. Sketch a suitable circuit diagram for the arrangement.

 

  1. Three identical bulbs are connected in series with a battery. At first, the bulbs shine brightly but gradually become dimmer. Using the same cells, explain how you would increase the brightness of the bulbs. (2mk)

 

  1. A student learnt that a battery of eight dry cells each 1.5V has a total e.m.f of 12V the same as a car battery. He connected in series eight new dry batteries to his car but found that they could not start the engine. Give a reason for this observation.

 

V = IR

  1. A current of 0.08A passes in a circuit for 2.5 minutes. How much charge passes through a point in the circuit?

 

  1. What current will a 500Ω resistor connected to a source of 240V draw?
  2. Two resistors of 4W and 2W in parallel are connected in series to a 3W resistor and a cell of 2.0V.

Calculate

  1. Equivalent resistance of the circuit. (3 marks)
  2. Current through each resistor. (4 marks)

 

  1. Three identical dry cells each of m.f. 1.6 V are connected in series to a resistor of 11.4Ω. a current of 0.32A flows in the circuit.  Determine.
  2. i) The total e.m.f. of the cell                                    1mk
  3. ii) The internal resistance of each cell;                     3mk
  4. A wire of resistance R connected in series with 1.5V cell is found to be carrying a current of 0.05A. If the wire is now connected in parallel with an identical wire, find the new current in the circuit. (3mk)

 

  1. Two heaters A and B are connected in parallel across a 10volts supply. Heater A produces 1000J of heat in one hour while B produces 200J in half an hour. Calculate the ratio RA/RB. (3mks)

 

  1. A current flows through a coil wire of resistance 50W when it is connected to the terminals of a battery. If the potential difference is 20V, find

(i) The value of current                                                                     2 mks

  1. ii) The number of electrons that pass through the coil per second. (Take

charge of electronse = 1.6 x 10-19 c)                                          3 mks

 

  1. Three identical resistors each of resistance 2.0are connected so as to obtain the least effective resistance. If a battery of voltage V is connected in series to the arrangement of the resistors and supplies a current of 3A. Calculate the value of V                                                                (4mks)

 

  1. Two resistors R1 and R2 are connected in series to a 10V battery. The current flowing then is 0.5A.  When R1 only is connected to the battery the current flowing is 0.8A.

(a)  Calculate the

(i)     Value of R2

  1. ii) Current flowing when R1 and R2 are connected in parallel with the same batter.

(b)        One of the 6W resistors has a length of 1m and cross-sectional

area of 5.0 x 10-5m2. Calculate the resistivity of the material.

 

  1. Suppose a high–resistance voltmeter reads 1.5V connected across a dry battery on open circuit and 1.2V. when the same battery is in a closed circuit when it is supplying a current of 0.3A through a lamp of resistance R.

(a)         Draw a circuit diagram to show the above experiment when in;

(ii)     Open circuit

  1. ii)     Closed circuit.

(b)       What is

  1. i) The e.m.f of the battery.
  2. ii) The internal resistance of the battery

iii) The value of R?

 

  1. When a resistor is connected across the terminals of a battery a current of 0.20A flows. What is the time taken for 2.0 coulombs of charge to pass a given point in the circuit? If e.m.f of the battery is 4.0v and its internal resistance is 0.20hm determine the rate at which heat is produced in the resistor.

 

  1. A cell supplies a current of 1.8A through two 2W resistors connected in parallel. When the resistors are connected in series, the current is 0.6A. Calculate the internal resistance of the cell. (3mk)

 

  1. A cell can supply a current of 1.2A through two 2W resistors connected in parallel. When they are connected in series, the value of the current is 0.4A. Calculate the internal resistance of the cel          (3mks)

 

  1. A battery of e.m.f. 3V drives a current through a 20W The p.d across the resistor is 2.8V as measured by a voltmeter.  Calculate the internal resistance of the battery.

 

  1. Resistors of 2W and 3W are connected in series with a cell and voltmeter connected across the 3W resistor reads 1V, but this increases to 1.2V when an extra 2W resistor is connected in parallel with the first 2W resistor, calculate the e.m.f and the internal resistance of the cell.

 

  1. A torch uses two identical dry cells connected in series. When a bulb of resistance 2.0W is connected across the cells the pd across the bulb is 2.0V. When a bulb of resistance 1.5 ohms is used, the p.d is 1.8V, calculate the e.m.f and internal resistance of each cell.

 

  1. A cell drives a current of 3.2A through a 2.8 Ω resistor. When it is connected to 1.6Ω resistor, the current that flows is 5A. Find the:

(i) E.m.f (E) for the cell.        (2mk)

(ii) Internal resistance (r) for the cell.   (2mk)

 

  1. A cell drives a current of 8A through a 1.2resistor when the same cell is connected to a 1.8resistor, the current that flows is 6.0A. Determine
    • The internal resistance. (4mks)
    • m.f of the cell. (2mks)

 

  1. A cell supplies a current of 0.5A when connected to a 2W resistor and 0.25A when connected to a 5W Find the e.m.f and the internal resistance of the cell.                                                     (4mks)

 

  1. A wire of resistance X connected in series with a 1.5 V battery is found to carry a current of 0.075 A. If the wire is now connected in parallel with an identical wire, find the total current in circuit. (3mk)

 

 

BULBS

  1. An electrician installed electric wiring in a house and connected the bulbs and the switches as shown in the figure below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Explain what happens when switch

(i) S1 is closed.                                                                   (1mk)

(ii) S2 is closed.                                                           (1mk)

(iii) S3 is closed.                                                          (1mk)

  • (i) Using a redrawn diagram show the best position the bulbs should be installed. (3mks)

 

  1. State the changes in brightness of the bulbs in the circuit diagram as the switches S1, S2 and S3 are switched on one after the other. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure below shows a circuit diagram containing three identical bulbs.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Compare the brightness of the bulbs                                          (2mks)

 

  1. The voltmeter and the ammeter in figure (a) below read 2.1v and 0.35A respectively.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the reading in the voltmeter and ammeter in figure(b) respectively. (The lamps are identical to those in (a)

  1. A student set up the circuit shown in Fig. 3. The lamps didn’t light when she closed the switch S.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Suggest a reason for this observation.                                       (2mk)

 

  1. Figure below shows two circuits with identical dry cells and identical bulbs;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) In which circuit will the bulbs be brighter                               (1mk)

 

(ii) Give a reason for your answer in (i) above                            (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. A student was investigating the brightness of bulbs when setup in an electric circuits. She used identical bulbs and cells. The circuits shown in figure 3(a) and (b) were what she setup.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Which setup was the bulb brightest? Give a reason for your answer.      (2mk)

 

  1. Fig (a) and (b) show two possible arrangements of a bulb to a source of power.

 

 

 

 

 

 

In which of the arrangement above would the cells drain faster. Explain your answer.                                                                                     (2mk)

 

  1. The circuit diagram in figure below has two switches P and Q. The brightness of the lamp isobserved when P only is closed and when P and Q are both closed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Compare the brightness of the lamp in the two cases. State a reason for your answer.                                                                                    (2mks)

 

CIRCUITS

  1. Three resistors of resistance 2 Ω, 3 Ω and 4 Ω, are to be connected to a cell such that they have the least effective resistance.

(i)  Draw a circuit to show how they can be connected to achieve this.(2mk)

(ii)  Determine the least effective resistance of the three resistors. (3mk)

 

(iii) State two factors that determine the resistance of a metallic conductor.

(2mk)

  1. Figure shows a voltmeter connected across the cell. The voltmeter reads 1.5V when the switch S, is open and 1.2V when the switch is closed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) What is the e.m.f. of the cell.                                                (1 mk)

(ii) What is the terminal voltage of the cell.                                (1 mk)

(iii) Calculate the internal resistance of the cell.                 (3 mks)

 

  1. You are provided with three resistors of 3Ω, 2Ωand1Ω. Arrange the resistors in the circuit so as to have minimum resistance. Determine the effective resistance in the above circuit         (3mk)

 

  1. Figure below shows part of an electric circuit. The current through the 18Ω resistor is observed  to be 2A.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the value of the current through each of the 10Ω resistors.             (1mk)

 

  1. Study the circuit diagram below and answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate

  • The current flowing through the ammeter.   (3mks)
  • The P.d. across AB (2mks)
  • The current through the 4Ω resistor (2mks)

 

  1. The figure below shows an electric circuit. When the switch is closed the ammeter reading is 0.3A.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the voltmeter reading.                                     (3mks)

 

  1. In the circuit diagram below, the battery source has a voltage of 12V and an internal resistance of 5Ω.

 

 

 

                                                

                           

 

 

 

 

 

         (i)  Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.                  (3mk)

         (ii) Calculate effective current in the circuit.                      2mk)

 

 

  1. Use the circuit in figure below to answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)     Calculate the total resistance in the circuit                          (3mk)

(ii)     Determine the current flowing through the 5W resistor          (3mk

 

  1. In a balanced condition, the resistance of resistors P,Q and R is 80 ,120and 100 Find the resistance S.                 (3mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Two resistors K and L are placed in the gaps of the metre bridge as shown

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • (i) State the purpose of the resistor M. (1mk)
  • (ii) Find the resistance K below if the Jockey balances the galvanometer at the 20cm
  1. The figure below shows a 6V battery connected to an arrangement of resistors. Determine the current flowing through the 2 Ω resistor. (3mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. It was noted that for the circuit diagram below, when the switch is open, the voltmeter gives a reading of 12V, but when the switch is closed the voltmeter drops to 10V.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a)         Give an explanation for the difference in reading on the voltmeter when

the switch is open and when it is closed.                     (2mk)

(b)    If the ammeter gives a reading of 0.8A when the switch is closed,

determine the value of R.                                         (1 mk)

(c)     Determine the internal resistance of the accumulator     (2mk)

 

  1. The figure below shows a series – parallel circuit.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate:

(i) Total resistance of the circuit.                                       (3mks)

(ii) Total current flowing in the circuit.                                (2mks)

(iii) Voltage drop across R1                                                               (2mks)

(iv) Current through the 3W resistor.                                 (3mks)

 

  1. Use the circuit in fig below to answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)     Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.                                        (2mk)

(ii)    Calculate effective current in the circuit.                                        (2mk)

(iii)    Calculate current through the 2Ω resistor.                                  (2mk)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A large battery is connected as shown in figure 5 to a resistor of resistance 1000W. The voltmeter across the resistor reads 50V.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)     What is the reading of the ammeter (A)?          (3mk)

(ii)     Determine the electrical energy dissipated by the resistor in one

minute.                                                                           (3mk)

 

  1. Determine the effective resistance in figure below. (3mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure shows three resistors connected as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

         If the voltmeter reads 4v, find the

(i)     Effective resistance.                                                         (2mks)

(ii)     Current through the 3W resistor.                              (2mks)

(iii)    Potential difference across the 8W resistor.                         (2mks)

 

  1. In the circuit diagram shown in figure below, determine the reading of the meters if:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)    The switch S1 is open and S2 closed.                                  (3mks)

(ii)    Switch S1 closed, S2 open.                                                (1mk)

(iii)   Both switches are closed.                                                  (6mks)

 

  1. Study the circuit shown in fig below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Determine the effective resistance when both switches S1 and S2 are open.                                                                                   (3mk)
  • Determine the effective resistance when both switches S1 and S2 are closed.                                                                                   (3mk)
  • Determine the ammeter reading when both switches are closed. (2mk

 

  1. Figure represents a 4.8V battery connected to two conductors XY and YZ of the same Material and same length welded together at Y. The radius of XY is half that of YZ. The resistance of YZ is 1.6.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Calculate;
  2. i) The resistance of the conductor XZ                                    (5mks)
  3. ii) The current which flows in the circuit when the switch S is closed(3mks)

iii)     The potential drop across the conductor XY                        (2mks)

 

  1. The circuit diagram in figure shows three identical resistors connected to a cell of e.m.f. 12V.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)     Determine the reading of the voltmeter.                                    (2mk)

(ii)     If another identical resistor R is connected parallel to PT, determine the

potential difference across QS

 

  1. In the circuit below figure, the e.m.f of the cell is 1.5V. Its internal resistance is r ohms. Resistors P and Q are each 3Ω. If 0.3A current flows through P. find the value of r.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Fig shows three resistors connected to a 12V battery of internal resistance 2Ω

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate

  1. i) The current drawn from the cell.
  2. ii) The “Lost voltage”, in the cell

iii) The potential different across the 7Ω resistor.

 

  1. The cells shown in the figure below have each an e.m.f of 2.1V and negligible internal resistance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the reading of the voltmeter                                              (3mk)

 

  1. The cell in figure has an e.m.f of 1V and negligible internal resistance.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the

(i)     Total resistance in the circuit                   (2mk)

(ii)    Current in the circuit                                       (1mk)

(iii)   Reading on the voltmeter                                (2mk)

 

  1. Four 5W resistors are connected to a 10V d. c. supply as shown in the diagram below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate;-

  1. The effective resistance in the circuit.
  2. ii) The current I following in the circuit.
  3. Sketch a graph current against voltage for an electrolyte solution such as dilute sulphuric acid.

 

  1. For a particular bulb, a series of readings of the current through the bulb for different potential differences across it is taken and plotted as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Draw the circuit diagram you would use for the experiment.(2mks)
  2. Explain how the resistance of the bulb changes        (3mks)
  3. How would the resistance of the bulb change if

(I) The length were doubled                                                   (2mks)

(II) The diameter were doubled                                             (2mks)

 

  1. The graph below shows results obtained in an experiment to determine the m.f.(E) and the internal resistance, r, of a cell.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • (i) Determine the slopeof the graph

Given that the equation of the graph is Determine

  • (ii) The e.m.f E of the cell.
  • (iii) The internal r resistance of the cell.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The graph below shows the Voltage current relationship for a certain battery.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine:

(i)     The e.m.f of the cell.                                                        (1mk)

(ii)     The internal resistance of the cell.                    (4mks)

 

  1. Two resistors 4Ω and the other unknown resistor x are connected in a circuit as shown in the fig below

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The current I passing through the combination is measured for various potential differences, A graph of p.d. against current is shown in the grid below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Use the graph to determine the total resistance of the combination. (3mk)

(ii) Determine the value of the unknown resistance x            (2mk)

 

  1. Figure 12 shows the variation of voltage against current.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Given the equation; E = V + Ir

Find from the graph.

(i) the e.m.f, E of the cell.                                                             (1mk)

(ii) the internal resistance, r, of the cell.                                          (3mks)

 

  1. On the axes provided, sketch a graph to show how current, I varies with potential difference, V, across a metallic conductor that is being heated at the same time. Explain your answer                 (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The graph below shows how the voltage, V, varies with the current, I for a filament lamp.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) From the graph, determine the resistance of the lamp when a current of 0.5A  flows.                                                                               (3mks)

 

(ii) State with a reason whether the device is ohmic or non-ohmic.    (2mks)

 

 

 

  1. The graph in fig. shows the current – voltage characteristics of a certain device Q.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) State with a reason whether the device obeys ohm’s law.                 (2mk

  • Determine the resistance of the device, Q when current through it is

30mA.                                                                    (3mk)

iii)     When the device, X, is connected in the circuit below, the voltage across it is 0.70V.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate the value of the resistance R.

 

  1. The current I through a given diode for various values of voltage V between anode and cathode is given in the table below.
V (volts) 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 225
I(mA) 0 1.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 10.0 16.0 28.0 80.0

 

  • Draw the characteristic graph of the diode using the data. (5mks)
  • Explain the nature of graph. (2mks)
  • Determine the resistance of the diode when the voltage is 150V.

(3mks)

  1. A battery is connected in series with an ammeter and a variable resistor R. The resistor is varied and the corresponding readings of the ammeter recorded in the table below.
Resistance R (Ω) 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0
Current I (A) 2.0 1.5 1.2 1.0 0.75 0.5
  • Draw a circuit diagram of the circuit that was used to perform this experiment. (1mk)
  • On the grip provided, plot a graph of R (y-axis) against I (x-axis). (5mk)
  • Use your graph to determine the internal resistance of the battery. (2mk)
  • Determine the e.m.f of the cell. (2mk)

 

  1. A student carried out an experiment to investigate how current varies with potential difference

applied across a filament lamp. The following readings were obtained.

 

P.d.(V) 0 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.20 1.60 2.40
   I (A) 0.0 0.11 0.20 0.28 0.34 0.43 0.50 0.58

 

(a) Draw a diagram for the circuit used to obtain the values.       (2mks)

(b) Describe briefly how the experiment was carried out.  (2mks)

(c) Plot a graph of V against I for the values presented in the table.   (5mks)

(d) Determine the resistance of the lamp when a current of 0.4A flows through it.

(3mks)

(e) Explain why a filament lamp does not obey Ohm’s law.      (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SCHEEM

  1. Define the volt. (1mk)

ANS   It is the work done in moving a unit charge in a circuit from one point to anotherü1

  1. Three identical bulbs are connected in series with a battery. At first, the bulbs shine brightly but gradually become dimmer.  Using the same cells, explain how you would increase the brightness of the bulbs.                  (1mk)

Connect the three bulbs in parallel so that the internal resistance is

reduced. This set up increases the current making the bulbs more bright. 1mk

  1. Three identical bulbs are connected in series with a battery. At first, the bulbs shine brightly but gradually become dimmer. Using the same cells, explain how you would increase the brightness of the bulbs. (2mk)

Connect the three bulbs in parallel so that the internal resistance is reduced. This set up increases the current making the bulbs more bright.

  1. Figure below shows two circuits with identical dry cells and identical bulbs;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) In which circuit will the bulbs be brighter                               (1mk)

(ii) Give a reason for your answer in (i) above                            (1mk)

         ANS  (i)   B      √1mk

(ii)   In both A and B the voltage is the same while current in B is twice the current in A.

B cells are in parallel hence lower effective internal resistance

  1. The voltmeter and the ammeter in figure (a) below read 2.1v and 0.35A respectively.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the reading in the voltmeter and ammeter in figure(b) respectively. (The lamps are identical to those in (a)

ANS          Voltmeter would read 2x 2.1V = 4.2 V ü1

                              Ammeter would read 0.35 A ü1

 

 

FORM 3 PHYSICS LESSON NOTES PDF

TOPIC 1.: LINEAR MOTION

1.1: Introduction

The study of motion is divided into two areas namely kinematics and dynamics. Kinematics deals with the motion aspect only while dynamics deals with the motion and the forces associated with it.

There are three common types of motion:

  • Linear or translational motion.
  • Circular or rotational motion.
  • Oscillatory or vibrational motion.

In this topic, we concentrate on linear motion.

Note that all motion is relative i.e the state of a body; at rest or in motion, is ONLY true with respect to the observer’s position.

1.2: Terms associated with linear motion

  • Distance- is the length of the path covered by a body. It only gives the magnitude but no direction i.e it is a scalar quantity.
  • Displacement- is the distance through which a body travels in a specified direction. It is a vector quantity.

Both distance and displacement are measured in metres.

  • Speed- is the distance covered per unit time.

Speed= distance/time.

  • Velocity- is the rate of change of displacement.

Velocity= displacement/time.

It is a vector quantity.

When the rate of change of displacement is non-uniform, we talk about average velocity;

Average velocity= total displacement/total time.

Both speed and velocity are expressed in metre per second (m/s).

  • Acceleration- is the rate of change of velocity.

Thus, Acceleration= change in velocity/time interval = (final velocity v – initial veolicity u)/time.

Acceleration is measured in metre per square second (m/s2).

If the velocity of a body decreases with time, its acceleration becomes negative. A negative acceleration is referred to as deceleration or retardation.

Example 1.1

  1. A body covers a distance of 2m in 4seconds, rests for 2seconds and finally covers a distance of 90m in 6seconds. Calculate its average speed.

Average speed= total distance/time= (2m+90m)/(4s+2s+6s)

= 20m/20s =5m/s.

  1. A body moves 30m due east in 2seconds, then 40m due north in 4seconds. Determine its:
  2. a) Average speed.

 

displacement                  40m

 

30m

Average speed= total distance/time= (30m+40m)/(2s+4s)

=70m/6s =11.67m/s.

  1. Average velocity.
  2. Average velocity= total displacement/time =50m/6s

=6.33m/s.

  1. A body is made to change its velocity from 20m/s to 36m/s in 0.1s. What is the acceleration produced?

a= (v-u)/t =(36m/s – 20m/s)/0.1s

=30m/s5.

  1. A particle moving with a velocity of 200m/s is brought to rest in 0.02s. What is the acceleration of the particle?

a= (v-u)/t =(0m/s-200m/s)/0.02

= -200/0.02 = -2,000m/s5.

1.3: Motion graphs.

There are two categories; displacement-time graphs and velocity time graphs.

1.3.1: Displacement-time graphs

The slope of a displacement-time graph gives the velocity of the body.

The various displacement-time graphs are as illustrated below:

 D          B     

Displacement                                   A

 (m)                                 C

 

                                                                               Time (s)

 

 

Graph A: the body is at rest i.e there is no change in displacement as time changes. The slope of the graph and hence the velocity is zero.

Graph B: the body moves with a uniform or constant velocity.

Graph C: the graph becomes steeper with time. The steeper the slope, the higher the velocity. Thus velocity of the body increases with time. The body is therefore accelerating.

Graph D: the graph becomes less and less steep with time i.e the body has a higher velocity at the beginning and decreases with time. Therefore, the body is said to be decelerating.

1.3.2: Velocity-time graphs

The slope of a velocity-time graph gives the acceleration of the body. Note that the area under a velocity-time graph gives the distance covered by the body.

The diagram below shows the possible velocity-time graphs:

        D                              B

Velocity(m/s)                                                                     A

     C

                                                                                       

                                                                                                   Time(s)

Graph A: the velocity remains constant/uniform as time increases. The slope of the graph and hence the acceleration of the body is zero.

Graph B: the velocity changes uniformly with time. The body moves with a uniform/constant acceleration.

Graph C: the acceleration is lower where the graph is gentle and higher where the graph is steeper. Hence the acceleration of the body increases with time.

Graph D: in this case, the graph is steeper at the beginning and becomes gentle with time. Hence the acceleration of the body decreases with time.

1.4: Determination of velocity and acceleration

Two methods are applicable here:

Method 1: Using appropriate instruments e.g a tape measure and a stop watch to measure the displacement of a body and the duration then applying the formula;

Velocity= total displacement/time taken.

Method 2: Using a ticker-timer. It is used to measure velocity of a body specifically over short distances. It consists of an electronic vibrator which makes dots on a moving paper tape attached to the object whose velocity is being measured. The dots are made at a certain set frequency. For instance, a ticker-timer whose frequency is 50Hz makes dots at intervals of 0.02s. The time interval between successive dots is referred to as a tick.

The spacing between the dots depends on the manner in which the body is moving i.e moving at constant velocity or with increasing velocity or decreasing velocity. Generally, the dots are close together when the velocity is low and wide apart when the velocity is high. There are three possible patterns that can be obtained by a ticker-timer as illustrated below:

  1. a) Moving at constant velocity.

The dots are equally or evenly spaced.

Direction of motion of the body

 

  1. b) Moving with increasing velocity (accelerating).

The spacing between the dots is initially small but increases away.

Direction of motion of the body

 

  1. c) Moving with decreasing velocity (decelerating).

The spacing between the dots is initially large but decreases away.

Direction of motion of the body

 

Example 1.2

  1. A paper tape was attached to a moving trolley and allowed to run through a ticker-timer. The figure below shows a section of the tape.

A               15cm            B                           C                      30cm                           D

 

If the frequency of the ticker-timer is 20Hz, determine:

  1. a) The velocity between AB and CD.

1tick= 1/20 =0.01s

VAB= 15cm/(5ticks*0.01s) =15cm/0.05s

=300cm/s

VCD=30cm/(5ticks*0.01s) =30cm/0.05s

=600cm/s

  1. b) The acceleration of the trolley.

Note that the velocities calculated in (a) above are average velocities and as such are taken to be the velocities at the midpoints of AB and CD respectively. Hence, the time taken for the change in velocity is the time between the midpoints of AB and CD.

   A               15cm               B                           C                         30cm                        D

 

                                       

VABΔt=2ticks*0.01=0.2s                          VCD                                                                                                                                                                                               

Therefore, acceleration=(VCD– VAB)/Δt= (600-300)cms-1/0.2s =3000cms-5.

  1. The figure below represents part of a tape pulled through a ticker-timer by a trolley moving down an inclined plane. If the frequency of the ticker-timer is 50Hz, calculate the acceleration of the trolley.

 0.5cm                                                  5.5cm 

 

                                                            

Δt=5ticks*0.02s=0.2s

Note that 1tick=1/50 =0.02s.

Initial velocity u =0.5cm/0.02s= 25cms-1

Final velocity v =5.5cm/0.02s= 125cms-1

Hence, acceleration= (v-u)/Δt=(125-25)cms-1/0.2s

=200cms-2

1.5: Equations of linear motion

There are three equations governing linear motion. Consider a body moving in a straight line from an initial velocity u to a final velocity v(u, v≠0) within a time t as represented on the graph below:

 

 

v

Velocity (ms-1)                                                                               v-u

 

u

 

                             

    0              t                      t                   time (s)

 

The slope of the graph represents the acceleration of the body;

Acceleration, a=(v-u)/t.

Therefore, v=u+at…………………………………. i.

This is the first equation of linear motion.

The area under the graph (area of a trapezium) gives the displacement of the body.

Hence, displacement s= ½(sum of // sides)*perpendicular height between them.

s= ½(u+v)t.

But v=u+at,

Therefore, s=½{u+(u+at)}t

s=½(2u+at)t

Hence, s=ut+½at2………………………………. ii.

This is the second equation of linear motion.

Also, rearranging equation i, we have t=(v-u)/a. substituting this in equation ii, we obtain;

s=ut+½at2=u{(v-u)/a}+½a{(v-u)/a}5.

s=u(v-u)/a + a(v-u)2/2a2= u(v-u)/a + (v-u)2/2a

s= {2u(v-u) + (v-u)2}/2a = {2uv-2u2+v2+u2-2uv}/2a

s= {v2-u2}/2a

2as= v2-u2

Hence, v2=u2+2as ……………………………….. iii.

This is the third equation of linear motion.

The three equations hold for any body moving with uniform acceleration.

Note that for a body which is retarding, the acceleration a is given a negative sign.

Example 1.3

  1. A particle travelling in a straight line at 2m/s is uniformly accelerated at 5m/s2 for 8seconds. Calculate the displacement of the particle.

s=ut+½at2=(2*8)+(½*5*82)

=176m.

  1. An object accelerates uniformly at 3ms-5. It attains a velocity of 4m/s in 5seconds.
  2. a) What was its initial velocity?

v=u+at

u= 4-(3*5)= 4-15 =4m/s.

  1. b) How far does it travel during this period?

s=ut+½at2= (4*5)+(½*3*52)= 53.5m

  1. A car travelling at 20m/s decelerates uniformly at 4m/s5. In what time will it come to rest?

v=u-at, (a is negative since the body is decelerating).

0=20-4t

t=20/4 =5seconds.

1.6: Motions under the influence of gravity

These include free fall, vertical projection and horizontal projection. The three equations of linear motion hold for motions under the influence of gravity.

1.5.1: Free fall

A body falling freely in a vacuum starts from an initial velocity zero and accelerates at approximately 9.8ms-2 towards the centre of the earth. This is called the acceleration due to gravity g. In this case, the air resistance is assumed to be negligible. Note that in a vacuum, a feather and a stone released from the same height will take the same amount of time to reach the surface of the earth.

Therefore, in the three equations of linear motion u=0m/s, s=h and a=g. thus the three equations become:

  • v=gt, (from v=u+at)
  • h=½gt2, (from s=ut+½gt2)
  • v2=2gh, (from v2=u2+2as)

From the above equations:

  • v= (2gh)½, where v is the velocity of the body just before it hits the ground.
  • h=½gt2=v2/2g, where h is the height through which the body falls.
  • t=v/g=(2h/g)½, where t is the time of flight.

Example 1.4

  1. A hammer falls from the top of a building 5m high.
  2. a) How long does it take to reach the ground? Take g=2ms-5.

h=½gt2

5=½*2t2

t=1½=1s

  1. b) With what velocity does it strike the ground?

v= (2gh)½= (2*2*5)½=2m/s.

1.5.2: Vertical projection

When a body is projected vertically upwards, it decelerates uniformly due to gravity until its velocity reduces to zero at maximum height. After attaining the maximum height, the body then falls back with an increasing velocity. The body must be given an initial velocity and attains a final velocity of zero at its maximum height. Note that the sign of ‘g’ is negative for a vertical projection. This is because the body moves against gravity.

Hence the three equations of linear motion become:

  • v=u-gt, (from v=u+at)
  • h=ut-½gt2, (from s=ut+½gt2)
  • v2=u2-2gh, (from v2=u2-2as)

But at maximum height hmax, v=0. Thus, the three equations reduce to:

  1. gt=u,
  2. h=ut-½gt2

iii. u2=2gh.

From equation (i), the time taken to attain the maximum height is given by;

t=u/g.

Similarly, the initial velocity u and the maximum height attained by the body hmax can be expressed as:

u=gt=(2ghmax)½

And hmax=ut-½gt2=u2/2g.

When the body finally falls back to its point of projection, the displacement of the body will be zero. Substituting this in equation (ii), we obtain;

0=ut-½gt2

Therefore, 0=t(2u-gt)

And t=0 or t=2u/g, where t=0 is the time at the start of the projection and,

t is this is the total time of flight i.e for both upward projection and fall back. Note that the total time of flight is twice the time taken to attain maximum height.

also, the velocity of the body just before hitting its point of projection as it falls back is the same in magnitude but in opposite direction to its initial velocity; v=-u.

Example 1.5

  1. A bullet is shot vertically upwards and rises to a maximum height of 200m. Calculate:
  2. a) the initial velocity of the bullet,

u=(2ghmax)½= (2*2*200)½=

  1. b) the total time of flight.

t=2u/g=2*

  1. An object is released to fall vertically from a height of 20m. At the same time, another object is projected vertically upwards with a velocity of 40m/s.
  2. a) Calculate the time taken before the two objects meet.

Let the time taken to meet be t. then, after a time t the distance covered by the object moving downwards will be; sd=½gt2, (since u=0).

=½*2t2=5t2

The distance covered by the object projected upwards after a time t will be;

su=ut-½gt2=40t-5t2

But sd+su=20m

Therefore, 5t2+40t-5t2=20

t=20/40=5.5s

  1. b) At what height above the point of projection do they meet?

su=ut-½gt2=(40*5.5)-(½*2*5.52)

=66.75m

1.5.3: Horizontal projection

If two objects A and B at a point some height above the ground are such that A is allowed to fall freely (vertically downwards) while is B given a horizontal projection with an initial velocity u, then both objects take the same duration to reach the ground. This is because both are acted on by the same gravitational force. The object on the horizontal projection moves with a constant velocity u. hence, the horizontal acceleration of the object is zero. For the object falling freely, the acceleration is equivalent to ‘g’ and the initial velocity u is zero. However, the object under horizontal projection will strike the ground some distance away from the point the other object strikes the ground. This horizontal distance covered by the object is referred to as the ‘range R’.

Note that both A and B will strike the ground with the same velocity.

u

                                                          u=0                                u

                                                          a=g                                          

u

Path of A                              Path of B (a=0)

 

Since a=0 for the horizontal projection, s=R=ut.

Also, the time taken to reach the ground in both cases is expressed as;

t=u/g.

Example 1.6

  1. A stone is thrown at a velocity of 30m/s to the horizontal by a girl at the top of a tree whose height is 30m. Calculate:
  2. a) the time taken for the stone to strike the ground.

Since both free fall and horizontal projection take the same duration;

h=½gt2

30=½*2*t2

t=6½ =

  1. b) the velocity at which the stone strikes the ground.

u=0 (for free fall).

Therefore, v=(2gh)½ =(2*2*30)½

=

  1. A jet fighter on practice moving at a velocity of 20m/s released a bomb above the ground which hits the ground after 3s. Calculate:
  2. a) the distance from the ground to the jet,

h=½gt2=½*2*32

=45m

  1. b) the horizontal distance from the target when the bomb is released.

R=ut=20*3

=300m.

 

 

 

 

1.7: Experimental determination of acceleration due to gravity.

This can be done as follows:

 

 

 

                                                                                              L         Metre rule

 

 

 

– Set the apparatus as shown in the diagram above. Set the length of the string at 30cm. note that the length l is measured from the centre of the bob.

– Displace the bob sideways through a small angle of about 20 and release it so as to oscillate.

– With the help of a stop watch, measure and record the time for ten oscillations (allow some little oscillations after release before timing). Repeat this step twice or thrice and determine the average time.

Hence calculate the period T(time for one oscillation).

– Repeat the above steps for l=40cm, 50cm, 60cm, 70cm and 80cm. complete the table below:

Length,l (cm) Time for 2oscillations, t(s)

        t1   t2   t3  t=(t1+t2+t3)/3

Period, T(s) T2(s2)
                                         
             
             
             
             
             

 

– plot a graph of T2 against length l in metres.

 

 

Observations and conclusion

The frequency of oscillation increases with decrease in length of the string. A graph of T2 against length l is a straight line through the origin.

Generally, a graph of T2 against length for a simple pendulum satisfies the equation T2=4π2l/g.

Hence, the slope of the graph above is equals to 4π2/g.

 

 

 

 

T2(s2)                                    

 Slope=4π2/g

 

 

                                0                                                          Length(m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 2.: NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION

2.1: Introduction

The laws governing the motion of a body are grouped into three. They are based on the effects of force on a body. Some of the effects of force on a body include:

  • Force can make a stationary body to start moving.
  • Can make a moving to stop.
  • Can deform a body i.e. change its shape.
  • Can change the direction of a moving body.
  • Can change the speed of a moving body.

3.2: Newton’s first law of motion

The law states: a body remains in its state of rest or uniform motion in a straight line unless acted upon by an external force. This explains the following common observations:

  • Passengers in a bus are pushed forward when brakes are applied suddenly or backwards when a bus at rest takes off suddenly. Hence the fitting of seatbelts in vehicles.
  • A coin placed on a cardboard on top of a glass tumbler drops into the tumbler when the cardboard is pulled sideways.
  • Athletes run past the finish line of a race before they finally stop.

These observations show that bodies have an in-built reluctance to changes in their state of motion or rest. The tendency of a body to resist change in its state of rest or motion is called inertia. Hence Newton’s first law of motion is also referred to as the law of inertia.

4.3: Newton’s second law

This law states: the rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the resultant external force acting on the body and takes place in the direction of the force.

Moment of a body is defined as the product of its mass and velocity. Since velocity is a vector quantity, momentum is also a vector quantity having both magnitude (size) and direction.

Momentum P=mass m*velocity v

Hence the unit of momentum is the kilogram-metre per second (kgm/s). The direction of momentum is the same as that of the velocity. The change of momentum is therefore caused by a change in velocity.

Suppose the velocity of a body of mass m changes from an initial value u to a value v after a time t, then:

The initial momentum Pi=mu

The final momentum Pf=mv

The change in momentum= final momentum- initial momentum

Thus ΔP= Pf – Pi= mv- mu=m(v-u)

Therefore, the rate of change of momentum= ΔP/t = m(v-u)/t.

From the equations of linear motion, (v-u)/t =acceleration a

Hence ΔP/t =ma.

From the second law of motion, Fαma.

And so the force F= mass m*acceleration a (F=ma).

Therefore, F=ma=m(v-u)/t

And Ft=m(v-u).

The product of the force and time is called impulse. It is a vector quantity since force is a vector quantity. The unit of impulse is the newton-second(Ns). Impulse is also equal to the change in momentum(mv-mu). Hence impulse can also be expressed in kgm/s.

Example 2.1

  1. Two stones of mass 8kg and 4kg move with velocities 3m/s and 6m/s respectively. Compare their momentum.

P8kg=mv =8*3=24kgm/s

P4kg=mv =4*6=24kgm/s

Hence they have the same momentum.

  1. A ball of mass 35g travelling horizontally at 20m/s strikes a barrier normally and rebounds with a speed of 3m/s. Find the impulse exerted on the ball.

Impulse=Ft=m(v-u)= (0.035*20) – (0.035*-3)

=1.26Ns

Note that the two speeds are in opposite directions.

  1. A kick that lasts 0.03s sends a ball of mass 0.65kg with a velocity of 15m/s northwards. Find:
  1. The change in momentum of the ball.

Note that the ball is initially at rest, i.e. u=0m/s.

ΔP=mv-mu=(0.65*15)-(0.65*0)=9.75kgm/s

  1. The average force exerted on the ball.

F=m(v-u)/t =(9.75kgm/s)/0.03s)=325N

  1. The displacement of the ball in 2 seconds.

The upward acceleration of the ball is negative 2m/s5.

S=ut+1/2at2=(15*0.03)+(1/2*-2*0.032)=2m/s.

2.4: Newton’s third law

The law states: for every action there is an equal and opposite reaction. We look at the working of a lift in relation to the third law of motion in three situations:

  1. When the lift is at rest.

This implies that the resultant force on the lift is zero i.e. action and reaction are equal in size. The force acting on the lift is the weight of the person standing in the lift. This is balanced by the reaction by the floor of the lift.

Therefore, weight mg=- reaction R,

Or simply; mg+R=0.

  1. When the lift descends with an acceleration a

For the lift to move downwards, the weight of the occupant must be greater than the reaction by the floor of the lift. Therefore, the resultant force pulling the lift downwards is equal to the difference between the weight mg and the reaction R;

Resultant force F= mg-R.

From the second law of motion, the resultant force F=ma.

Therefore, ma=mg-R.

And R=mg-ma =m(g-a).

  1. When the lift ascends with an acceleration a

In this case, the reaction by the floor of the lift must be greater than the weight of the occupant. Hence, the resultant force F=ma=R-mg.

And R=ma+mg=m(a+g).

The following are some cases where the third law of motion has been applied in everyday life:

  • A balloon moves in an opposite direction when air in it is released.

Reaction

 

 

 

                                       Air out

  • When a gun is fired, the bullet leaves the gun while the gun recoils backwards.
  • For a person running or walking, one exerts a backward force on the ground with the ground exerting a forward push on the foot of the person. This makes running or walking possible.

Example 2.2

  1. A man of mass 75kg stands on a weighing machine in a lift. Determine the reading on the weighing machine when the lift:
  2. Ascends with an acceleration of 2m/s

F=ma=R-mg

(75*2)=R-(75*2)

R=150+750 =900N

  1. Descends at a constant velocity of 1.5m/s.

F=ma=mg-R

But a=0 since the velocity is constant.

Therefore, 75*0=75*2 – R

R=750N

  1. Descends with an acceleration of 5.5m/s

75*5.5= 75*2 – R

R=750 – 183.5=565.5N

  1. A car of mass 1500kg is brought to rest from a velocity of 25m/s by a constant force of 3000N. Determine the change in momentum produced by the force and the time it takes the car to come to rest.

ΔP=mv-mu=1500(0-25)=-37500kgm/s.

Ft=ΔP

We ignore the negative sign in this part because time is a scalar quantity.

3000*t=37500

t=37500/3000 =15.5seconds.

2.5: Collision and the law of conservation of momentum

This body states that when two or more bodies collide, their total linear momentum before and after collision remain constant provided no external force acts on them;

i.e. momentum before collision= momentum after collision.

There are basically two types of collisions namely elastic and inelastic collision.

  1. Elastic collision

This is where the bodies move separate ways after collision. In this collision, not only linear momentum is conserved but also kinetic energy;

  • Total linear momentum before collision= total linear momentum after momentum.
  • Total kinetic energy before collision= total kinetic energy after collision.
  1. Inelastic collision

This is where the colliding bodies stick together and move as one body after collision. In this type of collision, it is only linear momentum which is conserved but not kinetic energy. This is because during this collision, some deformation takes place which eats up part of the energy while some is converted to heat, sound or light energy.

  • Total linear momentum before collision= total linear momentum after collision.

Example 2.3

  1. A bullet of mass 20g is shot from a gun of mass 20kg with a muzzle velocity of 200m/s. if the bullet is 30cm long, determine:
  1. The acceleration of the bullet.

For the bullet: u=0, v=200m/s, s=0.3m

v2=u2+2as

2002=0+(2)(0.3a)

a=40000/0.6 =5.667*24m/s2

  1. The recoil velocity of the gun.

Total linear momentum before collision=total linear momentum after collision

(20*0)+(0.02*0)=(20*v)+(0.02*200)

v=-4/20= -0.2m/s.

  1. A 5kg mass moving with a velocity of 2m/s collides with a 2kg mass moving at 7m/s along the same line. If the two masses join together on impact, find their common velocity if they were moving:
  1. In opposite directions.

Total linear momentum before collision=total linear momentum after collision

(5*2) + (2*-7)=(5+2)v

15v=-20

v=-20/15 =-1.33m/s

the bodies move in the initial direction of the 2kg mass.

  1. In the same direction.

Total linear momentum before collision=total linear momentum after collision

(5*2)+(2*7)=(5+2)v

15v=120

v=120/15 =8m/s

  1. 990g
     
    1000g
     

    A bullet of mass 2g travelling horizontally at 20m/s embeds itself in a block of wood of mass 990g suspended from a light inextensible string so that it can swing freely. Find:

 

 

 

 

 2gh

 

  1. The velocity of the bullet and block immediately after collision.

(0.01*20)+(0.99*0)=(0.01+0.99)v

v=1/1 =1m/s

  1. The height through which the block rises.

At the maximum height, all the kinetic energy is converted into potential energy.

k.e=p.e

½(mv2)=mgh

½(0.01+0.99)12=(0.01+0.99)(2)h

h=0.05m

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.6: Friction

This is a force acting between two surfaces in contact and tends to oppose the intended motion. Friction may be beneficial but can also be a nuisance.

2.6.1: Advantages of friction

  • Makes walking, writing possible.
  • Required for braking in cars, bicycles etc.
  • Makes rotation of the conveyor belts in factories possible.
  • Necessary for lighting matchsticks.
  • Useful when using nuts, bolts, screw jacks, vices etc.

2.6.2: Limitations of friction

– A lot of energy is lost in the form of heat.

– Causes wear and tear on the pars of machines.

– May lead to noise pollution.

It is therefore important to minimize friction at all cost. This can be done through the following ways:

  • Using rollers.
  • Using ball bearings.
  • Lubrication
  • Air cushioning.

2.6.3: Factors affecting friction

Frictional force is directly proportional to the normal reaction R;

FαR

Or simply F/R= a constant.

The constant is called coefficient of friction µ. It is a measure of the nature of the surfaces in contact.

Hence, frictional force F= normal reaction R* coefficient of friction µ.

When the two bodies are at rest, then the coefficient of friction is referred to as coefficient of static friction while if they are in relative motion, it is called coefficient of kinetic friction. Coefficient of friction has no units.

Hence, friction depends on two factors:

  1. The normal reaction R.
  2. The nature of the surface. Frictional force is greater between rough surfaces than between smooth surfaces.

Note that frictional force is independent of the area of contact of the two surfaces and relative velocity of the bodies.

2.7: Viscosity

Friction exerted by fluids is called viscosity or viscous drag. It is the force which opposes relative motion between layers of the fluid. Viscosity is caused by the forces of attraction between the molecules of the fluid. When a body is put in a fluid, three forces act on it, namely:

  • Weight of the body which acts downwards.
  • Upthrust due to the fluid which acts upwards.
  • Viscous drag due to the fluid which acts upwards.
 

 

 

 

Upthrust U                                        Viscous drag F

 

 Weight W

 

 

When the body enters the fluid, its weight is initially higher than the total upward forces i.e. upthrust plus viscous drag. The resultant force acting on the body accelerates it towards the bottom of the container. As the body sinks down, the viscous drag increases until the three forces balance i.e. W= U+ F. at this point, the body attains its maximum constant velocity called terminal velocity. The resultant force on the body is therefore zero.

The graph of velocity against time for a body falling through a fluid appears as shown below:

 

 

Terminal velocity

 

          Velocity (m/s)

 

                                                                                    

Time(s)

Note that viscosity decreases with increase in temperature.

 

 

TOPIC 3.: WORK, ENERGY, POWER AND MACHINES

3.1: Work and Energy

When a force acting on a body displaces the body in the direction of the force work is said to have been done. Work is the product of force and displacement in the direction of the force;

Workdone= force F*displacement s.

The SI Unit of work is newton-metre (Nm).

1Nm= 1joule (1J).

A joule is defined as the workdone by a force of one newton to displace a body through one metre in the direction of the force.

Other multiples of the joule include kilojoule(kJ) and megajoule(MJ).

Energy on the hand is the ability or capacity to do work. Anything that possesses energy is capable of doing work. The SI Unit of energy is the joule. Energy has the following characteristics:

  • It is not visible.
  • Occupies no space.
  • Has no mass nor any other physical property.

The most common sources of energy include the sun, wind, geothermal, waterfalls, nuclear or atomic energy, fuels etc.

Energy resources may be grouped into two:

  • Renewable energy- can be reused again and again. Their supplies are inexhaustible e.g solar, geothermal, wind energy.
  • Non-renewable energy- their supplies are exhaustible i.e. cannot be reused once exhausted e.g. wood, coal biogas, petroleum etc.

Energy exists in many forms such as mechanical, chemical, heat and electrical energy amongst others. In this topic, we will look at mechanical energy.

3.1.1: Mechanical energy

It is divided into two areas namely kinetic energy and potential energy.

Kinetic energy is the energy possessed by a body in motion. Suppose a body of mass m is moving with a constant velocity v, then its kinetic energy is given by;

Kinetic energy=½(mv2).

Potential energy on the other hand is a form of stored energy in a body when it is in a particular state or position. A body in a raised position possesses gravitational potential energy given by;

P.Eg=mgh, where m- mass of the body, g- gravitational field strength and h- height above the ground.

Also, a stretched or compressed material is able to regain its original shape when released. This is because it possesses a type of potential energy known as elastic potential energy. As can be recalled from Hooke’s law, the workdone in stretching or compressing an elastic material is given by;

W=½(Fe) =½(ke2).

Hence the elastic potential energy is given by;

P.Ee=½(Fe) =½(ke2).

3.1.2: The law of conservation of energy

The law states: energy can neither be created nor destroyed but can be transformed from one form to another.

Alternative statement: the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy of a system is a constant.

Below is the energy transformation in a hydroelectric power station:

P.E of water in a waterfall
K.E energy of falling water
K.E of rotating turbines
Electrical energy
Heat and sound

 

 

 

 

 

 

Example 3.1

  1. A force of 40N is applied on a body. The body moves a horizontal distance of 7m. Calculate the workdone on the body.

W=F*s =40N*7m

=280Nm or 280J

  1. A box of mass 30kg is pushed up an inclined plane of length 14m using a force of 130N as shown below:
30kg

 

 

130N  

  14m                                                  h

 

           200

If the track is inclined at an angle of 200, calculate:

  1. The height of the platform.

Sin 200=h/14

h=14sin 200=

  1. Workdone by the force of 130N.

W=F*s = 130*14 =1820J

  1. Workdone, if the box is lifted vertically upwards. Compare your answer in (b) and (c) above.

W=mgh=300sin 200=

Workdone in pushing the body along the inclined plane is greater than the workdone when lifting the body vertically upwards. This is because of the frictional force between the body and the inclined plane.

 

  1. The frictional force between the box and the inclined plane.

Fr=1820-300sin 200=

  1. A crane is used to lift a body of mass 30kg through a vertical distance of 5.0m.
  1. How much work is done on the body?

W=F*s =(mg)s= 300*6=1800J

  1. What is the potential energy stored in the body?

P.E=mgh=30*2*6=1800J

  1. Comment on the two answers above.

Workdone on the body is equal to the potential energy stored in the body. Hence the workdone against gravity is stored as the potential energy.

  1. A spring of spring constant 25N/m is stretched such that its length increases from 2cm to 20cm. calculate the amount of workdone on stretching the spring.

W=½(ke2)= ½(25)(0.12).

=0.125J

  1. A body of mass 12kg is pulled from the rest with a constant force of 25N. The force is applied for 5.0s. Calculate:
  1. The distance travelled.

F=ma

a=25N/12kg =5.1m/s2, u=0, t=6

s=ut+1/2at2=(0*6)+1/2(5.1)(62)=33.8m

  1. Workdone on the body.

W=F*s =25*33.8 =945J

  1. The final kinetic energy of the body.

K.E=workdone= 945J

  1. The final velocity of the body.

K.E=1/2(mv2)=945J

v={(2*945)/12}1/2= 15.6m/s.

3.2: Power

Power is defined as the rate of doing work;

Power=workdone/time.

The SI Unit of power is the watt (W).

1W= 1J/s.

Other multiples of the watt include the kilowatt(kW) and megawatt(MW);

1W=2-3kW

1W=2-6MW

The power of a device is the measure of how fast the device can perform a given task or convert a given amount of energy. For example, a device rated 1kW converts 200J of energy to another form in one second.

Power=workdone/time =Fd/t.

But d/t =velocity v.

Therefore, power= force F*velocity v.

Example 3.2

  1. A person of mass 60kg climbs 3m up a rope in 20seconds. Find the average power developed by the person.

Power=workdone/time =(600*3)/20 =480W

  1. A person of mass 40kg runs up a flight of 50stairs each of height 20cm in 5 seconds. Calculate:
  1. The workdone.

W=mgh=40*2*(50*0.2)=4000J

  1. The average power of the person.

Power=4000J/5s =800W

  1. Explain why the energy the person actually uses to climb up is greater than the calculated workdone.

3.3: Machines

A machine is a device that makes work easier. In a machine, a force applied at one point of a system is used to generate another force at a different point of the system to overcome a load. The following terms are used in machines:

  1. Effort- the force applied to the machine.
  2. Load- the force exerted by the machine.
  3. Mechanical advantage (M.A)- the ratio of the load to effort.

M.A=Load/Effort.

It has no units.

It is dependent on friction between the moving parts and the weight of the parts of the machine that have to be lifted when operating the machine; the greater the friction the smaller the mechanical advantage.

  1. Velocity ratio (V.R)– it is defined as the ratio of the velocity of the effort to the velocity of the load;

V.R= velocity of effort/velocity of load =     Effort distance/time

Load distance/time

Thus V.R=effort distance/load distance.

Velocity ratio also has no units.

  1. Efficiency η

It is the ratio of the workdone on the load (work output) to the workdone by the effort (work input) expressed as a percentage;

Efficiency η= (work output/work input)*5.

Efficiency also depends on the friction between the moving parts and the weight of the moveable parts. Hence the efficiency of a machine is always less than 20%.

Efficiency=work output/work input= (load*load distance)/ (effort*effort distance)

= (load/effort)*(load distance/effort distance)

But load/effort =mechanical advantage (M.A),

And, load distance/effort distance =1/velocity ratio

Therefore, efficiency η= (M.A/V.R)*5.

Example 3.3

  1. A machine requires 6000J of energy to lift a mass of 55kg through a vertical distance of 8m. Calculate its efficiency.

Work input= 6000J

Work output=F*s= 55*2*8 =4400J

Efficiency=(work output/work input)*20= (4400/6000)*20 = 73.33%

  1. An effort of 250N raises a load of 900N through 5m in a machine. If the effort moves through 25m, find:
  1. The useful workdone in raising the load.

Useful workdone=load*load distance =900*5= 4500J

  1. The workdone by the effort.

Workdone by the effort= effort*effort distance= 250*25= 6250J

  1. The efficiency of the machine.

Efficiency= (work ouput/work input)*20= (4500/6250)*20 = 72%.

  1. A machine whose velocity ratio is 8 is used to lift a load of 300N. The effort required is 60N. calculate:
  1. The mechanical advantage of the machine.

M.A= load/effort =300/60 =5

  1. The efficiency of the machine.

Efficiency= (M.A/V.R)*20= (5/8)*20 =65.5%

3.4: Types of machines

Below are some of the common machines:

3.1.1: Inclined plane

 

  L

 

h

 

θ

The distance moved by the effort is L while the vertical height moved by the load is h.

Also, sin θ=h/L

Or simply h=Lsinθ

Therefore, velocity ratio (V.R)= effort distance/ load distance =L/Lsin θ.

Hence V.R= 1/sin θ.

Example 3.4

  1. A man uses an inclined plane to lift a 81kg mass through a vertical height of 1.0m. Given that the angle of inclination of the plane is 300 and its efficiency is 75%, determine:
  1. The effort needed to move the load up the inclined plane at a constant velocity.

V.R=1/sin 30 =2

Therefore, (M.A/2)*20=75

M.A= (2*75)/20 =3/2

3/2 = 82N/effort

Effort= (82*2)/3 =540N

  1. The workdone against friction in raising the mass through the height of 1.0m.

Work input=effort*effort distance = (540*4)/sin 30 =4320J

Work output=load*load distance= 81*2*4= 3240J

Therefore, workdone against friction= 4320-3240= 1180J

3.1.2: A screw and bolt

For a screw, when the effort applied on the head moves through a complete revolution, the screw advances by a distance equivalent to one pitch. A pitch is the distance between two successive threads.

d

 

                                                                                                                

                                                                                                                   Pitch

 

 

Distance moved by the effort= circumference =πd

Distance moved by the load= one pitch

Hence, velocity ratio (V.R)= circumference/pitch =πd/pitch.

For the bolt, effort is applied at the free end of the spanner.

   Radius R

 

 

 

                                          Pitch

 

Therefore, the distance moved by the effort in one revolution= circumference= 2πR.

Hence, V.R= circumference/pitch =2πR/pitch.

Note that a combination of a screw and lever can be used as a jack for fitting heavy loads e.g car jack. When two or more systems are combined together, the overall velocity ratio is the product of the individual velocity ratios;

Combined V.R= V.R1*V.R2*………..*V.Rk

 

Example 3.5

  1. The figure below shows a screw jack whose screw has a pitch of 1mm and has a handle of 25cm long.

 25cm

 

                                                                                        1mm

 

 

 

Determine the velocity ratio of the jack.

V.R= 2πr/pitch= 2π(25cm)/0.1cm= 1571

3.1.3: Lever system

                                 Load arm

L

Effort arm                       

 Effort

 

The velocity ratio of a lever system is the ratio of the effort arm to the load arm;

V.R= Effort arm/ Load arm.

3.1.4: Gears

A gear is a wheel with equally spaced teeth or cogs around it. The wheel on which the effort is applied is called the driving (input) gear while the load gear is referred to as the driven (output) gear. Suppose the driving gear has n teeth and the driven gearN teeth, then when the driving gear makes one complete revolution the driven gear makes n/N revolutions.

 

V.R of the system =          Number of revolutions made by the effort (driving) gear

Number of revolutions made by the load (driven) gear.

V.R =   1revolution        =N/n

n/N revolutions

Hence, velocity ratio of a gear system is the ratio of the number of teeth of the driven gear to the number of teeth of the driving gear;

 

V.R=    Number of teeth of the driven gear

Number of teeth of the driving gear

Example 3.6

  1. A driving gear having 25teeth engages with a second gear with 20teeth. A third gear with 30 teeth on the same shaft as the second one engages with a fourth gear having 60teeth. Find:
25
100
30
60
  • The total velocity ratio of the system.

 

 

 

Combined V.R=V.R1*V.R2                          

 

V.R1=No. of teeth of driven gear/ No. of teeth of driving gear

= 20/25= 4

V.R2=60/30= 2

Hence, V.R= 4*2= 8

  1. The mechanical advantage of the system if its efficiency is 85%.

Efficiency= (M.A/8)*20= 85

M.A= (85*8)/20= 5.8

3.1.5: Pulleys

A pulley is a wheel with a groove to accommodate a string or rope. There are three possible systems of pulleys namely single fixed, single moveable and a block and tackle.

L
  • Single fixed pulley

 

 

 

E

 

In this arrangement, both the effort and load move through the same distance. Hence the velocity ratio of the system is one.

L
  • Single moveable pulley

E

 

 

 

 

The load is supported by two sections of the string. If the load is pulled upwards through a distance of 1m, each section of the string also moves through 1m. Hence the effort moves through a total distance of 2m.

Therefore, the velocity ratio of the system = effort distance/load distance =2m/1m =5.

  1. A block and tackle
L

This system comprises two sets; one set fixed and the other moveable. A single string is then passed around each pulley in turn. The arrangement can take several forms depending on the desired velocity ratio. Below is an example:

 

E

 

 

 

 

In this case, there are four sections of the string supporting the load. Hence, when the load moves upwards through a distance of 1m, each section of the string also shortens by 1m. Therefore, the total distance moved by the effort (string) is 4m.

Thus, V.R of the system= effort distance/load distance =4m/1m =1. Coincidentally, the velocity ratio of the system is the same as the number of sections of the string supporting the load.

Generally, the velocity ratio of a block and tackle system is given by the number of sections of the string supporting the load.

Practically, the efficiency of any pulley system is less than 20%. This is as a result of two reasons:

  • The friction between the moveable parts.
  • The weight of the parts that have to be lifted when operating the system.

Example 3.7

  1. The figure below shows a pulley system used to raise a load.
  1. State the velocity ratio of the system.
L

V.R=number of strings supporting the load= 6

  1. If an effort of 200N is needed to raise a load of 4500N, determine the efficiency of the system.

M.A= load/effort= 4500N/200N= 1.5

Efficiency = (M.A/V.R)*20= (1.5/6)*20= 75%

  1. Calculate the wasted energy if a mass of 500kg is lifted up through a height of 2m using the same system.

Work ouput= load*load distance= 500*2*2= 2000J

Efficiency= (work output/work input)*20

Therefore, (2000J/work input)*20=75

Work input= (2000*20)/75 =13333.33J

Wasted energy= 13333.33-2000= 3333.33J

Alternatively, wasted energy=25% of work input= (25/20)*13333.33J=3333.33

3.6: Hydraulic machine

Consider the diagram below:

  L

 

 

Effort, EEffort piston area, a.                         Load piston area, A

                                             dl

de

 

 

When the effort is applied as shown, the volume of the liquid leaving the effort arm is the same as the volume of the liquid entering the load arm;

i.e. a*de=A*dl,

de/dl= A/a

Therefore, the velocity ratio of a hydraulic system is the ratio of the area of the load piston to the area of the effort piston. If the pistons are circular then;

V.R=area of load piston/area of effort piston =πR2/πr2

  1. =R2/r2, where R- is the radius of the load piston and r- is the radius of the effort piston.

Example 3.8

  1. In the figure below x=30cm, y=6cm, effort E=60N, A1=4cm2 and A2=12cm5.
 

x

    Load

Ey

A1A2

                                                    

 

Calculate:

  1. a) The force F exerted on the liquid at A1.

By the principle of moments;

60N*30cm= F*6cm

F= (60*30)/6= 300N

  1. b) The velocity ratio of the system.

V.R of the lever system= effort arm/load arm =30cm/6cm= 5

V.R of the hydraulic system= area of load piston/area of effort piston= 12cm2/4cm2= 3

Therefore, the combined V.R= 5*3= 15

  1. c) The maximum load that can be raised by the system.

Pressure at A1= Pressure at A2

300N/4cm2 =L/12cm2

L= (300*12)/4 =900N.

3.7: Wheel and axle

It consists of a large wheel of radius R attached to an axle of radius r.

L
L

 

 

Wheel                                              Axle                                                                                     

                          

    E

                                                                                                                                                                E

 

Note that in this case, both the wheel and axle make the same number of revolutions at any time;

Thus, in one revolution the distance moved by the effort= 2πR,

And the distance moved by the load= 2πr.

Hence, the velocity ratio of the system= 2πR/2πr = R/r.

Thus the velocity ratio of a wheel and axle is the ratio of the radius of the wheel to the radius of the axle.

Example 3.9

  1. A wheel and axle is used to raise a load of 140N by a force of 20N applied to the brim of the wheel. If the radii of the wheel and axle are 70cm and 5cm respectively, calculate the mechanical advantage, velocity ratio and efficiency of the system.

M.A= load/effort =140N/20N= 7

V.R =radius of the wheel/radius of the axle= 70cm/5cm= 14

Efficiency= (M.A/V.R)*20

= (7/14)*20= 50%

3.8: Pulley belt

  L

This is where one wheel is used to drive another wheel by means of a belt.

 

Driven wheel radius r                                                                                       Driving wheel radius R

  Load                                            E                                                                                      

The driving wheel covers a distance 2πR in one revolution while the driven wheel covers a distance 2πr in one revolution. If the driving wheel makes one revolution, the driven wheel makes   2πR/2πr (R/r) revolutions.

V.R of the system=         Number of revolutions made by the effort (driving) wheel

Number of revolutions made by the load (driven) wheel

V.R = 1/(R/r) =r/R

Therefore, the velocity ratio of a pulley belt is the ratio of the radius of the driven (load) wheel to the radius of the driving (effort) wheel.

 

 

  1. LECTROSTATICS II

  4.0 Charge distribution on the surface of a conductor

The quantity of charge per unit area of the surface of a conductor is called charge density. The charge distribution on a conductor depends on the shape of the conductor. Generally, the charge concentration on a spherical conductor is uniform while that on a sharp point is high.

 

 

 

 

The high charge concentration at sharp points makes it easier to gain or lose charges. The effects of high charge concentration at sharp points can be seen in the following cases:

 Electric wind

When a highly charged sharp point is brought close to a candle flame, the flame is observed to drift away as if there was wind. The high charge concentration at the sharp point ionizes the surrounding air producing both positive and negative charges. Opposite charges are attracted to the point while similar charges are repelled away from the point blowing away the flame.

 

 

 

 

If the point is brought very close, the flame splits into two; one part moves towards the point and the other part away from the point. This is because a flame has both positive and negative ions. The negative ions are attracted towards the point while the positive ions are repelled away from the point.

 

 

 

 Lightning arrestors

When clouds move in the atmosphere, they rub against the air particles and produce a large amount of static charges by friction. These charges induce large amounts of the opposite charge on the earth. Hence a high potential difference is created between the earth and cloud. This makes air to be a charge conductor. The opposite charges attract each other and neutralize, causing thunder and lightning. Lightning can be very destructive to buildings and other structures.

Lightning arrestors are used to safeguard such structures. It consists of a thick copper plate buried deep under the ground. The plate is connected by a thick copper wire to the spikes at the top of the building. The arrestor assumes the same charge as the earth. At the spikes, a high charge density builds up and a strong electric field develops between the cloud and the spikes. The air around the spikes is ionized. The opposite charges attract each other and neutralize. Excess electrons flow to the ground through the thick copper wire.

It is for this reason that people are advised not to take shelter under trees when it is raining.

 Applications of static charges

  • Electrostatic precipitator

One of the causes of air pollution globally is increased industrialization. Some industries have indeed responded to this challenge by installing electrostatic precipitators which are found within the chimneys.

An electrostatic precipitator consists of a cylindrical metal plate fixed along the walls of the chimney and a wire mesh suspended through the middle.

The plate is charged positively by connecting it to a high voltage, approximately 50,000V and the wire mesh charged negatively. As a result, a strong electric field exists between the plate and the wire mesh. The ionized pollutant particles get attracted; some to the plate and others to the wire mesh.The deposits are removed occasionally. The same principle is used in fingerprinting and photocopying.

  • Spray painting

The nozzle of the spraying can is charged. When spraying, the paint droplets acquire similar charge and spread out finely due to repulsion. As the droplets approach a metallic body, they induce opposite charge which then attracts them to the metal surface. This ensures that little paint is used.

Dangers of static charges

When a liquid flows through a pipe, its molecules rub against each other and against the walls of the pipe and become charged. If the liquid is flammable like petrol, it is likely to cause sparks or even explosion. This can also happen to fuels when they are packed in plastic containers.

It is therefore advisable to store fuels and other flammable liquids in metallic containers so that any charges generated can continually leak out. This also explains why long chains hang underneath fuel tankers as they move.

4.1: Electric field

This is the region around a charged body where its influence (attraction and repulsion) can be felt. It is represented lines of force called electric field lines. The direction of an electric field is the direction in which a positive charge would move if placed at that point.

Electric field lines have the following properties:

  • Originate from a positive charge and terminate at a negative charge
  • Do not cross each other i.e. do not intersect
  • Are parallel at uniform field, close together at strong fields and widely spaced at weaker fields.

4.2: Electric field patterns

The electric field pattern between two charged bodies obeys the law of electrostatics. Below are some patterns between charged bodies:

 

(a)         (b)

 

 

c)

Neutral point

 

 

 

NB/At the neutral point, the resultant effect is zero.

4.3: Capacitors

A capacitor is a device used for storing charge. It consists of two or more metal plates separated by a vacuum or a material medium (insulator). This material is known as a ‘dielectric’. Other materials that can be used as a dielectric include air, plastic, glass e.t.c. the symbol of a capacitor is shown below:

 

 

There are three main types of capacitors namely paper capacitors, electrolytic capacitors and variable capacitors. Others include plastic, ceramic and mica capacitors.

4.4: Charging a capacitor

 

 

Experiment: To charge a capacitor

Apparatus :Uncharged capacitor of 500µF, 5.0V power supply, rheostat, voltmeter, milliammeter, switch, connecting wires and a stop watch.

mA
v

 

 

 

 C                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     

 

Procedure

  1. Set up the apparatus as shown above.
  2. Close the switch and record the values of current, I at various time intervals. Tabulate your values in the table below:
Time, t(s) 0 2 20 30 40 50 60 70
Current, I( mA)                
It ( mAs)                

 

  • Plot a graph of current, I against time, t
  1. Plot a graph of It against time.

Observations

The charging current is initially high but gradually reduces to zero. A graph of current, I against time appears as shown below:

 

 

I (mA)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              t (s)

The charging current drops to zero when the capacitor is fully charged. As the p.d. across the capacitor increases the charge in the capacitor also increases up to a certain value. When the capacitor is fully charged, the p.d across the capacitor will be equals the p.d of the source.

A graph of p.d across the capacitor against time is exponential. A graph of It against time is also exponential.

 

 

p.d (V)                                                                     It (mAs)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    

t (s)            t (s)

NB                                                                                                                                                                                    

The product It represents the amount of charge in the capacitor.

1.5: Discharging a capacitor

Experiment: To discharge a capacitor

G

Apparatus :A charged capacitor, resistor, galvanometer, switch and connecting wires.

C                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Procedure

  • Set up the apparatus as shown above.
  • Close the switch and record the values of current at various time intervals in the table below.
Time, t(s) 0 2 20 30 40 50 60 70
Current, I ( mA)                

 

  • Plot a graph of current, I against time, t.

Observations

The value of current is seen to reduce from maximum value to zero when the capacitor is fully discharged. The galvanometer deflects but in the opposite direction to that during charging.

During discharging, the p.d. across the capacitor reduces to zero when the capacitor is fully discharged. The graphs below show the variation between current, I and time, t and between the p.d across the capacitor and time, t.

          +                                    

I (mA)                                                                                                 p.d (V)                                                                                                                                                                                       t (s)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    –                                                                                                                                                                      

t (s)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               

A graph of charge in the capacitor, Q against time, t during discharging also appears like that of p.d against time i.e. p.d across the capacitor is directly proportional to the charge stored.

4.6: Capacitance

Capacitance of a capacitor is defined as the measure of the charge stored by the capacitor per unit voltage; C = Q/V

Hence Q = CV

Recall: Q = It

Therefore Q= CV = It

The SI Unit of capacitance is the farad, F. A farad is the capacitance of a body if a charge of one coulomb raises its potential by one volt.

Other smaller units of capacitance are: microfarad (µF), nanofarad (nF) and picofarad (Pf).

i.e.  1 µF = 2-6 F

1 nF = 2-9F

1 pF = 2-12F

4.7: Factors affecting capacitance of a capacitor

The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor depends on three factors, namely:

  • Area of overlap of the plates, A
  • Distance of separation, d between the plates
  • Nature of the dielectric material

Experiment: To investigate the factors affecting capacitance

Apparatus: 2 aluminium plates, K and L of dimensions 25cm * 25cm,Insulating polythene support, uncharged electroscope, Glass plate, earthing wireand a free wire.

K               L

 

Procedure

  • Fix the plates on the insulating support so that they stand parallel and close to each other as shown above.
  • Charge plate K to a high voltage and then connect it to the uncharged electroscope. Earth the second plate, L.
  • While keeping the area of overlap, A the same vary the distance of separation, d and observe the leaf divergence.
  • While keeping the distance of separation, d constant vary the area of overlap, A and observe the leaf divergence.
  • While keeping both the area of overlap and the distance of separation, d constant introduce the glass plate between the plates of the capacitor and observe what happens to the leaf.

Observations

  1. When the distance of separation is increased the leaf divergence also increased.
  2. When the area of overlap is increased the leaf divergence decreased.
  3. When the glass plate is introduced between the plates, the leaf divergence increased.

Note that the leaf divergence here is a measure of the potential, V of plate K. Hence the larger the divergence the greater the potential and thus the lower the capacitance ( since C = Q/V, but Q is constant).

Conclusion

From the above observations, it follows that the capacitance is directly proportional to the area of overlap between the plates and inversely proportional to the distance of separation. It also depends on the nature of the dielectric material.

C ∝ A/d

C = εA/d where ε is a constant called permittivity of the dielectric material (epsilon).

If between the plates is a vacuum, then ε = ε0, known as epsilon nought and is given by 6.85 * 2-12 Fm-1. Hence C = ε0A/d

        Example 9.1

  1. How much charge is stored by a 300μF capacitor charged up to 12V? give your answer in (a) μC  (b) C     {ans. 3600μC/0.0036C}

Solution

  1. Q= CV = 300 * 12 =3600μC b) 3600 * 2-6 =0.0036C
  1. What is the average current that flows when a 720μF capacitor is charged to 2V in 0.03s?

{ans.  0.24A}

Solution

Q = CV =It

I= 720 * 2-6 *2 / 0.03 =0.24A.

  1. Find the separation distance between two plates if the capacitance between them is 1.0 * 2-12C and the enclosed area is 5.0 cm5. Take ε0 = 6.85 * 2-12Fm-1. { d = 1.425 * 2-4 m}

Solution

C = ε0A/d

d = 6.85 * 2-12 * 5.0 * 2-4 / 1.0 * 2-12

= 1.425 * 2-4 m

4.8: Arrangement of capacitors

  1. a) Series arrangement

Consider three capacitors; C1, C2 and C3 arranged as shown below:

 C1                     C2 C3

 

V1  V2  V3

 

V

Recall V = V1 + V2 + V3 and Q = CV

When capacitors are connected in series, the charged stored in them is the same and equals the charge in the circuit.

i.e.          Q = Q1 = Q2 =Q3

Therefore V1 = Q /C1, V2 = Q /C2, and V3 = Q /C3

V = Q/C1 + Q/C2 + Q/C3

Dividing through by Q, we obtain V/Q = 1/C1 + 1/C2 + 1/C3

Since V/Q = 1/C

1/C = 1/C1 + 1/C2 + 1/C3

Where C is the combined capacitance.

In a special case of two capacitors in series, the effective/combined capacitance,

C = C1C2/ (C1 + C2).

  1. Capacitors in parallel

When capacitors are arranged in parallel, the potential drop across each of them is the same.

C1                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               

                                                           C2                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            V                                      C3                                                                                               

 

 

Q1 = C1V, Q2 = C2V, Q3 = C3V

The total charge, Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3

Q = C1V + C2V + C3V = V (C1 + C2 + C3)

Dividing through by V, we obtain Q / V = C1 + C2 + C3

Since C = Q/V,

C = C1 + C2 + C3

Hence the combined capacitance for capacitors in parallel is the sum of their capacitance.

Example 4.2

  1. In the circuit below, calculate:
  2. The effective capacitance of the capacitors
  3. The charge on each capacitor
  4. The p.d across the plates of each capacitor

6V

 

    12µF         24µF                      

Solution

  1. C = 12 * 24 / 12 + 24 =8µF
  2. Q1 = Q2 = CV = 8 * 6 = 48μC
  3. V1 = 48/12 = 4V, V2 = 48/24 = 2V
  4. The figure below shows an arrangement of capacitors connected to a 2V d.c supply.

Determine: a) The combined capacitance of the arrangement

  1. b) The total charge in the circuit

( ans. 0.7778μF,3.778μC)

  1. CBD =3*3/3+3 = 1.5μF

CAE = 2+1.5 = 3.5μF

C = 3.5*1/3.5+1 = 0.7778μF

  1. Q = CV = 0.7778*2 = 3.778μC.

Assignment 1.3

The figure below shows part of a circuit connecting 3 capacitors. Determine the effective capacitance across AC.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           

2μF                                  15μF                                                                                                                                                                                           

A          C                                                                                                                                                                                        

B5μF

 

 

4.9: Energy stored by a capacitor

During charging, the addition of electrons to the negatively charged plate involves doing work against the repulsive force. Also the removal of electrons from the positively charged plate involves doing some work against the attractive force. This work done is stored in the capacitor in the form of electrical potential energy. This energy may be converted to heat, light or other forms. A graph of p.d, V against charge, Q is a straight line through the origin whose gradient gives the capacitance of the capacitor.

 

 

 

p.d (V)

 

 

                                   Charge, Q (C)

The area under this graph is equal to the work done or energy stored in the capacitor.

i.e. E = ½ QV   but Q = CV

HenceE = ½ CV2 =Q2 /2C

Example 1.3

  1. The figure below shows two capacitors connected to a 12V supply

 

12V                                  12μF              6μF                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     

Determine: a) the effective capacitance of the circuit

  1. b) Charge on each capacitor
  2. c) Energy stored in the combination

{ans. 18μF, 72μC, 5.46 * 2-3J}

  1. 12+6 = 18μF b) Q1= 12*12 =144μC    c) E= ½ CV2 =1/2 *18*2-6*122 =5.46*2-3J
  2. In the figure below, calculate the energy stored in the combined capacitor.

2μF                    3μF   

 

                                                                                                                    2V

{ ans. 5.4*2-6)

C = 2*3 /2+3 =1.2μF

E = ½ *1.2 *2-6 *22 = 5.4 * 2-6 J

 

45.: Application of capacitors

  1. Rectification (smoothing circuits)

In the conversion of alternating current to direct current using diodes, a capacitor is used to maintain a high d.c. voltage. This is called smoothing or rectification.

  1. Reduction of sparking in the induction coil

A capacitor is included in the primary circuit of the induction coil to reduce sparking.

  1. In tuning circuits

A variable capacitor is connected in parallel to an inductor in the tuning circuit of a radio receiver. When the capacitance of the variable capacitor is varied , the electrical oscillations between the capacitor and the inductor changes. If the frequency of oscillations is equal to the frequency of the radio signal at the aerial of the radio, that signal is received.

  1. In delay circuits

Capacitors are used in delay circuits designed to give intermittent flow of current in car indicators.

  1. In camera flash

A capacitor in the flash circuit of a camera is charged by the cell in the circuit. When in use, the capacitor discharges instantly to flash.

 

 

  1. CURRENT ELECTRICITY II

5.1: How to use an ammeter and voltmeter

  • Connect the positive terminal of the ammeter/ voltmeter to the positive terminal of the battery.
  • Ensure that the pointer is initially at zero i.e. there is no zero error. If there is a zero error, correct it before using the instrument.
  • Select an appropriate scale to use.
  • Avoid parallax error taking readings i.e. view the scale normally.

5.2: Ohm’s law

T
v
A

This law relates the current flowing through a conductor and the voltage drop across that section of the conductor. The law states: the current flowing through  a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference across its ends provided temperature and other physical factors are kept constant. The following set up can be used to investigate Ohm’s law:

 

 

 

 

 

  • Close the switch and adjust the current flowing through the conductor T using the rheostat to the least possible value. Record the corresponding voltmeter reading.
  • Increase the current in steps recording the corresponding voltmeter readings. Record your values in the table below:
Current I (A)          
Voltage V (V)          

 

  • Plot a graph of voltage against current. Hence determine the slope of the graph.

A graph of voltage against current is a straight line through the origin. Hence voltage drop across the conductor is directly proportional to the current through it;

 

 

 Voltage (V)                               

                                                                                    ∆V                      Slope= V/ ΔI= resistance R

 

                                                                   ΔI

                                                                           Current I (A)

 

Vα I

V/I = constant

The constant is known as resistance R of the conductor T under investigation.

Thus, V/I= R

Or V= IR.

Hence the slope of a voltage—current graph is equal to the resistance R of the conductor T. electrical resistance can be defined as the opposition offered by a conductor to the flow of electric current. It is measured using an ohmmeter.

The SI Unit of electrical resistance is the ohm (Ω). Other units include kilo-ohm (kΩ) and mega-ohm (MΩ);

1Ω= 2-3kΩ

1Ω= 2-6MΩ

Materials which obey Ohm’s law are said to be ohmic materials while those which do not obey the law are said to be non-ohmic materials. The graph of voltage against current for non-ohmic materials is a curve or may be a straight line but does not pass through the origin.

The inverse on resistance is called conductance;

Conductance= 1/ resistance R.

Example 5.3

  1. Calculate the current flowing through a 8Ω device when it is connected to a 12V supply.

I= V/R

I= 12V/8Ω =1.5A

5.5.1: Factors affecting the resistance of a conductor

There are three main factors that affect the resistance of a conductor:

  1. Temperature

Increase in temperature enhances the vibration of the atoms and thus higher resistance to the flow of current.

  1. Length of the conductor L

The resistance of a uniform conductor increases with increase in length.

  1. Cross section area A

A conductor having a wider cross section area has more free electrons per unit length compared to a thin one. Hence a thicker material has a better conductivity than a thinner one. Generally, resistance varies inversely as the cross section area of the material.

Therefore, at a constant temperature resistance varies directly as the length and inversely as the cross section area of the conductor;

RαL/A

R= (A constant * L/A)

Or simply, AR/L= constant

The constant is called the resistivity of the material;

Resistivity ϱ= (cross section area A * resistance R) / length L.

Resistivity is measured in ohm-metre (Ωm).

Example 5.4

  1. A wire of resistance 3.5Ω has a length of 0.5m and cross section area 6.2 * 2-8m5. Determine its resistivity.

Resistivity ϱ= AR/L = (6.2*2-8m2*3.5Ω)/0.5m

= 5.74*2-7Ωm

  1. Two conductors A and B are such that the cross section area of A is twice that of B and the length of B is twice that of A. If the two are made from the same material, determine the ratio of the resistance of A to that of B.

R=ϱL/A

Therefore, RA= ϱALA/AA

And RB= ϱBLB/AB

Where LB=2LA

AB= 1/2AA

And ϱA= ϱB

Hence RAALA/AA and

RB= 2ϱALA/0.5AA = 4ϱALA/AA

Thus RA/RBALA/AA    = 1/4

ALA/AA

RA: RB= 1:4

5.11: Resistors

A resistor is a specially designed conductor that offers a particular resistance to the flow of electric current. There are three main groups of resistors:

  1. Fixed resistors- offer fixed values of resistance. They have colour bands around them.
  2. Variable resistors- offer varying resistance e.g rheostat and potentiometer.
  3. Non-linear resistors- the current flowing through these resistors does not change linearly with the voltage applied. Examples include a thermistor and light-dependent resistor (LDR).

5.11.1: Measurement of resistance

Three methods may be used:

  1. Voltmeter- ammeter method

In this method, the current flowing through the material and voltage across its ends are measured and a graph of voltage against current plotted. The slope of the graph gives the resistance offered by the material.

 

 

  1. The wheatstone bridge method
R1
R3
R4
R2
G

A wheatstone bridge consists of four resistors and a galvanometer connected as shown below:

I1

 

I1

 I2

                                                                              I2

 

 

 

The values of three out of the four resistors must be known. The value of one of the resistors is adjusted to a point that the galvanometer does not deflect. At this point, the voltage drop across R1 is equal to that across R3. Similarly, the voltage drop across R2 is equal to that across R1. Note that the current flowing through R1 is equal that through R5. Also, the current through R3 is the same to that through R1.

Therefore, I1 R1= I2R3…………………………. i

I1 R2= I2R4…………………………. ii

Dividing equation (i) by (ii), we get;

R1/R2= R3/R4

This method is more accurate compared to the voltmeter- ammeter method since the voltmeter has some resistance against the flow of current and thus takes up some voltage.

  1. The metre bridge method

This method relies on the fact that resistance is directly proportional to the length of the conductor.

 

 

P

 

 

Q

G
R1
R2

 

 

 

 

 

L1                      K                        L2

 

 

 

The values of R1 and R2 must be known. Suppose at point K the galvanometer does not deflect, then the voltage drop across R1 equal the voltage drop across the section L1. Similarly, the voltage drop across R2 equals the voltage drop across the section L5. If the current through R1 and R2 is I1 and that through the section L1 and L2 is I2, then;

I1R1= I2L1 ………………………….. i

I1R2=I2L2 …………………………… ii

Dividing equation (i) by (ii), we get;

R1/R2= L1/L2

 

Example 5.5

  1. R
    30
    G

    In an experiment to determine the resistance of a nichrome wire using the metre bridge, the balance point was found to be at the 40cm mark. Given that the value of the resistor to the right is 30Ω, calculate the value of the unknown resistor R.

 

 

A                                      C                                                                    B

 

 

LAC/LCB = R/30Ω

40cm/60cm = R/30Ω

R= (30*40)/60 = 20Ω

5.11.2: Resistor networks

  1. a) Series network

When resistors are arranged in series the same current pass through each one of them. Consider three resistors connected as shown below:

R1  R2  R3

             I               V1 V2 V3

 

V

From Ohm’s law, V= IR.

The voltage drop across R1; V1= IR1

The voltage drop across R2; V2 =IR2

The voltage drop across R3; V3=IR3

And the total circuit voltage V= V1+V2+V3.

Thus V= IR1+IR2+IR3=I(R1+R2+R3)

V/I =(R1+R2+R3)

But V/I = R

Thus the combined circuit resistance R=R1+R2+R3.

Generally, the effective resistance of resistors arranged in series is equal to the sum of the individual resistances.

  1. Parallel network

When resistors are connected in parallel, the same voltage is dropped across them. Consider three resistors connected as shown below:

 

                                V

                                                   R1

                                                   R2

   I               R3

 

 

V

Suppose the current flowing through R1 is I1, through R2 is I2 and through R3 is I3 then:

The voltage drop across R1; V1=I1R1

The voltage drop across R2; V2=I2R2

The voltage drop across R3; V3=I3R3

But V1= V2= V3= V and I=I1+I2+I3

Therefore, I=V/R1 + V/R2 + V/R3

I/V = (1/R1 + 1/R2 + 1/R3)

But I/V= 1/R.

Hence 1/R= 1/R1 + 1/R2 + 1/R3

R is the combined circuit resistance.

Special case of two resistors in parallel

It follows that 1/R= 1/R1+1/R2

1/R= (R1+R2)/R1R2

Hence the effective resistance R= R1R2/ (R1+R2).

Generally for n resistors arranged in parallel, the effective resistance of the arrangement is given by; 1/R=1/R1+1/R2+…………..+1/Rn

NOTE: when a circuit comprise of both series and parallel connections, the arrangement is systematically reduced to a single resistor.

 

 

Example 5.6

  1. The figure below shows 3 resistors.

 53

 

 8

  12V

Calculate:

  1. The effective resistance of the circuit.

R= (8+5+3)Ω = 3Ω

  1. The total current in the circuit.

I=V/R = 12V/3Ω = 0.75A

  1. The voltage drop across each resistor.

V8= 0.75*8 = 5.0V

V5= 0.75*5 =3.75V

V3=0.75*3 =5.25V

  1. Three resistors are connected as shown below:

   5

   3

    6

 

12V

Calculate:

  1. The total resistance of the circuit.

1/R= 1/5+1/3+1/6

1/R= (6+2+5)/30 =21/30

R= 30/21 = 1.4286Ω

  1. The current through each resistor.

I5=12V/5Ω=5.4A

I3=12V/3Ω=1.0A

I6=12V/6Ω=5.0A

 

 

  1. The figure below shows five resistors and 5.0V supply.

4

6V                       1Ω                                    2Ω             3Ω

 0.2Ω

Calculate:

  1. The effective resistance of the circuit.

R2,3Ω=(2*3)/(2+3) = 1.2Ω

R4,1.2,0.2Ω=4+1.2+0.2 =5.4Ω

R= R1,5.4Ω=(1*5.4)/(1+5.4) = 0.8438Ω

  1. The total circuit current.

I=V/R =6V/0.8438Ω =3.127A

5.11.3: Internal resistance r

When a cell supplies current in a circuit, the potential difference between its terminals is observed to be lower than its electromotive force (emf). This difference is due to the internal resistance of the cell. Some work must be done to overcome this resistance and so the drop in the emf of the cell is responsible for this. The difference is referred to as the lost volt and is given by Ir.

i.e. lost volts= emf-terminal voltage

Or simply emf= terminal voltage + lost volts

The mathematical equation connecting emf, circuit current, external resistance and internal resistance of the cell is given by:

E= IR + Ir= I(R+r).

Internal resistance of a cell can be obtained experimentally. In such an experiment, the following data was obtained:

Current I(A) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8
Voltage V(V) 1.43 1.30 1.4 1.09 0.82 0.58

When a graph of Voltage V against current I is plotted, the graph will appear as shown below:

 

 

The slope of the graph= -r (-internal resistance) while the y-intercept= emf of the cell.

 

emf

                                                                                                                                                                

Voltage (V)

ΔV

                                                                               

ΔI

Current I (A)

                   

 

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 6.: HEATING EFFECT OF ELECTRIC CUURENT

6.1: Introduction

When current flows through a conductor, heat energy is generated in the conductor. The heating effect of an electric current depends on three factors:

  • The resistance, R of the conductor. A higher resistance produces more heat.
  • The time, t for which current flows. The longer the time the larger the amount of heat produced
  • The amount of current, I. the higher the current the larger the amount of heat generated.

Hence the heating effect produced by an electric current, I through a conductor of resistance, R for a time, t is given by H = I2Rt. This equation is called the Joule’s equation of electrical heating.

6.2: Electrical energy and power

The work done in pushing a charge round an electrical circuit is given by w.d = VIt

So that power, P = w.d /t = VI

The electrical power consumed by an electrical appliance is given by P = VI = I2R = V2/R

Example 6.1

  1. An electrical bulb is labeled 20W, 240V. Calculate:
  1. The current through the filament when the bulb works normally
  2. The resistance of the filament used in the bulb.

{ ans. 0.437A, 575.04}

Solution

  1. I = P/V = 20/240 = 0.437A
  2. R = P/I2 = 20/ 0.4372 = 575.04Ω or R = V2/P =2402/20 = 576Ω
  1. Find the energy dissipated in 5 minutes by an electric bulb with a filament of resistance of 500Ω connected to a 240V supply. { ans. 34,560J}

Solution

E = Pt = V2/R *t = (2402 *5*60)/500 = 34,560J

  1. A 5.5 kW immersion heater is used to heat water. Calculate:
  1. The operating voltage of the heater if its resistance is 24Ω
  2. The electrical energy converted to heat energy in 2 hours.

{ans. 241.9488V, 1.8*27J}

 

Solution

  1. P=VI=I2R

I = (2500/24)1/2 =5.2062A

V=IR= 5.2062 * 24 = 241.9488V

  1. E = VIt = Pt = 2500*2*60*60 = 1.8 * 27J

OR  E= VIt = 241.9488 * 5.2062 * 2 * 60 * 60 = 1.8 * 27J

  1. An electric bulb is labeled 20W, 240V. Calculate:
  1. The current through the filament
  2. The resistance of the filament used in the bulb.

{ans. 0.437A, 575.95}

Solution

  1. P = VI I = P/V = 20/240 =0.437A
  2. From Ohm’s law, V =IR R=V/I =240/0.437 = 575.95Ω

6.3: Applications of heating effect of electric current

Most household electrical appliances convert electrical energy into heat by this means. These include filament lamps, electric heater, electric iron, electric kettle, etc.

In lighting appliances

  1. Filament lamps- it is made of a tungsten wire enclosed in a glass bulb from which air has been removed. This is because air would oxidize the filament. The filament is heated up to a high temperature and becomes white hot. Tungsten is used due its high melting point; 34000 The bulb is filled with an inactive gas e.g. argon or nitrogen at low pressure which reduces evaporation of the tungsten wire. However, one disadvantage of the inert gas is that it causes convection currents which cool the filament. This problem is minimized by coiling the wire so that it occupies a smaller area which reduces heat loss through convection.
  2. Fluorescent lamps- these lamps are more efficient compared to filament lamps and last much longer. They have mercury vapour in the glass tube which emits ultraviolet radiation when switched on. This radiation causes the powder in the tube to glow (fluoresce) i.e. emits visible light. Different powders produce different colours. Note that fluorescent lamps are expensive to install but their running cost is much less.

In electrical heating

  1. Electric cookers- electric cookers turn red hot and the heat energy produced is absorbed by the cooking pot through conduction.
  2. Electric heaters- radiant heaters turn red at about 9000C and the radiation emitted is directed into the room by polished reflectors.
  3. Electric kettles- the heating element is placed at the bottom of the kettle so that the liquid being heated covers it. The heat is then absorbed by water and distributed throughout the whole liquid by convection.
  4. Electric irons- when current flows through the heating element, the heat energy developed is conducted to the heavy metal base raising its temperature. This energy is then used to press clothes. The temperature of the electric iron can be controlled using a thermostat (a bimetallic strip).

 

 

 

TOPIC 7.: QUANTITY OF HEAT

7.1: Introduction

When heat is transferred from one body to another, the body which loses heat has its temperature lowered while that which gains heat has its temperature raised.

7.2: Terms used

Heat capacity, C.

This is the quantity of heat energy required to raise the temperature of a given mass of substance by one Kelvin.

i.e. heat capacity, C = Q (J)/Δθ (K)

Hence the SI Unit of heat capacity is joule per Kelvin (JK-1).

Specific heat capacity, c

This is the quantity of heat energy required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of a substance by one Kelvin. i.e. c = Q (J)/mΔθ (KgK)

Q = mcΔθ

The SI Unit of specific heat capacity is joules per kilogram per Kelvin (JKg-1K-1).

Note that c = C/m

Therefore heat capacity, C = mass, m * specific heat capacity, c.

The table below shows some substances with their specific heat capacities:

Material s.h.c ( JKg-1K-1)
Water 4200
Alcohol 2300
Kerosene 2200
Ice 220
Aluminium 900
Glass 830
Iron 460
Copper 390
Mercury 140
Lead 130

 

 

7.5.1:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determination of the specific heat capacity

By the method of mixtures

  1. h.c of solids

In this method, a known mass of a solid, e.g. a metal block is heated by dipping it in a bath of hot water.  After some time, the solid is very fast transferred into cold water in a calorimeter and whose mass is known.

 

  Stirrer                     thermometer

                                        Boiling water

                                        Metal block                 Cardboard cover                          

                                                                                                   

 Calorimeter                                                                                                                                      

                    Heat                                                   Lagging material

                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Metal block

                                                                                                       Water

The calorimeter is then covered using a piece of cardboard and stirred continuously. The following measurements are then recorded:

  • Mass of the solid metal block, ms
  • Mass of copper calorimeter with the stirrer, mc
  • Mass of the calorimeter and stirrer + water, m1
  • Temperature of the boiling water (initial temperature of the metal block), θs
  • Temperature of cold water in the calorimeter (initial temperature of calorimeter), θw
  • Final steady temperature of the mixture, θ

Calculation

Mass of the water in the calorimeter = m1 – mc = mw

Temperature change of the hot metal block = θs – θ

Temperature change of the water in the calorimeter and the calorimeter = θ- θw

Assuming there is no heat loss to the surrounding when the metal block is being transferred into the cold water and thereafter;

Amount of heat lost by the metal block = amount of heat gained by calorimeter with stirrer +   amount of heat gained by water in the calorimeter.

i.e. mscss-θ) = mccc(θ-θw) + mwcw(θ-θw)

wherecs – s.h.c. of the metal block

cc – s.h.c. of the copper calorimeter

cw – s.h.c. of water.

Hence s.h.c. of the metal block, cs=[mccc(θ-θw) + mwcw(θ-θw)] /mss-θ)

  1. h.c. of a liquid

In this case, a solid of known s.h.c. is used and the water in the calorimeter is replaced with the liquid whose s.h.c. is to be determined. The solid metallic block is first heated in a bath of boiling water and then transferred into the calorimeter containing the liquid. The following measurements are then collected:

  • Mass of the metal block, ms
  • Mass of the calorimeter with stirrer, mc
  • Mass of the calorimeter, stirrer and the liquid, m1
  • Initial temperature of the metal block, θs
  • Initial temperature of the liquid, θl
  • Final steady temperature of the mixture, θ

If the there is no heat loss to the surrounding, then the quantity of heat lost by the metal block equals the quantity of heat gained by the calorimeter with stirrer and the liquid.

i.e. mscss– θ) = [mccc(θ-θl) + mlcl(θ-θl)]

Hence cl = [mccss – θ) – mccc(θ-θl)] / ml(θ-θl)

Alternatively the s.h.c. of a liquid can be obtained by mixing it with another liquid whose specific heat capacity is known and their common temperature determined.

The following precautions must be taken to minimize heat losses to the surroundings:

  • Using a highly polished calorimeter
  • Heavily lag the calorimeter
  • Using a lid of poor thermal conductivity

Example 7.1

  1. 70g of a solid initially at 250C was carefully dropped into water in a calorimeter at 600C. If the final constant temperature of the water and the solid was 540C and the mass of water is 500g, determine the specific heat capacity of the solid. Assume the heat absorbed by the calorimeter to be negligible. Take the s.h.c. of water = 4200JKg-1K-1.

{ans. 2, 767.23JKg-1K-1}

Solution

Heat lost = heat gained

mwcwΔθw = mscsΔθs

0.5Kg * 4200JKg-1K-1 * (60-54) K = 0.07kg * cs * (54-25) K

Cs = 29400J / 5.73KgK = 1O, 767.23 JKg-1K-1

  1. A student heated 20Kg of water to a temperature of 800C. He then added x Kg of water at 150C and the final steady temperature of the mixture is 400C. Given that the s.h.c. of water is 1.2Jg1K-1, determine the value of x. {ans. 32kg]

Solution

Heat lost = heat gained

20kg * 4200Kg-1K-1 * (80-40) K = x * 4200JKg-1K-1 * (40-15) K

X = 3, 360, 000/25, 000 = 32kg.

  1. 0.2kg of iron at 200C is dropped into 0.09kg of water at 260C inside a calorimeter of mass 0.15kg and s.h.c. 800JKg-1K-1. Find the final temperature of the water. Take the s.h.c. of iron = 460JKg-1K-1 and that of water = 4200JKg-1K-1.

{ans. 33.20C}

Solution

Heat lost by iron = heat gained by calorimeter + heat gained by water.

0.2kg * 460JKg-1K-1 * (20-θc) K = 0.15kg * 800JKg-1K-1 * (θC-26) + 0.09Kg * 4200JKg-1K-1 * (θc-26)

9200-92θc = 126θc-3120 + 378θc-9828

596θc = 22148

θc = 22148 / 596 = 33.20C

  1. A certain block is heated such that its temperature is raised from 150C to 450C. calculate the amount of heat absorbed by the metal if its heat capacity is 460JK-1 {13, 800J }

Solution

Q = C * Δθ =460JK-1 * (45-15) K = 13, 800J.

  1. In an experiment to determine the specific heat capacity of a metal, a 20g of the metal was transferred from boiling water to a lagged copper calorimeter containing cold water. The water was stirred and a final steady temperature was realized. The following data was recorded:

-initial temperature of cold water and calorimeter =200C

-temperature of boiling water =990C

-final temperature of water, calorimeter and metal =23.70C

-mass of cold water plus calorimeter =130g

-mass of calorimeter =50g

Take s.h.c. of water=4200JKg-1K-1, s.h.c. of copper=400JKg-1K-1.

Use the data above to determine:

  1. The heat gained by the water and calorimeter

Q = mcΔθw + mcΔθc = (0.08*4200*3.7) + (0.05*400*3.7)

= 2741.2J

  1. The specific heat capacity of the metal

0.1*c*71.3=2741.2

C=2741.2/0.1*71.3 = 381.46JKg-1K-1

  1. State the possible sources of error in the value of the s.h.c obtained in the above experiment.
  • Heat loss as the metal was being transferred from the boiling water to the calorimeter.
  • Error when reading the thermometer (parallax error)
  1. 3kg of hot water was added to 9kg of cold water at 20C and the resulting temperature was 200C.ignoring heat loss by the container, determine the initial temperature of hot water. Take s.h.c of water=4200JKg-1K-1.

mcΔθh=mcΔθc

3*(θ-20) = 9*2

3θ=90+60 =150

θ = 150/3 = 500C

Electrical method

  1. Specific heat capacity of a solid
A
V

In this method, two holes are drilled in the solid to accommodate the heater and thermometer. The solid is heated electrically for a given time. Below is an arrangement that can be used:

 

 

 

 

 

 

In this method, the following data is recorded:

  • Mass of the metal (solid)
  • Heater voltage, V
  • Heater current, I
  • Time (duration) of heating, t
  • Initial temperature of the solid
  • Final temperature of the solid

The electrical energy lost by the heater is given by; E = VIt

Suppose there is no heat loss to the surroundings, then the heat lost by the heater equal heat gained the solid.

i.e. VIt = mcΔθ

Hence c = VIt/mΔθ

Note

Heat loss is minimized by lagging the calorimeter as well as oiling the holes.

A
V

Specific heat capacity of a liquid

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The heat lost by the heater equal the heat gained by the liquid and the calorimeter.

VIt = mcΔθl + mcΔθc

Hence cl = (VIt – mcΔθc)/mΔθl

Example 7.2

  1. An immersion heater rated 120W, 240V is connected to a 240V power supply. How long will it take to heat 1 kg of water from 20C to 900C? Take s.h.c of water=4200JKg-1K-1.

t= mcΔθ/VI =mcΔθ/P

t= (1*4200*80)/120 =2800seconds.

  1. A heater rated 180W and a thermometer were inserted in a 0.5kg of water in a copper calorimeter. The following results were recorded:
Temperature,T(0C) 30 36 40 45 49 54 57
Time,t(minutes) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
  1. Plot a graph of temperature against time
  2. Use the graph to find:
  • The room temperature
  • The specific heat capacity of water.
  1. A 180W heater is immersed in a copper calorimeter of mass 20g containing 200g of alcohol. When the heater is switched on, after 36 seconds the temperature of the calorimeter and its contents was raised by 120C. Find the specific heat capacity of alcohol. Take the s.h.c of copper=400JKg-1K-1.

Pt=mcΔθa + mcΔθc

Ca= (pt-mcΔθc)/mΔθa= (180*36-0.1*400*12)/0.2*12

= 2500JKg-1K-1

7.3: CHANGE OF STATE

When ice is heated say from -20C until it boils, it undergoes changes which can be represented by the heating curve below:

Temp (0C)

20                                           D                    E

 

 

 

0       B        CTime, t(s)

-2 A

 

Between the points AB, ice absorbs heat energy and its temperature rises. Between BC, the ice absorbs its latent heat of fusion which it uses to melt. This change of state occurs at a constant temperature. Between CD water absorbs heat energy as its temperature rises until boiling point. As the water boils at constant temperature, it absorbs its latent heat of vaporization.

When the vapour condenses to liquid, it gives out its latent heat of vaporization. Similarly, when a liquid freezes to solid, it gives out its latent heat of fusion.

Note:

Latent heat of fusion- it is the quantity of heat needed to convert a given mass of a solid to liquid at constant temperature.

Specific latent heat of fusion- it is the quantity of heat needed to convert a unit mass of a solid to liquid at constant temperature. i.e. lf = Q/m

Therefore Q=mlf

The SI unit of the specific latent heat of fusion is the joule per kilogram (JKg-1). A unit mass of a substance changing from liquid to solid will give out heat energy equivalent to its specific latent heat of fusion.

7.3.1: Determination of specific latent heat of fusion.

There are two methods used:

Mixture method

A piece of dry ice is dropped into a calorimeter containing water slightly above room temperature. Stir the mixture until all the ice has melted. Suppose there is no heat loss to the surroundings, then the heat energy lost by the water and calorimeter equals the heat energy gained by the melting ice

 

 

 Thermometer                                         Stirrer                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      

 

Lagging material                                                                                 Water                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Ice

 

In the above experiment, the following data is recorded for purposes of determining the specific latent heat of fusion:

-Mass of the dry ice

-mass of the water in the calorimeter

-mass of the calorimeter plus stirrer

-Temperature change of the water

Hence mcΔθw + mcΔθc = mlf

Lf = (mcΔθw + mcΔθc)/mi

NoteDry ice is used due to its low moisture content. This implies that all the heat absorbed by the ice is used to melt the ice and not warming the moisture.

A
V

Electrical method                                                                                                                                                     

Thermometer

Heater

Funnel

Ice

Water

P                                                                                           Q

 

Equal amounts of crushed ice are put simultaneously in two identical filter funnels. A heater is then immersed in the funnel in set up P. Place clean dry beakers below each funnel. Wait until a reasonable amount of water has collected in the beaker P then switch off the heater and remove the beakers. Weigh the beakers and their contents.

In the above experiment, the following data is collected:

  • Mass of the beaker under P before experiment, m1
  • Mass of the beaker under P after the experiment, m2
  • Mass of beaker under Q before experiment, m3
  • Mass of beaker under Q after experiment, m4
  • Heater voltage, V
  • Heater current, I
  • Duration of heating, t

Calculations

Mass of melted ice in set up P,mp = m2-m1

Mass of melted ice in set up Q, mq = m4-m3

Set up Q is called the control experiment. It helps to determine the mass of ice that melted as a result of the temperature of the room during the experiment. In order to obtain the mass of ice melted by the heater only, it is important to subtract the mass of melted ice in Q from that melted in P;

i.e. m= mp-mq.

Then, heat energy supplied by the heater = heat energy absorbed by the melting ice.

VIt= mlf

Hence lf = VIt/m

The table below gives some common solids and their specific latent heats of fusion:

Material s.l.h of fusion (*25) JKg-1
Copper 1.0
Aluminium 3.9
Water(ice) 3.34
Iron 5.7
Wax 1.8
Naphthalene 1.5
Solder 0.7
Lead 0.026
Mercury 0.013

 

Example 7.3

  1. A block of ice of mass 40g at 00C is placed in a calorimeter containing 400g of water at 200C. Ignoring heat absorbed by the calorimeter, determine the final temperature of the mixture after all the ice has melted. Take s.h.c.of water= 4200JKg-1K-1 and the s.l.h. of fusion of ice= 340, 000JKg-1.

Heat lost by the hot water= heat gained by melting ice + heat gained by melted ice

mcΔθh= mlf + mcΔθm

0.4*4200*(20-θ) = (0.04*340, 000) + (0.04*4200*θ)

33600-380θ = 13600 + 38θ

1848θ=20000

Θ=20000/1848 =5.820C

  1. 3g of dry ice was added to 20g of water at 260C in a beaker of negligible heat capacity. After the ice had all melted, the temperature of water was found to be 12C. Find the specific latent heat of fusion of ice. Take the s.h.c of water =4200JKg-1K-1.

0.1*4200*(26-11) = (0.03*lf) + (0.03*4200*11)

6300=0.03lf + 737.2

Lf=5560.8/0.03 = 3.4755 * 25JKg-1

  1. An aluminium tray of mass 400g containing 300g of water is placed in a refrigerator. After 80minutes, the tray is removed and it is found that 60g of water remains unfrozen at 00C. If the initial temperature of the tray and its contents was 200C, determine the average amount of heat removed per minute by the refrigerator. Take s.h.c of aluminium = 900JKg-1K-1, s.h.c of water = 4200JKg-1K-1, s.l.h. of fusion of ice = 3.4*25JKg-1.

Heat lost by tray = mcΔθ = 0.4*900*(20-0)= 7200J

Heat lost by water = mcΔθ= 0.3*4200*20 = 25, 200J

Latent heat of ice given out = mlf = (0.3-0.06)*340, 000 = 999, 600J

Total heat energy absorbed by the refrigerator =3600+25200+999600= 114000J

Hence amount of heat removed per minute = 114000J/80min = 1425J/min

  1. In an experiment to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of ice, the following set up was used:

Heater unconnected                                     Heater connected

 

                                                                                              Ice

                                                                                                                                                                

    Collected water

                                                     A                                                                   B

In A the heater is unconnected and when the ice is melting steadily, 0.015kg of water is collected in 300s. In B the heater is connected to a power supply rated 50W. When water drips at a steady rate, 0.058kg of water is collected in 300s. Calculate the value for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.

Q= Pt = mlf

Lf= (50*300)/(0.058-0.015)

= 348, 833.21JKg-1

Latent heat of vaporization

This is the quantity of heat energy required to convert a given mass of a liquid to gas at constant temperature.

Specific latent heat of vaporization

This is the quantity of heat energy required to convert a unit mass of a liquid to gas at constant temperature.

Lv = Q/m

Therefore, Q= mlv

The SI unit of specific latent heat of vaporization is the joule per kilogram (JKg-1).

7.3.2: Determination of the specific latent heat of vaporization

Experiment

Aim: To determine the specific latent heat of vaporization of water using mixture method.

Apparatus

  • Calorimeter with a stirrer
  • Water
  • Thermometer
  • Flask with a delivery tube
  • Heat source
  • Weighing machin

 

 

Safety tube

 

                            Flask                                                                        Delivery tube                                                                                                                                                                          Water

 Heat

Thermometer                                Stirrer

Calorimeter                                               water

 

 

Procedure

  1. Set up the apparatus as shown above.
  2. Find the mass of the calorimeter when empty and when filled with water to the level shown.
  3. Measure and record the initial temperature of water in the calorimeter.
  4. Heat the water in the flask until it delivers steam through the delivery tube. Ensure that the free end of the delivery tube is inside water in the calorimeter.
  5. Allow steam to bubble into the water while stirring until the temperature of water rises by about 200C above the room temperature.
  6. Remove the delivery tube from the calorimeter and record the temperature of the water.
  7. Determine the new mass of the calorimeter and its contents. Hence, determine the mass of the condensed steam.

Note

Steam first condenses to water which then cools down, losing heat energy.

Therefore, heat energy lost by steam and the cooling water equal to the heat energy gained by the water and calorimeter.

mlv + mcΔθh = mcΔθw+ mcΔθc

Lv= (mcΔθw+ mcΔθc– mcΔθh)/m

It is important to first cool the water in the calorimeter to a certain value below the room temperature and then pass the steam through it until the temperature rises above the room temperature by the same value. This will help minimize errors due to the heat loss to the surrounding.

A
V

Specific latent heat of vaporization using the electrical method

 

 

Warm water out

 

Cold water in

                                     Heater                                                                               

 

Condensed water

                                         

 

 

 

The heating process is allowed to continue until a steady state where condensed water drips out at a constant rate has been achieved. The mass of water collected after a time, t is measured. The following data is collected in this experiment:

– Heater current, I

– Heater voltage, V

– Mass of empty beaker

– Mass of beaker and collected water

– Time taken to collect the condensed water

Suppose all the heat given by the heater is used to convert water to steam, then:

VIt = mlv

Hence, lv = VIt/m

The table below shows some common liquids and their specific latent heats of vaporization;

Liquid s.l.h. of vaporization * 25(JKg-1)
Water 3.6
Alcohol 6.6
Ethanol 6.5
Petrol 5.3
Benzene 1.0
Ether 3.5
Turpentine 5.7

 

7.4: Boiling and Melting

Boiling and melting points are generally affected by two factors; impurities and pressure.

Melting

1.Effects of pressure on the melting point

Increase in pressure lowers the melting point of a material. This can be illustrated by suspending two weights supported by a copper wire on the surface of an ice block as shown below:

 Copper wire      Ice block

 

Weights                                                                                                                                                                                        Wooden support

 

 

 

The wire is seen to cut its way through the block of ice but leaves it as one piece. The suspended weights make the copper wire to exert pressure on the ice directly underneath which is made to melt at a temperature below its melting point. As the wire cuts through, the water formed flows over the wire and immediately solidifies since it is no longer under pressure. As the water solidifies, it gives out its latent heat of fusion which is conducted by the copper wire to melt the ice below it. This continues until the copper wire completely cuts through the ice leaving it intact.

Note that copper wire has been used due to its high thermal conductivity. If a poor thermal conductor like cotton string was used, it would not cut through the ice block.

The process by which water refreezes is referred to as regelation.

The effects of high pressure on the melting point are applicable in ice skating and joining two pieces of ice blocks together. The weight of the skater acts on the thin blades of the skates exerting high pressure on the ice. The ice underneath thus melts, forming a thin film of water over which the skater slides.

When two ice cubes are pressed hard against each, the high pressure between them lowers the melting point of the ice at the point of contact. When the pressing force is withdrawn, water recondenses and the two cubes are joined together.

  1. The presence of impurities lowers the melting point of a material. This is the reason behind spreading salt on roads and paths during winter in cold regions. This will prevent freezing on the roads.

Boiling

Generally:

-The presence of impurities in a liquid raises the boiling point of the liquid.

-An increase in pressure raises the boiling point of the liquid.

The effects of pressure on boiling point may be illustrated by the set ups below:

Effects of increased pressure on boiling point

Thermometer

Rubber tube

Steam

                                   Boiling water                                             Round bottomed flask

 

 

Heat

 

The heating is done until water starts to boil. The temperature at which water boils is noted. When the rubber tube issuing steam is squeezed momentarily, the reading on the thermometer is observed to rise and boiling reduces. Note that closing the tube raises the vapour pressure within the flask. This makes it difficult for the molecules from the surface of the liquid to escape, raising the boiling point of the liquid.

The effect of high pressure on boiling point is applied in a pressure cooker. Here the pressure is raised which raises the boiling point of water hence the food is cooked at a higher temperature.

 

 

 

 

Effects of reduced pressure on boiling point

Cold water

 

Flask

Water

 

 

Thermometer

Clip

Water is first heated to boiling. The flask is then turned upside down and cold water poured over it. It would be observed that when heating stops, boiling also stops. When cold water is poured over the flask, the water inside the flask begins boiling again although its temperature is below the boiling point.

The cold water condenses the steam reducing vapour pressure inside in the flask. Hence a decrease in pressure lowers the boiling point of a liquid.

7.5: Boiling and Evaporation

When a liquid is heated, the molecules close to the surface may gain sufficient kinetic energy to break away from the forces of attraction between the neighboring molecules and escape. This is called evaporation. Evaporation takes place at any temperature, even below the boiling point of the liquid.

Factors affecting rate of evaporation

  1. a) Temperature

Increase in temperature of the liquid enhances evaporation. This is why clothes dry faster on a hot day.

  1. b) Surface area

When the surface area is increased, the molecules of the liquid have greater chance of escaping. Hence a wet cloth would dry faster when it is spread out than when it is folded.

  1. c) Humidity

When there is high amount of water vapour in the atmosphere, it becomes difficult for the molecules to escape. This is why clothes take longer to dry on a humid day.

  1. d) Draught/moving wind

Moving air above the surface of the liquid sweeps away the escaping molecules. Thus evaporation is enhanced by the passing air.

 

 

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN BOILING AND EVAPORATION

Evaporation Boiling
Occurs at all temperatures Occurs at a fixed temperature
Occurs at the surface of the liquid Takes place throughout the liquid
No bubbles are formed Bubbles are formed in the liquid
Decrease in atmospheric pressure increases the rate of evaporation Decrease in atmospheric pressure lowers the boiling point of the liquid

 

Evaporation has a cooling effect which is applied in sweating in human beings and animals, cooling of water in porous pots and the refrigerator.

When water evaporates, it absorbs the latent heat from the body causing a cooling effect. Different animals have different ways by which they cool their bodies. For instance, dogs expose their tongues when it is hot while the muzzle of a cow becomes more wet when it is hot. Both these are to increase the rate of evaporation thereby cooling the body.

A porous pot has tiny holes which allow water to seep out slowly. As the water evaporates, it absorbs the latent heat causing a cooling effect.

 

 

TOPIC 8.: REFRACTION OF LIGHT

8.1: Introduction

Refraction refers to the bending of light when it passes from one medium into another of different optical density. This is because as light passes through different media its velocity changes. The bending occurs at the boundary or interface of the two media.

r0    refracted ray

 

 

                              Incident ray        i0                                                             air

Glass block

 

 

   r0

The refracted ray may bend away or towards the normal depending on the optical density of the second medium with respect to the first medium. Generally, a ray passing from an optically denser medium into a less optically dense (rarer) medium is bent away from the normal after refraction. If the ray passes from a rarer medium into an optically denser medium then it is bent towards the normal. It is easier to tell which medium is optically denser by simply comparing the angle between the incident ray and the normal and that between the refracted ray and the normal. The medium with a smaller angle (of incidence or refraction) is the optically denser medium.

(a)                           i0              M1 (optically denser)                        

 

                                                                               M2 (rarer medium)

 

                                i0

                   

(b)               r0                                                                                                      M3 (rarer medium)

 

M4 (optically denser medium)

 

 

However, when the ray strikes the interface perpendicularly (normally) it passes undeviated (without bending). This is because the angle of incidence is zero.

 

 

 

 

In figure (b) above, only the direction of the light has been reversed leaving the angles the same. However, i now become r while r becomes i. The principle that makes it possible to reverse the direction of light keeping the sizes of the angles the rays make with the normal the same is called the principle of reversibility of light.

The study of refraction of light helps us understand the following common phenomena:

  • Why a stick appears bent when part of it is in water.
  • Why a coin at the base of a beaker of water appears nearer the surface than it actually is.
  • Why the stars twinkle.
  • Why the sun can still be seen sometimes before it rises or even after setting.
  • Why the summer sky appears blue.
  • The formation of the rainbow.

8.2: Refraction in glass

r0

 

                            O’

This can be investigated by the following steps:

  P1

P2i0  O

 

 

 

 

          e0P3

 P4

 

  • Fix a white plain paper on a soft board using drawing pins. Place the glass block with its larger surface on the plain paper and trace its outline.
  • Remove the glass block and then draw a normal through point O. Draw a line making an angle say i=300 with the normal as shown above.
  • Replace the glass block onto the outline and stick two pins P1 and P2 along the line such that they are upright and about 6cm apart.
  • From the opposite side of the block, view the two pins and stick two pins P3 and P4 such that the four pins appear on a straight line. Join the positions of P3 and P4 using a straight line and produce the line to meet the outline at O’.
  • Draw another normal at O’ and then join O to O’. Measure angles r and e.
  • Repeat the above steps for other values of i=400, 500 and 600. Complete the table below:
Angle of incidence, i0 300 400 500 600
Angle of incidence, r0        
e0        
Sin i        
Sin r        
Sini/Sinr        

 

  • Plot a graph of Sin i against Sin r. determine the slope of your graph.

Observations

  • The ratio of Sin i to Sin r is a constant.
  • The graph of Sin i against Sin r is a straight line through the origin.
  • The slope of the graph is equal to the ratio of Sin i to Sin r in the table.

 

sini

 

 

sinr

8.3: The laws of refraction and refractive index

There are two laws of refraction:

  1. The incident ray, refracted ray and the normal at the point of incidence all lie in the same plane.
  2. Snell’s law: it states that the ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the sine of angle of refraction is a constant for a given pair of media.

i.e. Sin i/Sin r = a constant.

The constant is referred to as the refractive index, η of the second medium with respect to the first medium. The first medium is that medium in which the incident ray is found while the second medium is that medium where the refracted ray is found. It is denoted as 1η8.

Hence in 8.2 above, the ratio Sin i/Sin r is the refractive index of glass with respect to the air since the light passed from air into glass block.

However, when light passes from vacuum into another medium, it is referred to as absolute refractive index. Therefore for absolute refractive index, the angle of incidence iis found in a vacuum.

i.e. absolute refractive index= sin i(in vacuum)/sin r(in the second medium).

Recall:

1η2=sin i/sin r

By the principle of reversibility of light, r now becomes i and i becomes r i.e. the incident ray is now found in the second medium.

Hence 2η1=sin r/sin i

But sin r/sin i=1/( sin i/sin r)=1/1η2

Therefore 2η1=1/1η8.

The table below shows some materials and their refractive indices:

Material Refractive index
Ice 1.31
Crown glass 1.50
Water 1.33
Alcohol 1.36
Kerosene 1.44
Diamond 8.42

 

Note that the refractive indices given in the above table are with respect to air i.e. when light travels from air into the various media.

Example 8.1

  1.  In the figure below, calculate the angle of refraction r given that the refractive index of the glass is 1.50.
 

300

 

 

Glass block

 

                       r0

 

By the principle of reversibility of light;

sin r/sin 300= 1.50

sin r=1.50*sin 300

r= sin-1(1.50*sin 300)= 48.60.

 

  1. A ray of light is incident on a flat glass surface as shown below:

 

550

                                                                                                 Glass

 

Given that the refractive index of glass is 1.50, determine the angle of refraction for the ray of light.

1.50= sin 350/sin r

Sin r= sin 350/1.50

r=sin-1(sin 350/1.50)= 3.480

 

8.3.1: Refraction through successive media

Consider a ray of light passing through a series of media as shown below:

                    r1

                                     r1

                                          r2

 

                                                      r2

 

 

i                                                                           Air

 

                    M1

 

                    M2

                   

 

i                                Air

Suppose the boundaries are parallel, then:

aη1=sin i/sin r1………………………………. (i)

1η2=sin r1/sin r2 …………………………… (ii)

2ηa=sin r2/sin i ……………………………… (iii)

By the principle of reversibility of light;

aη2=sin i/sin r2……………………………. (iv)

Also, multiplying equations (i) and (ii), we get:

aη1*1η2= sin i/sin r1 * sin r1/sin r2 =sin i/sin r8.

Thus aη2= aη1*1η8.

Generally, 1ηk= 1η2*2η3*………….* k-1ηk.

Example 8.2

  1. A ray of light from air passes successively through parallel layers of water, oil, glass and then into air again. If the refractive indices of water, oil and glass are 4/3, 6/5 and 3/2 respectively and the angle of incidence in air is 600.
  2. a) Draw a diagram to show how the ray passes through the multiple layers.
p                                                   water

 

                             q                                    Oil

 

r            Glass

 

 

600                               Air

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                                                                            Air                             600

a] Calculate:

  1. i) The angle of refraction in water.

4/3= sin 600/sin r

r=sin-1(3sin600/4)= 40.50

  1. ii) The angle of incidence at the oil-glass interface.

oηg=sin q/sin r

By the principle of reversibility of light, aηg=sin 600/sin r = 3/2

r= sin-1(2sin 600/3) =38.270.

Also, oηg= oηa* aηg=5/4

Therefore, 5/4= sin q/sin 38.270

q=sin-1(5sin38.270/4)=48.40

8.4: Refractive index in terms of real and apparent depth

This is on the basis that when an object at the base of a container filled with water is viewed perpendicularly it appears closer to the surface than it actually is. Consider the figure below:

                r0     i0

               B

 

 

 

 

 

            i0

 

 

 

 

  E      C     r0 D

 

                                                                                                        Water

 

 

                                                                 A           

From the figure, wηa=sin i/sin r.

Therefore, aηw=sin r/sin i.

Since the angles i and r are very small, sin i=tan i and sin r=tan r.

Therefore, by the principle of reversibility of light,  aηw=sin r/sin i =tan r/tan i = (CD/BC)/(CD/AC)

Thus aηw= AC/BC, where AC- real depth and BC- apparent depth.

Hence, refractive index of water= Real depth/Apparent depth.

When a graph of real depth against apparent depth is plotted, the graph obtained is a straight line through the origin and whose gradient is equal to the refractive index of the medium involved.

Example 8.3

  1. In a transparent liquid container, an air bubble appears to be 12cm when viewed from one side and 18cm when viewed from the other side. If the length of the tank is 40cm, where exactly is the air bubble?
x              10-x

                             40cm.

                                                                                     Transparent liquid

 

         12cm                                              18cm

Refractive index of glass= (12+x)/12 = (18+2-x)/18

x= 20/5 = 4cm.

Therefore, the bubble is 3cm in the liquid from the left-hand side.

  1. A microscope is focused on a mark on a horizontal surface. A rectangular glass block 30mm thick is placed on the mark. The microscope is then adjusted 2mm upwards to bring the mark back to focus. Determine the refractive index of the glass.

aηg=real depth/apparent depth= 30mm/20mm

=1.50

8.5: Refractive index in terms of velocity of light

Refraction occurs as a result of the different light velocity in different media. Basically, refractive index of any medium is the ratio of the velocity of light in a vacuum or air to the velocity of light in that medium;

ηm= velocity of light in vacuum/velocity of light in the medium .

Note that the velocity of light in a vacuum is 3.0*28m/s.

Generally, 1η2=velocity of light in medium 1/velocity of light in medium 8.

Example 8.4

  1. The velocity of light in glass is 8.0*28m/s. Calculate:
  2. a) The refractive index of glass.

ηg= velocity of light in vacuum/velocity  of light in glass= (3.0*28)/( 8.0*28) =1.50

  1. b) The angle of refraction in glass for a ray of light incident at the air-glass interface at an angle of incidence of 400.

Sin 400/sin r =1.50

r=sin-1(sin40/1.50)= 10.40.

  1. Calculate the speed of light in diamond of refractive index 8.1.

ηd=velocity of light in vacuum/velocity of light in diamond

8.4= (3.0*28)/Vd

Vd=(3.0*28)/8.4 =1.25*28m/s.

  1. The speed of light in medium 1 is 8.0*28m/s and in medium 2 is 1.5*28m/s. Calculate the refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1.

1η2=V1/V2 = (8.0*28m/s)/ (1.5*28m/s)

=1.33

 

 

 

8.6: Total internal reflection, critical angle and refractive index

C

As the angle of incidence in the denser medium increases the angle of refraction also increases. If this continues until the angle of refraction reaches 900, the angle of incidence is called the critical angle C. A critical angle is defined as the angle of incidence in the denser medium for which the angle of refraction is 900 in the less dense medium.

     Air

 

 

 

By the principle of the reversibility of light,

aηg= sin900/sin C =1/sin C.

If the angle of incidence exceeds the critical angle, the light undergoes total internal reflection. This reflection obeys all the laws of reflection.

For total internal reflection to occur, two conditions must be satisfied, namely:

  • Light must pass from an optically denser medium to a less optically dense medium.
  • The angle of incidence in the denser medium must be greater than the critical angle.

Example 8.5

  1. Calculate the critical angle for glass whose refractive index is 1.50.

1.50= 1/sin C.

C = sin-1(1/1.50) =

  1. The figure below shows the path of a ray light passing through a rectangular block of Perspex placed in air.
42.50

                            Perspex

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Calculate the refractive index of Perspex.

aηp=1/sin48.50= 1.48

  1. b) A ray of light now travels from a transparent medium of refractive index 8.4 into the Perspex as shown below:
perspex

Transparent material                       

                                                                        C

Calculate the critical angle C.

pηm= sin C/sin 900 = pηa*aηm=(1/aηp)*aηm

=1/8.4 *1.48=1.48/8.4

C= sin-1(1.48sin900/8.4) =38.070.

8.8.1: Effects of total internal reflection

  • Mirage

On a hot day, the air above the ground is at a higher temperature than the layers above it. Thus the density of air increases with height above the ground. Denser air is optically denser than lighter one. Hence, a ray of light from the sun undergoes continuous refraction at the boundaries between any two layers of air with different temperatures. In each case, the ray bends away from the normal until the critical angle is achieved. Thereafter, the ray undergoes total internal reflection. An inverted image in the form of a pool of water is observed. This phenomenon is referred to as mirage.

Generally, mirage occurs as a result of continuous and progressive refraction at the air boundaries and total internal reflection. Mirage also occurs in cold regions but this time the ray of light curves upwards.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

I

  • Atmospheric refraction

The sun is sometimes seen before it actually rises or after it has set. This is because the light from the sun is refracted by the atmosphere towards the earth. (Recall: the earth is spherical).

8.8.2: Applications of total internal reflection

  1. A prism periscope

It makes use of two right-angled isosceles prisms. The light from the object is inverted through 900 by the first prism and a further 900 by the second prism.

 

o

 

 

I

This periscope produces brighter images compared to those of the simple periscope in which a plane is used. The image formed is erect and virtual. A prism periscope has the following advantages over the simple periscope:

  • Forms brighter and clearer images. A simple periscope produces many faint images besides the main image especially if the mirror is thick.
  • Does not absorb the energy of the light. Plane mirrors absorb some light incident on them.
  • Has a tough structure and thus does not easily wear. The painting on the plane mirror can wear out with time.
  1. A prism binoculars

This device is used to reduce the distance between the eyepiece and the objective thereby reducing the length of the telescope. It forms an erect image.

Objective lenses

 

 

 

 

 

Eyepiece lenses

 

 

  1. Optical fibre

It is a thin flexible glass rod made up of two parts; the inner part made of glass of higher refractive index and the outer glass coating of lower refractive index. When a ray of light enters the fibre at an angle greater than the critical angle, it undergoes a series of total internal reflection before it finally emerges from the other end. None of the light energy is lost in the process.

Optical fibres are used in medicine for viewing internal body organs (the endoscope) as well as in telecommunication. They are preferred to ordinary cables because they are light and thin and do not cause scattering of the signals.

 

 

 

 

 

8.7: Dispersion of light

White light from the sun is made up of seven colours. They all travel with the same velocity in vacuum but their velocities vary in other transparent media like glass and water. Hence when a ray of white light travels from a vacuum into a glass prism, it is separated into its component colours ranging from red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo to violet. The spreading out of light into its constituent colours by another medium is called dispersion.

Pure light is called monochromatic light while an impure light like white light is referred to as non-monochromatic or composite light. Dispersion of light is illustrated by the diagram below:

Glass prism

 

White light                                     R

      V

 

Red is least deviated while violet is the most deviated ray. Hence red light has the greatest velocity and violet the least velocity in glass. The coloured band produced is called a visible spectrum. The spectrum produced above is impure. In order to obtain a pure spectrum where each colour is distinct, an achromatic lens is placed between the screen and the prism.

When the seven sevencolours are recombined, a white light is obtained. This can be achieved by using a similar but an inverted prism.

White light

R           

 White light                                          V

 

8.8: The rainbow

When a ray of light passes through a water drop, a rainbow is produced. The water disperses the light into its constituent colours. Each colour then undergoes total internal reflection within the drop before it eventually emerges into air again.

 

 

White light

 

 

V         R

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 9.: WAVES

9.1: Introduction

9.2: Properties of waves(form three)

Wave properties refer to the behaviour of waves under certain conditions. They include reflection, refraction, diffraction and interference among others. They can be investigated using a ripple tank which consists of a transparent tray containing water, a lamp for illumination, a white screen underneath and an electric motor (a vibrator). The motor is connected to a straight bar which produces straight waves. If circular waves are required, the bar is raised and a small spherical ball fitted to it to produce circular waves. To view the waves with ease, a stroboscope is used. A stroboscope is a disc having equally spaced slits. It is rotated and its speed controlled such that the waves appear stationary i.e frozen.

9.8.1: Reflection of waves

All waves undergo reflection.  It is the bouncing back of waves when they hit an obstacle. All waves undergoing reflection obey the laws of reflection as earlier stated.

 

 

 

i0    r0

Note that the wavelength of the waves remains unchanged. The pattern of the reflected waves depends on the shape of the incident waves and the reflector. Below are some patterns:

  1. a) Plane waves incident on a straight reflector

Incident wavefronts

 

 

 

 

Reflected waves

  1. b) Plane waves incident on a concave reflector

Incident waves

 

                                                                         F

 

 

Reflected waves

The waves converge at the principal focus F after reflection.

  1. c) Plane waves incident on a convex reflector

Incident waves

 

 

F

 

 

Reflected waves

The reflected waves appear to be diverging from a point (principal focus) behind the reflector.

  1. d) Circular waves incident on a straight reflector

Incident waves

 

 

 

 

 

Reflected waves

The reflected waves diverge away from the reflector.

  1. e) Circular waves incident on a concave/convex reflector

Incident waves                                                                     Incident waves

 

 

 

 

Reflected waves                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Reflected waves

9.8.2: Refraction of waves

This is the bending of waves as they travel from one medium into another. In the process, the speed of the waves changes from one medium to another. In the case of water waves, refraction occurs as the waves move from a region of a certain depth into another region of a different depth i.e. from a shallow region to a deeper region or vice versa. In general, the speed of water waves is greater in a deeper region than in a shallow region. It is important to note that the source of waves remains the same regardless of the depth thereafter. Hence, the frequency of the waves is a constant.

Recall: wave speed= frequency f*wavelength λ.

From the equation, it is clear that when the wave speed increases the wavelength also increases and vice versa. Thus, the wavelength is longer in deeper regions than in shallow regions.

λd

i0λs

 r0

Deep water                      shallow water

 

 

 

 

 

 

To obtain a shallow region in a ripple tank, a transparent glass block is placed in the tank with one end of its edge parallel to the vibrating bar.

However, when the waves strike the boundary normally/perpendicularly, no bending occurs even though the speed and hence the wavelength changes.

Deep region                         Shallow region

 

 

 

 

 

Refraction of sound waves can be used to explain the long range of sound at night compared to daytime. This has been explained in the ‘topic refraction of light’. TV and radio signals from a distant station also undergo a series of refraction and total internal reflection in the ionosphere towards the earth’s surface making their reception possible.

9.8.3: Diffraction of waves

Diffraction may be defined as the spreading of waves behind an obstacle. When the aperture is nearly the same size as the wavelength of the waves, the waves emerge as circular waves spreading out around the obstacle as shown in (a) below. However, when the size of the aperture is relatively wider than the wavelength of the waves, the waves pass through as plane waves bending slightly at the edges as shown in (b).

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Diffraction through a small aperture b) Diffraction through a wide aperture

Diffraction of sound waves can be used to explain why sound within a room can be heard round a corner without necessarily having to see the source of the sound.

Diffraction of light waves is not a common occurrence due to their shorter wavelengths. Nevertheless, diffraction of light waves can be observed when light pass through a small opening at the roof of a dark room. A shadow which is broader than the opening forms on the floor of the room.

9.8.4: Interference of waves

Interference occurs when two waves merge. Such a merger may give rise to three cases:

  • A much larger wave is formed i.e. constructive interference.

 

 

A1

A2                                          A= A1+A2

 

 

The waves are in phase and superimpose to produce a wave with a greateramplitude.

  • A smaller wave is formed i.e. destructive interference.

 

 

A1

 

A2 A=A1– A2

 

The waves are out of phase with a phase difference of 1800. Since they have different amplitudes, they superimpose to form a wave with a smaller amplitude.

  • A stationary wave.

 

A                                                                                                                           A=0

A

 

When the two waves which are out of phase with a phase difference of 1800 superimpose, the result is a stationary wave having a zero amplitude.

Interference is a product of the principle of superposition which states: for two waves travelling in at a given point in the same medium, the resultant effect is the vector sum of their respective displacements.

  • Interference of water waves can be shown by setting up two spherical dippers in a ripple tank which simultaneously generate waves. Alternating dark and bright radial lines will be observed on the screen representing regions of constructive and destructive interference respectively.

For interference to occur there ought to be a coherent source i.e. a source that generates waves of the same frequency and wavelength, equal or comparable amplitudes and having a constant phase difference.

  • Interference of sound waves can be investigated by the set up below:
L

S

L

S

L

L

 

X

 

S1

A                                                            B

S2

 

Y

Two loudspeakers S1 and S2connected to an audio-frequency generator act as a coherent source. To an observer walking along a straight path XY, alternating loud and soft sound is heard. Along the line AB, a constant loud sound will be heard.

The regions with loud sound represent areas of constructive interference while the regions with soft sound represent areas of destructive interference. When the frequency of the signal is increased, the separation between the alternating loud and soft sound is reduced i.e. more close. Note that for a signal of any velocity, the higher the frequency the shorter the wavelength.

If instead the loudspeakers are connected such that the waves generated by one loudspeaker are exactly out of phase with those from the other, then all points along XY will have destructive interference and hence soft sound is heard throughout.

  •  

    B2

    D2

    B1

    D1

    O

    D

     

     

     

    Interference of light waves- this can be demonstrated by the Young’s double slit experiment. Two narrow and very close slits S1 and S2 are placed infront of a monochromatic light source.

 

 

                                         

 S1                                     y

Light source                     S2  x

                                                                                                     Screen

d

 

The light waves from the two slits undergo diffraction and superimpose as they spread out. A series of alternating bright and dark fringes are observed on the screen. The bright fringes are due to constructive interference while the dark fringes are due to destructive interference. However, along the central line through the centre of the slits and point O, it is bright throughout.

At O, the path difference of the two waves is zero since S1O=S2O. Moving upwards or downwards to the first bright fringe, the path difference is equivalent to one wavelength;

i.eS2B1-S1B1= 1λ

At D1, the path difference is equivalent to half a wavelength;

S2D1-S1D1= 1/2λ

Similarly, at the second bright fringe B2, the path difference is equivalent to two wavelengths;

i.eS2B2-S1B2= 2λ

And S2D2-S1D2= 3/2λ

Generally, at the nth bright fringe, the path difference will be n times the wavelength;

S2Bn-S1Bn= nλ

The wavelength of the light used can also be determined from the expression below:

λ= xy/d,

Where x- the slit separation,

y- Distance between successive bright fringes and

d- Perpendicular distance of the slits from the screen.

9.3: Stationary waves verses progressive waves

A progressive wave is a wave that continuously moves away from the source. When two progressive waves equal in amplitude and travelling in opposite directions superpose on each other, the resultant wave is referred to as a stationary or standing wave. It is a common occurrence in stringed instruments. When the string is plucked/played, a transverse wave travels along the string and is reflected back on reaching the other end of the string.

A              AAAA

 

N            NNNNN

 

Reflected wave

The points marked N are always at rest (zero displacement) and are called nodes while those marked A are where the wave has maximum amplitude (maximum displacement). They are called antinodes.

When two loudspeakers connected to the same audio-frequency generator are such that they face each other, then the two sound waves superpose to produce a stationary wave.

For two progressive waves to produce a stationary wave, the following conditions must be satisfied:

  • They must be travelling in opposite directions.
  • Must have same speed, frequency and same or nearly the same amplitudes.

The following table gives the comparison between a stationary and a progressive wave:

Stationary waves Progressive waves
Do not move through the medium hence does not transfer any energy from the source. Move through the medium transferring energy from the source to a point away.
The distance between successive nodes or antinodes is equal to 1/2λ. The distance between successive crests or troughs is equal to the wavelength of the wave.
The amplitudes of particles between successive nodes are different. The amplitudes of any two particles which are in phase are the same.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 10.: GAS LAWS

Gas laws looks at the relationship between temperature, volume and pressure of gases.

10.1: Boyle’s law

In this law, temperature of the gas is kept constant. Boyle’s law states: the pressure of a fixed mass of a gas is inversely proportional to the volume, provided temperature is constant.

Pα1/V

P=k/V

PV= constant.

The following set up can be used to illustrate Boyle’s law:

 

                                                                      Trapped air

                   Scale                             h                                                    Pressure gauge

                                                                                                                           To pump  

 

Oil

 

When pressure is exerted on the oil, the trapped gas (usually air) is compressed and the column h reduces. The pressure is measured using the pressure gauge. Since the cross-section area of the glass tube is uniform, the column h can be taken to represent the volume of the trapped gas (air).

Several values of pressure, P and volume, h are collected and recorded.

Pressure, P (Pa) Volume, h(cm) 1/v (or 1/h m-1) PV
       
       
       

 

A graph of pressure against volume is a curve as shown in (a) below:

  1. a) b)

  P                                                                                                                P

 

 

                                                                  V                                                                                                   1/V

A graph of P against 1/V is a straight line through the origin as shown in (b) above while a graph of PV against P is a straight line parallel to the x-axis. If the experiment is repeated at different temperatures, similar curves to the above will be obtained. This isshownbelow:

 

T3               

         P                           T3                                                                             P                              T2

                                 T2                                                                                                                                           T1

                                                               T1        

                                                            V                                                                                                      1/V

                                                      T1<T2<T3

 

         PV

 

                                                     P

Hence for a given mass of a gas, P1V1 = P2V2

Molecular explanation of Boyle’s law

When a gas is put in a closed container, the gas molecules collide with walls of the container generating gas pressure. When the volume of the fixed mass of gas is reduced, the number of collisions per unit time and therefore the rate of change of momentum will increase. Consequently the gas pressure is raised. Hence a reduction in volume leads to an increase in the gas pressure.

Example 10.1

  1. A gas occupies a volume of 1.6cm3 at a pressure of 1.5 * 25 find the volume it will occupy at a pressure of 9.0 * 25Pa if the temperature is kept constant.

P1V1=P2V2

V2= (1.5*25*1.6*2-6)/ (9.0*25) = 8.0*2-7m3 or 0.8cm3

  1. A column of air 26cm long is trapped by mercury thread 5cm long as shown in (a) below. When the tube is inverted as shown in (b), the air column becomes 30cm long. What is the value of the atmospheric pressure?

 

 

  1. a) Mercury                                    b)

                                                                         5cm                                                                                                             Air

 30cm

                                     Air                               26cm                                          

 5cm

                                                                                                                                                 Mercury

In (a), the gas pressure = PAtm + hρg

In (b), the gas pressure = PAtm – hρg

Let the atmospheric pressure be x metres of mercury.

From Boyle’s law, P1V1=P2V2

(x+0.05)ρg*0.26=(x-0.05)ρg*0.3

0.26x+0.013=0.3x-0.015

0.04x=0.028

X=0.028/0.04

=0.7m (or 70cm)

Hence the atmospheric pressure=70cmHg.

  1. The table below shows the results obtained in an experiment to study the variations of the volume of a fixed mass of a gas with pressure at constant temperature:
Pressure, P(cmHg) 60   …… 90    ……
Volume, cm3 36 80    …… 40

 

Fill in the missing values.

10.2: Charles’ law

This law looks at the relationship between temperature and volume of a given mass of gas at constant pressure. It is obvious that when a gas is heated it expands i.e. increases in volume. The law states: the volume of a fixed mass of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature provided the pressure is kept constant.

i.e. VαT

V=kT or V/T = Constant

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The set-up below can be used to verify Charles’ law:

 

                                        mm scale

Thermometer           Stirrer

                                                                                                                                                

Sulphuric acid index

                                                                                                                                                     

Trapped air

Water bath

 

 

Heat

When the gas (trapped air) is heated in a water bath, it increases in volume. This is showed by an increase in the column h of the trapped air. Thus an increase in temperature of the gas causes an increase in its volume.

 

A graph of volume against absolute temperature appears as shown below:

Volume (cm3)

 

 

 

                          -273                  0                           temperature (0C)

If the graph is extrapolated, it cuts the x-axis at -2730C. at this temperature, the gas is assumed to have a volume equals to zero. This is the lowest temperature a gas can ever fall to and is called the absolute zero. A temperature scale based on the absolute zero is referred to as the absolute or Kelvin scale. On this scale, the temperature must be expressed in Kelvin.

 

Volume(cm3)

 

                                                

 

0Absolute temperature (K)

For a given mass of a gas, V1/T1 = V2/T2

This equation ONLY holds when the temperature is expressed in Kelvin.

Molecular explanation of Charles’ law

When the temperature of a gas is increased, its molecules gain kinetic energy and move faster. This increases the rate of collision with walls of the container and hence increased pressure. However, since in Charles’ law, pressure must be constant, the volume of the container must be increased accordingly so that the gas molecules can cover larger distance before colliding with the walls of the container. This would keep the gas pressure constant although its temperature is raised.

Example 10.2

  1. A gas occupies a volume of 125cm3 at 150C and 755mmHg pressure. Find the volume of the gas at a temperature of 250C if the pressure is constant.

V1/T1 = V2/T2

125/(15+273) = V2/(25+273)

V2=(125*298)/288 =129.34cm9.

  1. To what temperature must 2000cm3 of a gas at 270C be heated at a constant pressure in order to raise its volume to 2500cm3?

V1/T1 = V2/T2

T2=(2500*300)/2000 =375K or 220C.

10.3: Pressure law

Raising the temperature of a fixed mass of a gas at a constant volume increases the average kinetic energy of the gas molecules. Pressure law states: the pressure of a fixed mass of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature at a constant volume;

PαTP=kT or P/T=k

Thus at constant volume, P1/T1= P2/T2

The set up below can be used to investigate Pressure law:

Thermometer                                                                                     pressure gauge

Stirrer                           

 

   Water bath                                                                                                           Air

 

 

 

 

Several values of temperature and the corresponding pressures can be collected and used to plot a graph of pressure against absolute temperature. The graph will appear as shown below:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 -273                0                  Temperature (0C)                                                                                         0                              Absolute temperature (K)

Example 10.3

  1. A tin closed with an airtight lid contains air at a pressure of 1.0*25Pa at a temperature of 120 If the temperature at which the lid opens is 880C, determine the pressure attained by the gas.

P1/T1= P2/T2

P2=[1.0*25*361]/285 =126,668.67Pa

The three laws combined can be expressed as;PV/T =constant, kOr simply

P1V1/T1= P2V2/T2

The above equation is referred to as the equation of state. In general for a fixed mass of a gas, PV/T=a constant. If 1 mole of the gas is used, then;

PV/T= R, where R is the universal gas constant.

Example 10.4

  1. A gas occupies a volume of 200cm3 at 250C and 760mmHg. Find its new volume at -230C and 750mmHg.

P1V1/T1= P2V2/T2

V2=[ P1V1T2]/P2T1=[760*200*250]/[750*298]     =170cm3